Contents

BMW 128i Convertible 1 Series 2013 Owner's Manual PDF

1 of 288
1 of 288

Summary of Content for BMW 128i Convertible 1 Series 2013 Owner's Manual PDF

THE BMW 1 SERIES. OWNER'S MANUAL.

Owner's Manual for Vehicle

The Ultimate Driving Machine

Contents A - Z

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

1 Series Owner's Manual for Vehicle Congratulations, and thank you for choosing a BMW.

Thorough familiarity with your vehicle will provide you with enhanced control and security when you drive it. We therefore have this request:

Please take the time to read this Owner's Manual and familiarize yourself with the information that we have compiled for you before starting off in your new vehicle. It contains important data and instructions intended to assist you in gaining maximum use and satisfaction from your BMW's unique range of technical fea- tures. The manual also contains information on maintenance designed to enhance operating safety and contribute to main- taining the value of your BMW throughout an extended service life.

This manual is supplemented by a Service and Warranty Informa- tion Booklet for US models or a Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.

We wish you an enjoyable driving experience.

BMW AG

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

2013 Bayerische Motoren Werke Aktiengesellschaft Munich, Germany Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written consent of BMW AG, Munich. US English VI/13, 07 13 500 Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

Addendum

ADDENDUM TO BMW 1 SERIES OWNERS MANUAL 1402911223

We wanted to provide you with some updates and clarifications with respect to the printed BMW Owners Manual. These updates and clarifications will supersede the materials contained in that document.

1. Where the terms service center, the service center, your service center, service specialist, or service are used in the Owners Manual, we wanted to clarify that the terms refer to a BMW dealers service center or another service center or repair shop that employs trained personnel that can perform maintenance and repair work on your vehicle in accordance with BMW specifications.

2. Where the text of the Owners Manual contains an affirmative instruction to contact a service center or your service center, we wanted to clarify that BMW recommends that, if you are faced with one of the situations addressed by that text, you contact or seek the assistance of a BMW dealers service center or another service center or repair shop that employs trained personnel that can perform maintenance and repair work on your vehicle in accordance with BMW specifications.

While BMW of North America LLC, at no cost to you, will pay for repairs required by the limited warranties provided with respect to your

vehicle and for maintenance under the Maintenance Program during the applicable warranty and maintenance coverage periods, you are free to elect, both during those periods and thereafter, to have maintenance and repair work provided by other service centers or repair shops.

3. Where the Owners Manual makes reference to parts and accessories having been approved by BMW, those references are intended to reflect that those parts and accessories are recommended by BMW of North America LLC. You may elect to use other parts and accessories, but, if you do, we recommend that you make sure that any such parts and/or accessories are appropriate for use on your vehicle.

4. At page 5, under the warranty sections discussion of homologation, where it states that you cannot lodge warranty claims for your vehicle there, the text should read that you may not be able to lodge warranty claims for your vehicle there.

5. At page 5, in the Parts and Accessories section, the sentence beginning For your own safety, use . . . , should be disregarded and the following the text should be read in lieu thereof: The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends using

Addendum

genuine parts and accessories approved by BMW.

In the fifth sentence of that paragraph, the word cannot should read does not.

6. At page 55, in the Damage to safety belts section, the text beginning, Have this work carried out only at your BMW center. . . . should be disregarded and the following text should be read in lieu thereof: BMW recommends having this work performed by a service center as it is important that this safety feature functions properly.

7. At page 126 under the heading: Objects in the movement range of the pedals and at page 242 under the heading: Carpet and floor mats, the paragraph that begins: Only use floor mats should be disregarded and the following language should be read in lieu thereof: The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that you use floor mats that have been identified by it as appropriate for use in your vehicle and that can be properly fixed in place.

8. At page 216, under the heading Apps and subheading Requirements, the section that begins, To avoid malfunctions, only use . . . , should be disregarded and the following text should be read in lieu thereof: The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends the use of BMW recommended software; otherwise

there may be malfunctions in system operations.

9. At page 230, under the heading: Correct wheels and tires, the term Correct should be disregarded and in lieu thereof, the term Recommended should be read in its place. In addition, the text of that section should be disregarded and the following text should be read in lieu thereof:

When mounting new tires or changing over from summer to winter tires and vice versa, BMW recommends that you mount run-flat tires. In the event of a flat, no spare wheel is available. Your BMW center will be glad to advise you.

The manufacturer of your vehicle strongly suggests that you use wheels and tires that have been recommended by the vehicle manufacturer for your vehicle type; otherwise, for example, despite having the same official size ratings, variations can lead to body contact and with it, the risk of severe accidents. The manufacturer of your vehicle does not evaluate non- recommended wheels and tires to determine if they are suitable for use on your vehicle.

You can inquire about the recommended wheel/tire combination at your BMW center.

The recommended combination of wheels and tires will help ensure reliable operation of various vehicle systems such as ABS, DSC or FTM.

Addendum

To maintain good handling and vehicle response, BMW recommends that you use tires of a single brand and tread configuration. After a tire has been damaged, mount the previous wheel and tire combination again as soon as possible.

10. At page 231, under the heading: Snow Chains, the text should be disregarded and the following text should be read in lieu thereof:

Only certain types of fine-link snow chains have been tested by the manufacturer of your vehicle and are determined by the manufacturer of your vehicle to be road safe and are recommended by the manufacturer of your vehicle.

Information about recommended snow chains is available from a service center.

11. At page 232, under the heading Hood, the sentence beginning If you are not familiar . . . should be disregarded and the following text should be read in lieu thereof: If this work is not carried out properly, there is a danger of subsequent damage and related safety hazards.

12. At page 235, under the heading: Approved oil types, the references to Approved should be read as Suitable. Immediately preceding the Gasoline engine chart, the following sentence should be inserted: Add engine oils that meet the following oil rating standards: . .

. The reference to BMW High Performance SAE 5W-30 should be disregarded.

13. At page 235, under the heading: Alternative oil types, the text preceding the chart should be disregarded, and in lieu thereof should be read as follows: If an engine oil suitable for continuous use is not available, up to 1 US quart/liter of an engine oil with the following oil rating can be added: . . . The reference to specification should be read as rating.

14. At page 235, under the heading: Oil change, the text should be disregarded and in lieu thereof should be read as follows:

BMW recommends that you have the oil changed at your BMW dealers service center or at another service center that has trained personnel that can perform the work in accordance with BMW specifications

15. At page 237, under the heading: Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models, the second paragraph should be disregarded and the following text read in lieu thereof:

The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that you have maintenance and repair performed by your BMW dealers service center or another service center or repair shop that employs trained

Addendum

personnel that can perform maintenance and repair work on your vehicle in accordance with BMW specifications. The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that you maintain records of all maintenance and repair work performed on your vehicle.

16. At page 244, where it reads: Have all work on the xenon lamp system performed only by your BMW center, the following words should be read as preceding that passage: It is strongly suggested that you . . . .

17. At page 248, under the Battery replacing section, the text should be disregarded and in lieu thereof the following text should be read:

Use of recommended vehicle batteries

The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that you use vehicle batteries that it has tested and recommends for use in your vehicle; otherwise the vehicle could be damaged and systems or functions may not be fully available.

After a battery replacement, the manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that you have the battery registered on your vehicle by a service center to ensure that all comfort functions are fully available, and that any check control messages of these comfort functions are no longer displayed.

Contents

The quickest way to find special topics is to consult the index, refer to page 268.

4 Notes 7 Reporting safety defects

At a glance 12 Dashboard 20 iDrive 27 Voice activation system

Controls 32 Opening and closing 49 Adjustments 58 Transporting children safely 61 Driving 75 Controls overview 88 Technology for driving comfort and

safety 100 Lamps 106 Climate 111 Practical interior accessories

Driving tips 124 Things to remember when driving

Navigation 132 Navigation system 134 Destination entry 143 Destination guidance 151 What to do if

Entertainment 154 On/off and tone 157 Radio 161 Satellite radio 166 CD/DVD player 172 Music collection 177 External devices

Communications 188 Telephone 201 Office 210 Contacts 212 ConnectedDrive

Mobility 220 Refueling 223 Wheels and tires 232 Engine compartment 237 Maintenance 239 Care 243 Replacing components 250 Giving and receiving assistance

Reference 258 Technical data 260 Short commands for the voice activation

system 268 Everything from A to Z

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

4

Notes

Notes

Using this Owner's Manual We have tried to make all the information in this Owner's Manual easy to find. The fastest way to find specific topics is to refer to the detailed index at the back of the manual. If you wish to gain an initial overview of your vehicle, you will find this in the first chapter.

Should you sell your BMW some day, please remember to hand over the Owner's Manual as well; it is an important component of your vehicle.

Updates after press date Updates after press date for the Owner's Man- uals, when necessary, are issued as appendices to the printed Quick Reference Guide for the vehicle.

Additional sources of information Should you have any other questions, your BMW center will be glad to advise you at any time.

Information on BMW, e.g. on technical aspects, can also be found on the Internet at www.bmwusa.com.

Symbols used Indicates precautions that must be fol- lowed precisely in order to avoid the pos-

sibility of personal injury and serious damage to the vehicle.

Indicates information that will assist you in gaining the optimum benefit from your

vehicle and enable you to care more effectively for your vehicle.

Refers to measures that can be taken to help protect the environment.

< Marks the end of a specific item of information.

"..." Identifies Control Display texts used to select individual functions.

{...} Verbal instructions to use with the voice activation system.

{{...}} Identifies the answers generated by the voice activation system.

Symbols on vehicle components Indicates that you should consult the rel- evant section of this Owner's Manual for

information on a particular part or assembly.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

5

Notes

Vehicle equipment This Owner's Manual describes all models and all series-specific equipment, country-specific equipment, and optional equipment that is offered in the series. For this reason, this Owner's Manual also describes and illustrates some equipment that may not be available in your vehicle, for example due to the special options or national-market version selected.

This also applies to safety related functions and systems.

If equipment and models are not described in this Owner's Manual, please consult the accompanying Supplementary Owner's Handbooks.

Status of this Owner's Manual at time of printing BMW pursues a policy of continuous, ongoing development that is conceived to ensure that our vehicles continue to embody the highest quality and safety standards combined with advanced, state-of-the-art technology. For this reason, it is possible in exceptional cases that features described in this Owner's Manual could differ from those on your vehicle.

Updates after press date Updates after press date for the Owner's Man- uals, when necessary, are issued as appendices to the printed Quick Reference Guide for the vehicle.

Your own safety

Warranty Your vehicle is technically configured for the operating conditions and registration require- ments applying in the country of first delivery homologation. If your vehicle is to be operated in a different country it might be necessary to adapt your vehicle to potentially differing oper-

ating conditions and permit requirements. If your vehicle does not comply with the homolo- gation requirements in a certain country you cannot lodge warranty claims for your vehicle there.

Further information can be obtained from your service center.

Maintenance and repair Advanced technology, e.g. the use of modern materials and powerful electron-

ics, requires specially adapted maintenance and repair methods. You should therefore have the corresponding work on your vehicle per- formed only by your BMW center or at a work- shop that works according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained per- sonnel. If this work is not carried out properly, there is a danger of subsequent damage and related safety hazards.<

Parts and accessories For your own safety, use genuine parts and accessories approved by BMW.

When you purchase accessories tested and approved by BMW and Original BMW Parts, you simultaneously acquire the assurance that they have been thoroughly tested by BMW to ensure optimum performance when installed on your vehicle.

BMW warrants these parts to be free from defects in material and workmanship.

BMW will not accept any liability for damage resulting from installation of parts and accesso- ries not approved by BMW.

BMW cannot test every product made by other manufacturers to verify if it can be used on a BMW safely and without risk to either the vehicle, its operation, or its occupants.

Original BMW Parts, BMW Accessories and other products approved by BMW, together with professional advice on using these items, are available from all BMW centers.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

6

Notes

Installation and operation of accessories not approved by BMW, such as alarms, radios, amplifiers, radar detectors, wheels, suspension components, brake dust shields, telephones, including operation of any mobile phone from within the vehicle without using an externally mounted antenna, or transceiver equipment, for instance, CBs, walkie-talkies, ham radio or sim- ilar accessories, may cause extensive damage to the vehicle, compromise its safety, interfere with the vehicle's electrical system or affect the validity of the BMW Limited Warranty. See your BMW center for additional information.<

Maintenance, replacement, or repair of the emission control devices and sys-

tems may be performed by any automotive repair establishment or individual using any certified automotive part.<

California Proposition 65 warning California law requires us to issue the following warning:

Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automobile components and parts,

including components found in the interior fur- nishings in a vehicle, contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.

Battery posts, terminals and related accesso- ries contain lead and lead compounds. Wash your hands after handling.

Used engine oil contains chemicals that have caused cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and water.<

Service and warranty We recommend that you read this publication thoroughly.

Your BMW is covered by the following warranties:

> New Vehicle Limited Warranty

> Rust Perforation Limited Warranty

> Federal Emissions System Defect Warranty

> Federal Emissions Performance Warranty

> California Emission Control System Limited Warranty

Detailed information about these warranties is listed in the Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.

Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and designed to meet the particular operating con- ditions and registration requirements in your country and continental region in order to deliver the full driving pleasure while the vehicle is operated under those conditions. If you wish to operate your vehicle in another country or region, you may be required to adapt your vehi- cle to meet different prevailing operating condi- tions and registration requirements. You should also be aware of any applicable warranty limita- tions or exclusions for such country or region. In such case, please contact Customer Relations for further information.

Maintenance Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the road safety, operational reliability and the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Specifications for required maintenance measures:

> BMW Maintenance system

> Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models

> Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

7

Notes

If the vehicle is not maintained according to these specifications, this could result in serious damage to the vehicle. Such damage is not covered by the BMW New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Data memory A variety of electronic components in your vehi- cle include data storage devices, which store technical information on the condition of your vehicle, events and errors, either temporarily or permanently. In general, this technical informa- tion documents the condition of a component, a module, a system or the surroundings:

> Operating conditions of system compo- nents, e.g., fill levels.

> Status messages regarding the vehicle and of its individual components, such as wheel rpm/vehicle speed, response delay, lateral acceleration.

> Malfunctions and defects in the major sys- tem components, such as the lights and brakes.

> Responses of the vehicle in special driving situations, such as the deployment of an airbag, the utilization of stability control systems.

> Environmental conditions, such as temperature.

These data are exclusively of a technical nature and are used for the detection and correction of errors, as well as the optimization of vehicle functions. Motion profiles of traveled routes can not be deduced from these data. If services are required, such as repair services, service pro- cesses, warranty claims and quality assurance, then this technical information can be read out by employees of service departments, includ- ing the manufacturer, from the event and error data storage devices by using special diagnos- tic equipment. There, if necessary, you will

receive further information. After remedying an error, the information in the error memory is deleted or progressively overwritten.

When using the vehicle, situations are conceiv- able in which this technical data, in conjunction with other information, such as accident reports, vehicle damage, witness statements, etc. - possibly with the assistance of an expert - could be traced to particular individuals.

Additional functions that are agreed upon contractually with the customer, such as vehi- cle tracking in case of emergency, permit the transmission of certain vehicle data from the vehicle.

Reporting safety defects

For US customers The following only applies to vehicles owned and operated in the US.

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of North America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, Westwood, New Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone 1-800-831- 1117.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your center, or BMW of North America, LLC.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Adminis- trator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

8

Notes

For Canadian customers Canadian customers who wish to report a safety-related defect to Transport Canada, Defect Investigations and Recalls, may tele- phone the toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/ roadsafety

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

9

Notes

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

This overview of buttons, switches and displays is intended to familiarize you with your vehicle's

operating environment. The section will also assist you in becoming acquainted with the

control concepts and options available for operating the various systems.

At a glance

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

12

At a glance Dashboard

Dashboard

Vehicle equipment In this chapter, all production, country, and optional equipment that is offered in the model range is described. For this reason, descrip-

tions will be given of some equipment that may not be available in a vehicle, for example due to the special options or national-market version selected. This also applies to safety related functions and systems.

Around the steering wheel: controls and displays

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

13

Dashboard At a glance

1 Convertible: opening and closing windows jointly 42

2 Convertible: opening and closing rear windows 42

3 Opening and closing front windows 42

4 Exterior mirrors folding in and out 55

5 Adjusting exterior mirrors, automatic curb monitor 55

6 Parking lamps 100

Low beams 101

Automatic headlamp control 100 Adaptive Light Control 101 High-beam Assistant 102

7 Fog lamps 103

8 Turn signals 71

High beams, headlamp flasher 102

High-beam Assistant 102

Roadside parking lamps 102

Computer 77

Settings and information about the vehicle 79

9 Instrument cluster 14

10 Windshield wipers 71

Rain sensor 72

11 Switching the ignition on/off and starting/stopping the engine 61

12 Ignition lock 61

13 Buttons on the steering wheel

Telephone:

Accepting and ending a call; dial- ing the selected phone number; redialing if no phone number is selected

Convertible: microphone on steering column

Volume

Activating/deactivating the voice activation system 27

Convertible: microphone on steering column

Changing the radio station Interrupting a traffic bulletin Selecting a music track Scrolling through the redial list

Next entertainment source

Recirculated air mode 108

14 Steering wheel heating 57

15 Horn, entire surface

16 Adjusting the steering wheel 57

17 Cruise control 73

18 Releasing the hood 233

19 Opening the trunk lid 37

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

14

At a glance Dashboard

Instrument cluster

1 Speedometer 135i: with fuel gauge

2 Indicator lamps for turn signals

3 Indicator and warning lamps 15

4 Tachometer 76

5 Fuel gauge 76 135i: engine oil temperature 76

6 Display for

> Clock 75

> Outside temperature 75

> Indicator and warning lamps 84

7 Display for

> Position of automatic transmission 64

> Gear indicator of 7-gear Sport automatic transmission with double clutch 66

> Computer 77

> Date of next scheduled service, and remaining distance to be driven 80

> Odometer and trip odometer 75

> High-beam Assistant 102

> Checking the oil level 233

> Settings and information 79

8 Resetting the trip odometer 75

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

15

Dashboard At a glance

Indicator and warning lamps

The concept

Indicator and warning lamps can light up in a variety of combinations and colors.

Several of the lamps are checked for proper functioning and light up temporarily when the engine is started or the ignition is switched on.

Text messages

Text messages at the upper edge of the Control Display explain the meaning of the displayed indicator and warning lamps.

Supplementary text messages

You can call up more information on the Control Display, e.g. on the cause of a malfunction and on how to respond, via Check Control, refer to page 84.

In urgent cases, this information will be shown as soon as the corresponding lamp comes on.

Indicator lamps without text messages The following indicator lamps notify you that certain functions are active:

High beams/headlamp flasher 102

Fog lamps 103

Lamp flashes: DSC or DTC is regulating the propul- sive forces in order to maintain driving stability 90

Canada: parking brake applied 63

Parking brake applied 63

Canada: engine malfunction with adverse effect on emissions 238

Engine malfunction with adverse effect on emissions 238

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

16

At a glance Dashboard

Around the center console: controls and displays

1 Control Display 20

2 Driving stability control systems

> Dynamic Stability Control DSC 89

> Dynamic Traction Control DTC 90

3 Hazard warning flashers

4 Central locking system 37

5 Automatic climate control

Air distribution to the windshield 107

Air distribution to the upper body area 107

Air distribution to the footwell 107

Automatic air distribution and flow rate 107

Air conditioning 109

Automatic recirculated air control AUC and recirculated air mode 108

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

17

Dashboard At a glance

6 CD/DVD drive 166

7 Programmable memory keys 25

8 Changing

> Radio station 157

> Track 166

9 Controller 20 Can be turned, pressed, or moved in four directions

10 Buttons on the controller 21 Selecting menus directly

11 Switching entertainment audio sources on/ off and adjusting volume 154

12 Ejecting a CD/DVD 166

Maximum cooling 107

ALL program 108

Air volume 108

Defrosting windows 109

Rear window defroster 109

Seat heating 54

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

18

At a glance Dashboard

Around the roofliner Coupe

1 Microphone for voice activation system and for telephone in hands-free mode

2 SOS: sending an Emergency Request 250

3 Reading lamps 105

4 Glass roof, electric 43

5 Interior lamps 104

6 Passenger airbag status lamp 98

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

19

Dashboard At a glance

Convertible

1 SOS: sending an Emergency Request 250

2 Reading lamps 105

3 Interior lamps 104

4 Passenger airbag status lamp 98

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

20

At a glance iDrive

iDrive

Vehicle equipment In this chapter, all production, country, and optional equipment that is offered in the model range is described. For this reason, descrip- tions will be given of some equipment that may not be available in a vehicle, for example due to the special options or national-market version selected. This also applies to safety related functions and systems.

The concept iDrive integrates the functions of a large num- ber of switches. This allows these functions to be operated from a single central position.

Make entries only when traffic and road conditions permit; otherwise, you may

endanger vehicle occupants and other road users by being distracted.<

Controls at a glance

Controls

1 Control Display

2 Controller with buttons You can use the buttons to open the menus

directly. The controller can be used to select the menu items and create settings.

> Move in four directions, arrows 3

> Turn, arrow 4

> Push, arrow 5

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

21

iDrive At a glance

Control Display

Notes > Follow care instructions when cleaning the

Control Display.

> Do not store items in the region in front of the Control Display; doing so may damage the Control Display.

Switching off

1. Press the button.

2. "Switch off control display"

Switching on Press the controller to switch on.

Buttons on the controller

Operating principle With the ignition at radio readiness or beyond, refer to page 61, the following message is displayed on the Control Display:

To hide the message: Press the controller. The main menu is displayed.

The message is automatically hidden after approx. 10 seconds.

Opening the main menu

Press the button.

The main menu is displayed.

All iDrive functions can be called up via the main menu.

Symbol Function

MENU Open the main menu

RADIO Open the Radio menu

MEDIA Open the CD/Multimedia menu

NAV Start navigation in map view

TEL Open the Telephone menu

BACK Show previous panel

OPTION Open the Options menu

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

22

At a glance iDrive

Selecting a menu item The menu items shown in white can be selected.

1. Turn the controller until the desired menu item is highlighted.

2. Press the controller.

Menu items in the Owner's Manual In the Owner's Manual, the menu items that should be selected are depicted in quotation marks, e.g. "Settings".

Changing between panels After a menu item is selected, e.g. "Radio", a new panel is displayed. Panels can overlap.

> Move the controller to the left.

The current panel is closed and the previ- ous panel is displayed. Pressing the BACK button reopens the pre- vious panel. This does not close the current panel.

> Move the controller to the right.

A new panel is opened and laid over it.

White arrows pointing to the left or right indi- cate that additional panels can be opened.

View of an opened menu When you open a menu, generally the panel last selected in this menu is displayed. To display the first panel of the menu:

> Move the controller to the left repeatedly until the first panel is displayed.

> Press the menu's button twice on the controller.

Open the Options menu

Press the button. The "Options" menu is displayed.

Another possibility: move the controller to the right repeatedly until the "Options" menu appears.

Options menu The "Options" menu is composed of different areas:

> Screen settings, e.g. "Split screen".

The region remains unchanged.

> Control options for the selected main menu, e.g. "Radio".

> Other control options for the selected menu, e.g. "Store station".

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

23

iDrive At a glance

Adjusting settings 1. Select a field.

2. Turn the controller until the desired setting is displayed.

3. Press the controller to confirm the setting.

Activating/deactivating functions Some menu items are preceded by a check box. It indicates whether the function is activated or deactivated. Selecting the menu item activates or deactivates the function.

The function is activated.

The function is deactivated.

Example: setting the clock

1. Press the button. The main menu is displayed.

2. Turn the controller until "Settings" is high- lighted, and then press the controller.

3. If necessary, move the controller to the left to display "Time/Date".

4. Turn the controller until "Time/Date" is highlighted, and then press the controller.

5. Turn the controller until "Time:" is high- lighted, and then press the controller.

6. Turn the controller to set the hours and press the controller.

7. Turn the controller to set the minutes and press the controller.

Status information

Status box The status box at the top right displays the following information:

> Time

> Current entertainment source

> Sound output ON/OFF

> Mobile phone network with strongest reception

> Telephone status

> Traffic reports reception

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

24

At a glance iDrive

Status box symbols The symbols are divided into separate groups.

Radio symbols

Telephone symbols

Entertainment symbols

Other

With the Professional navigation system: Split screen

General information Additional information, e.g. from the computer, can be displayed on the right side of the split screen.

This information remains visible on the split screen even when you change to another menu.

Switching the split screen on and off

1. Press the button.

2. "Split screen"

Selecting display

1. Press the button.

2. "Split screen"

3. Move the controller until the split screen is selected.

4. Press the controller or select "Split screen content".

5. Select the desired menu item.

Symbol Meaning

Traffic bulletins switched on

HD radio switched on

Satellite radio switched on

Symbol Meaning

Incoming or outgoing call

Missed call

Reception strength of mobile phone network Symbol flashing: network search

No mobile phone network available

Bluetooth switched on

Roaming active

Receiving text message, email

Checking SIM card

SIM card blocked

SIM card missing

Entering PIN

Symbol Meaning

CD/DVD player

Music collection

Gracenote database

AUX-IN port

USB audio interface

Music interface for smartphones

Symbol Meaning

Voice instructions are switched off

Querying current vehicle position

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

25

iDrive At a glance

Programmable memory keys

General information iDrive functions can be stored on the program- mable memory keys and called up directly, e.g. radio stations, navigation destinations, phone numbers and entry points into the menu.

The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use.

Storing functions 1. Highlight the function via the iDrive.

2. ... Press the desired button for longer than two seconds.

Executing a function ... Press the button.

The function is executed immediately. This means, for example, that the number is dialed when a phone number is selected.

Displaying memory key assignments Touch the button with a finger. Do not wear gloves or use objects.

The key assignment is displayed at the top edge of the screen.

> Displaying brief information: press the button.

> Displaying detailed information: press and hold the button.

Entering letters and numbers 1. Turn the controller: select the letters or

numbers.

2. Select additional letters or numbers if needed.

3. "OK": confirm entry.

Switching between letters and numbers Depending on the menu, you can switch between entering letters and numbers:

Switching between uppercase and lowercase letters Depending on the menu, you can switch between entering uppercase letters and lower- case letters:

Symbol Function

Press the controller: delete one letter or number

Press the controller for an extended period: delete all letters or numbers

Enter a blank space

Symbol Function

Entering letters

Entering numbers

Symbol Function

Move the controller toward the front: to switch from uppercase letters to lower- case letters

Move the controller toward the front: to switch from low- ercase letters to uppercase letters

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

26

At a glance iDrive

Entry comparison Entry of names and addresses: the selection is narrowed down every time a letter is entered and letters may be added automatically.

The entries are continuously compared to the data stored in the vehicle.

> During entry, only letters for which there are data are offered.

> Destination search: town/city names can be entered with the spelling used in any of the languages available on the Control Display.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

27

Voice activation system At a glance

Voice activation system

Vehicle equipment In this chapter, all production, country, and optional equipment that is offered in the model range is described. For this reason, descrip- tions will be given of some equipment that may not be available in a vehicle, for example due to the special options or national-market version selected. This also applies to safety related functions and systems.

The concept > The voice activation system can be used

to control most functions by spoken commands.

> Functions that can only used when the vehi- cle is stopped cannot be operated using the voice activation system.

> The system includes a special microphone on the driver's side.

> In the Owner's Manual, {...} indicates com- mands for the voice activation system.

> In the Owner's Manual, {{...}} indicates the answers from the voice activation system.

Prerequisite On the Control Display, set a language that is also supported by the voice activation system to permit identification of the commands to be spoken.

Setting the language, refer to page 87.

Saying commands

Activating voice activation system 1. Press the button on the steering wheel.

2. Wait for the acoustic signal.

3. Say the command.

This symbol on the Control Display and an acoustic signal notify you that the voice activa- tion system is activated.

If no additional commands are possible, continue by operating the function via iDrive.

Finishing voice input Press the button on the steering wheel or

Possible commands Most menu items on the Control Display can be spoken as commands.

The available commands depend on which menu is currently selected on the Control Display.

There are short commands for functions of the main menu.

Some list entries such as phone book entries can also be selected using the voice activation system. Make sure to say list entries the same way as they appear in the respective list.

{Cancel}

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

28

At a glance Voice activation system

Having the possible commands read aloud To have the available commands read aloud:

For example, if the "Settings" menu is dis- played, the commands relating to settings are read aloud.

Performing functions using short commands Functions from the main menu can be per- formed directly by means of short commands, essentially regardless of which menu item is selected, e.g. {Vehicle status}.

List of short command of the voice activation system, refer to page 260.

Help dialog for voice activation system Accessing help:

Other commands for the help dialog:

> {Help with examples}: information about the current control options and the most important commands relating to them are read aloud.

> {Help with voice activation}: information about the principle operation of the voice activation system is read aloud.

Example: playing back a CD

Via the main menu 1. If necessary, switch on entertainment audio

output.

2. Press the button on the steering wheel.

Via short commands The CD playback can also be started via a short command.

1. If necessary, switch on entertainment audio output.

2. Press the button on the steering wheel.

{Voice commands}

{Help}

3. {C D and multimedia}

The system plays the last media played.

4. {C D}

5. {C D drive} The CD is played.

6. Press the button on the steering wheel again in order to select the particular track.

7. {Track } e.g. CD track 4.

3. {C D drive Track } e.g. CD track 4.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

29

Voice activation system At a glance

Setting the voice dialog You can set whether the system uses the stan- dard dialog or a short version.

In the short version of the voice dialog, the responses from the system are given in abbre- viated form.

On the Control Display:

1. "Settings"

2. "Language/Units"

3. "Speech mode:"

4. Select a setting.

Adjusting volume Turn the volume knob during the spoken instruction to select the desired volume.

> The volume remains the same, even if the volume of other audio sources is changed.

> The volume is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Notes on Emergency Requests Do not use the voice activation system to ini- tiate an Emergency Request. In stressful situa- tions, the voice and vocal pitch can change. This can unnecessarily delay the establishment of a telephone connection.

Instead, use the SOS button, refer to page 250, in the vicinity of the interior rearview mirror.

Ambient conditions > Say the commands, numbers and letters

smoothly and with normal volume, empha- sis and speed.

> Always speak the commands in the lan- guage of the voice activation system.

> When selecting a radio station, use the standard pronunciation of the station name: {Station } e.g. National Public Radio

> Keep the doors, windows, glass roof/pan- oramic glass roof closed to prevent interfer- ence from ambient noise.

> Avoid ambient noise in the vehicle while speaking.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

This chapter is intended to provide you with information for complete control of your vehicle. All features and accessories that are useful for

driving and your safety, comfort and convenience, are described here.

Controls

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

32

Controls Opening and closing

Opening and closing

Vehicle equipment In this chapter, all production, country, and optional equipment that is offered in the model range is described. For this reason, descrip- tions will be given of some equipment that may not be available in a vehicle, for example due to the special options or national-market version selected. This also applies to safety related functions and systems.

Remote control

Each remote control contains a rechargeable battery that is automatically recharged when it is in the ignition lock while the car is being driven. Use each remote control at least twice a year for longer road trips in order to maintain the batteries' charge status. In cars with Comfort Access, the remote control contains a replace- able battery, refer to page 41.

The settings called up and implemented when the car is unlocked depend on which remote control is used to unlock the car, refer to Per- sonal Profile, next column.

In addition, information about service require- ments is stored in the remote control, refer to Service data in the remote control, page 237.

Integrated key

Press button 1 to release the key.

The integrated key fits the following locks:

> Driver's door, refer to page 36

> Convertible: glove compartment, refer to page 115

New remote controls Your BMW center can supply new remote con- trols with integrated keys as additional units or as replacements in the event of loss.

Personal Profile

The concept You can set many of your BMW's functions to suit your personal needs and preferences. Without any action on your part, Personal Pro- file ensures that most of these settings are stored for the remote control currently in use. When you unlock the car, the remote control used for the purpose is recognized and the settings stored for it are called up and imple- mented.

This means that your personal settings will be activated for you, even if in the meantime your car was used by someone else with another remote control and the corresponding settings. The individual settings are stored for a maxi-

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

33

Opening and closing Controls

mum of four remote controls. They are stored for two remote controls if Comfort Access is in use.

Personal Profile settings For more information on specific settings, refer to the specified pages.

> Programming the Programmable memory keys, refer to page 25

> Response of the central locking system when the car is unlocked, refer to page 34

> Automatic locking of the vehicle, refer to page 37

> Automatic call-up of the driver's seat posi- tion, refer to page 54

> Triple turn signal activation, refer to page 71

> Settings for the display on the Control Display and in the instrument cluster:

> 12h/24h format of the clock, refer to page 82

> Date format, refer to page 84

> Brightness of the Control Display, refer to page 87

> Language of the Control Display, refer to page 87

> Units of measure for fuel consumption, distance covered/remaining distances, and temperature, refer to page 80

> Show visual warning for Park Distance Control PDC, refer to page 88

> Light settings:

> Welcome lamps, refer to page 101

> Pathway lighting, refer to page 101

> Daytime running lights, refer to page 101

> High-beam Assistant, refer to page 102

> Automatic climate control: activating/deac- tivating AUTO program, air conditioning and automatic recirculated air control, setting temperature, air volume and distribution, refer to page 107 ff

> Entertainment:

> Tone control, refer to page 155

> Speed-dependent volume control, refer to page 156

Central locking system

The concept The central locking system functions when the driver's door is closed.

The system simultaneously engages and releases the locks on the following:

> Doors

> Trunk lid

> Fuel filler flap

Operating from outside > Via the remote control

> Using the door lock

> In cars with Comfort Access, via the handles on the driver's door or the front passenger door

At the same time as locking and unlocking via the remote control:

> Welcome lights, the interior light, and the courtesy lighting are switched on or off.

> Alarm system, refer to page 38, is armed or disarmed.

Operating from inside By means of the button for central locking, refer to page 37.

In the event of a sufficiently severe accident, the central locking system unlocks automatically. In addition, the hazard warning flashers and inte- rior lamps come on.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

34

Controls Opening and closing

Opening and closing: Using the remote control

Persons or animals in a parked vehicle could lock the doors from the inside. You

should therefore take the remote control with you when you leave the vehicle so that the latter can be opened from outside.<

Convertible: to operate the convertible top with the remote control, the doors and

trunk lid must be closed and the trunk partition must be folded down and engaged on both sides. Refer also to page 46.<

Unlocking Press the button. The interior lamps, the courtesy lighting of the doors, and the welcome lamps come on.

Setting unlocking characteristics You can set whether only the driver's door or the entire vehicle is to be unlocked when the button is pressed for the first time.

1. "Settings"

2. "Door locks"

3. "Unlock button"

4. Select a menu item:

> "All doors" Press the button once to unlock the entire vehicle.

> "Driver's door only" Pressing the button once unlocks the driver's door and fuel filler flap. Press the button twice to unlock the entire vehicle.

5. Press the controller.

Coupe: convenient opening Press and hold the button. The windows and the glass roof are opened.

Convertible: convenient opening When you are close to the vehicle, the remote control for Comfort Access can be used to open the convertible top and windows.

Hold the button down. The windows and the convertible top are opened provided that the doors are closed.

If you continue pressing the button, the windows move up.

Watch during the opening process to ensure that no one is injured. Releasing

the button interrupts the opening process.<

Locking Press the button.

Do not lock the vehicle from the outside if there is any person inside, because the

vehicle cannot be unlocked from inside without special knowledge.<

Convertible: convenient closing When you are close to the vehicle, the remote control for Comfort Access can be used to close the convertible top and windows.

Press and hold the button. The convertible top and the windows are closed.

Watch during the closing process to ensure that no one is injured. Releasing

the button interrupts the closing process.<

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

35

Opening and closing Controls

Switching on interior lamps While the car is locked: Press the button. You can also use this function to locate your vehicle in parking garages etc.

Unlocking the trunk lid Press the button for about 1 second and then release it.

The trunk lid opens a short distance, regardless of whether it was locked or unlocked.

The trunk lid swings backward and up when opened. Make sure that adequate

clearance is available before opening. To avoid locking yourself out by accident, do not place the remote control in the trunk. A previously locked trunk lid is locked again after closing. Before and after each trip, check that the trunk lid has not been inadvertently unlocked.<

Confirmation signals You can activate or deactivate the confirmation signals.

1. "Settings"

2. "Door locks"

3. "Flash when lock/unlock"

4. Press the controller.

Calling up the driver's seat position The driver's seat position last set is stored for the remote control currently in use.

You can select whether or not the seat is reset to that position automatically.

When this Personal Profile function is used, first make sure that the footwell

behind the driver's seat is free of obstacles. Failure to do so could cause injury to persons or damage to objects as a result of a rearward movement of the seat.<

The adjusting procedure is halted when you touch a seat adjustment switch or one of the memory buttons.

Selecting automatic call-up 1. "Settings"

2. "Door locks"

3. "Last seat position auto."

The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Malfunctions The remote control may malfunction due to local radio waves. If this occurs, unlock and lock the car at the door lock with the integrated key.

Coupe: in vehicles without Comfort Access, only the driver's door can be locked and unlocked with the integrated key via the door lock.

If the car can no longer be locked with a remote control, the battery in the remote control is dis- charged. Use the remote control on an extended trip to recharge the battery, refer to page 32. The remote control for Comfort Access contains a battery that may have to be changed, refer to page 41.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

36

Controls Opening and closing

For US owners only The transmitter and receiver units comply with part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communications Commission regulations. Operation is gov- erned by the following:

FCC ID: LX8766S LX8766E LX8CAS

Compliance statement: This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

> This device must not cause harmful inter- ference, and

> this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Any unauthorized modifications or changes to these devices could void the

user's authority to operate this equipment.<

Opening and closing: Using the door lock

You can set the way in which the car is unlocked, refer to page 34.

Do not lock the vehicle from the outside if there is any person inside, because the

vehicle cannot be unlocked from inside without special knowledge.<

Coupe:Without Comfort Access the alarm system is triggered if unlocking occurs via the door lock.

To switch off the alarm: Unlock the vehicle using the remote control, refer to page 34, or insert the remote control all the way into the ignition lock.<

Further details of the alarm system, refer to page 38.

Coupe Without Comfort Access, only the driver's door is locked via the door lock.<

To lock both doors, the fuel filler flap and the trunk lid together:

1. With the doors closed, lock the vehicle using the button for the central locking system in the interior, refer to page 37.

2. Unlock and open the driver's or front passenger door, refer to page 37.

3. Lock the vehicle.

> Lock the driver's door using the integrated key in the door lock, or

> press down the lock button of the front passenger door and close the door from the outside.

Manual operation In the event of an electrical malfunction, you can lock and unlock the driver's door by turning the integrated key to the corresponding limit posi- tions in the door lock.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

37

Opening and closing Controls

Opening and closing: From inside

This button serves to unlock or lock doors and the trunk lid, but does not activate the anti-theft system. Depending on its embodiment, the fuel filler flap can be unlocked as needed.

Automatic locking You can also set the situations in which the car locks:

1. "Settings"

2. "Door locks"

3. Select the desired function:

> "Lock if no door is opened" The central locking system locks after a short time if no door has been opened.

> "Lock after start. to drive" The central locking system locks the vehicle as soon as you begin to drive.

The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Unlocking and opening doors > Either unlock the doors together using the

button for the central locking system and then pull the door handle above the armrest or

> pull on the door handle of each door twice: the first time unlocks the door, the second time opens it.

Locking > Use the central locking button to lock all of

the doors simultaneously, or

> press down the safety lock button of a door. To prevent you from being locked out, the open driver's door cannot be locked using the lock button.

Persons or animals in a parked vehicle could lock the doors from the inside. You

should therefore take the remote control with you when you leave the vehicle so that the latter can be opened from outside.<

Trunk lid In order to avoid damage, make sure there is sufficient clearance before opening the

trunk lid.<

Opening from inside

Press the button: the trunk lid opens unless it has been locked.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

38

Controls Opening and closing

Opening from outside

Press the button, see arrow, or the button on the remote control for a longer period. The trunk lid opens slightly and can be swung upward.

Locking or unlocking separately

The switch is located in the glove compartment.

1 Locking the trunk lid

2 Unlocking the trunk lid

Locking separately Push the switch in the direction of arrow 1.

The trunk lid is locked and cannot be unlocked using the central locking system.

If you give the remote control without the inte- grated key to someone else while the glove compartment is locked, the trunk lid cannot be opened. This is an advantage when valet park- ing, for example. Locking the glove compart- ment, refer to page 115.

Unlocking separately Push the switch in the direction of arrow 2.

Emergency release

Pull the lever in the trunk. The trunk lid is unlocked.

Closing

The handle recesses on the interior trim of the trunk lid make it easier to pull down.

Make sure that the closing path of the trunk lid is clear; otherwise, injuries may

result.<

Alarm system

The concept The vehicle alarm system responds:

> When a door, the hood or the trunk lid is opened

> To movements inside the vehicle: interior motion sensor, refer to page 39

> When the car's inclination changes, e.g. if an attempt is made to jack it up and steal the wheels or to raise it prior to towing away: tilt alarm sensor, refer to page 39

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

39

Opening and closing Controls

> When there has been an interruption of power supply from the battery

Depending on the market-specific version, the alarm system briefly signals unauthorized entry attempts by:

> An acoustic alarm

> Switching on the hazard warning flashers

Arming and disarming

General information When you lock or unlock the vehicle, either with the remote control or at the door lock, the alarm system is armed or disarmed at the same time.

Door lock with armed alarm system In some national-market versions, unlocking via the door lock triggers the alarm.

To switch off this alarm, unlock the vehicle with the remote control or switch on the ignition.

Trunk lid with the alarm system armed The trunk lid can be opened via the remote control even when the alarm system is armed.

Press the button on the remote control for approx. 1 second.

The trunk lid is locked and monitored again as soon as it is closed.

Panic mode You can trigger the alarm system if you find yourself in a dangerous situation.

Press the button for at least three seconds.

To switch off the alarm: press any button.

Switching off an alarm > Unlock the car with the remote control, refer

to page 34, or

> insert the remote control all the way into the ignition lock.

Indicator lamp on inside mirror

> The indicator lamp flashes continuously: The system is armed.

> The indicator lamp flashes after locking: The doors, hood, or trunk lid are not prop- erly closed, the remaining components are secured. Then the indicator lamp flashes continu- ously after approx. 10 seconds. The interior motion sensor and tilt sensor are not active.

> The indicator lamp goes out after unlocking: The vehicle has not been tampered with.

> If the indicator lamp flashes after unlocking until the remote control is inserted in the ignition, but for no longer than approx. 5 minutes: The vehicle has been tampered with.

Tilt alarm sensor The tilt of the vehicle is monitored. The alarm system reacts, for example to attempts to steal a wheel or tow the vehicle.

Interior motion sensor

Coupe For proper function, the windows and glass sunroof must be closed.

Convertible The interior of the car is monitored up to the height of the seat cushions. This way, the anti- theft alarm system including the interior motion sensor are armed, even if the convertible top is open. Falling objects, e.g. tree leaves, may trig- ger a false alarm, refer to Avoiding false alarms.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

40

Controls Opening and closing

Avoiding unintentional alarms The tilt sensor and interior motion sensor can be deactivated together, for example in the following situations:

> In car washes

> In stacking garages

> During transport on car-carrying trains, boats/ships or on a trailer

> When leaving animals in the vehicle

Switching off tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor Once the vehicle is locked, press the

button on the remote control again within approx. 10 seconds.

The indicator lamp lights up briefly and then begins flashing again. The tilt alarm sensor and the interior motion sensor are switched off until the next time the vehicle is unlocked and subse- quently locked again.

Comfort Access The concept It is possible to access the vehicle without actu- ating the remote control. It is sufficient to have the remote control with you, for example in your jacket pocket. The vehicle automatically detects the remote control in the vicinity or in the passenger compartment.

Comfort Access supports the following func- tions:

> Unlocking/locking the vehicle

> Convenient closing

> Unlocking the trunk lid separately

> Engine starting

Functional requirement > There are no external sources of interfer-

ence in the vicinity.

> The remote control must be outside the vehicle to lock it.

> The next unlocking and locking cycle is not possible until after approx. 2 seconds.

> It is only possible to start the engine if the remote control is inside the vehicle.

Comparison with ordinary remote control The above functions can be controlled by pressing the remote control buttons or by using Comfort Access.

If you notice a brief delay while opening or closing windows, the glass roof or the

convertible top, the system is checking whether a remote control is inside the vehicle. Please repeat the opening or closing procedure, if necessary.<

Unlocking

Grasp the handle on the driver's or front passenger door completely, arrow 1.

This corresponds to pressing the button.

Locking Touch the surface on the door handle, arrow 2, with your finger for approx. 1 second.

This corresponds to pressing the button.

To preserve the battery, please make sure that the ignition and all electrical

consumers are switched off before locking the vehicle.<

Coupe: convenient closing Keep pressing the surface, arrow 2, with your finger.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

41

Opening and closing Controls

Convertible: window and convertible top operation With the ignition at radio readiness or beyond, you can open and close the windows and the convertible top when a remote control is located inside the vehicle.

Unlocking the trunk lid separately Press the button on the outside of the trunk lid.

This corresponds to pressing the button.

If the vehicle detects that a remote con- trol has been accidentally left inside the

locked vehicle after the trunk lid is closed, the lid will reopen. The hazard warning flashers flash and a signal sounds.<

Switching on radio readiness Pressing the Start/Stop button switches on radio readiness.

Do not depress the brake or the clutch; other- wise, the engine will start immediately.

Starting the engine The engine can be started or the ignition can be switched on when a remote control is inside the vehicle. It is not necessary to insert a remote control into the ignition lock, refer to page 61.

Switching off the engine in cars with automatic transmission The engine can only be switched off when the selector lever is in position P, refer to page 63. To switch the engine off when the selector lever is in position N, the remote control must be in the ignition lock.

Malfunctions Local radio waves can interfere with the func- tion of Comfort Access, for example when a mobile phone is in the immediate vicinity of the remote control or by when a mobile phone is being charged in the vehicle.

If this happens, open and close the vehicle via the buttons on the remote control or using the integrated key. To start the engine afterward, insert the remote control into the ignition lock.

Warning lamps The warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when you attempt to start the engine: the engine cannot

be started. The remote control is not inside the vehicle or is malfunctioning. Take the remote control with you inside the vehicle or have it checked. If necessary, insert another remote control into the ignition lock.

The warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up while the engine is running: the remote control is no

longer inside the vehicle. After the engine is switched off, the engine can only be restarted within approx. 10 seconds.

The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster comes on and a message appears on the Control Display:

replace the battery in the remote control.

Replacing the battery The remote control for Comfort Access con- tains a battery that will need to be replaced from time to time.

1. Take the integrated key out of the remote control, refer to page 32.

2. Remove the cover.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

42

Controls Opening and closing

3. Insert the new battery with the plus side facing up.

4. Press the cover on to close.

Dispose of the old battery at a recycling center or at your BMW center.<

Windows To prevent injuries, watch the windows while closing them.

Take the remote control out of the ignition when you leave the car; otherwise, children could operate the electric windows and possi- bly injure themselves.<

Coupe: opening, closing

> Press the switch to the resistance point: The window opens as long as you press the switch.

> Press the switch beyond the resistance point: The window opens automatically. Press the switch again to stop the opening movement.

You can close the windows in the same manner by pulling the switch.

Convertible: opening, closing Window operation with Comfort Access, also refer to page 34.

To close the side windows while driving, either close the rear windows first or all

four windows together; otherwise, the windows may not close tightly at high speeds.<

Individually

> Press the switch to the resistance point: The window opens as long as you press the switch.

> Press the switch beyond the resistance point: The window opens automatically. Press the switch again to stop the opening move- ment.

You can close the windows in the same manner by pulling the switch. The rear windows cannot be closed automatically.

Jointly

> Press the switch to the resistance point: All windows open as long as you press the switch.

> Press the switch beyond the resistance point: All windows open automatically. Press the switch again to stop the opening movement.

> Pull the switch: All windows close as long as you pull the switch.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

43

Opening and closing Controls

After switching off the ignition When the remote control is removed or the igni- tion is switched off, you can still operate the windows for approx. 1 minute as long as no door has been opened.

Convenient opening and closing For Convenient opening and closing using the remote control, refer to page 34. For Conve- nient closing using Comfort Access, refer to Locking on page 40.

Pinch protection system If the closing force exceeds a specific value as a power window closes, the closing action is interrupted and the window reopens slightly.

Despite the pinch protection system check and clear the window's travel path

prior to closing it; otherwise, the safety system might fail to detect certain kinds of obstruc- tions, such as thin objects, and the window would continue closing. Do not install any accessories that might inter- fere with window movement. Otherwise, the pinch protection system could be impaired. Convertible: the rear windows are not equipped with pinch protection. Therefore, watch them closely when closing to avoid personal injury.<

Closing without pinch protection If there is an external danger, or if ice on the windows, etc., prevents you from closing the windows normally, proceed as follows:

1. Pull the switch past the resistance point and hold it there. Pinch protection is limited and the window reopens slightly if the closing force exceeds a certain value.

2. Pull the switch again past the resistance point within approx. 4 seconds and hold it there. The window closes without pinch protection.

Coupe: glass roof, electric To prevent injuries, watch the glass roof while closing it.

Take the remote control with you when you leave the car; otherwise, children could operate the roof and possibly injure themselves.<

Tilting Press the switch.

> The closed glass roof is tilted and the sliding visor opens slightly.

Do not close the sliding visor forcibly with the roof in the tilted position, as this would

damage the mechanism.<

Opening, closing > Push the switch rearward to the resistance

point. The glass roof and the sliding visor open together as long as you hold the switch in this position.

> Push the switch rearward past the resis- tance point. The glass roof and the sliding visor open automatically. Briefly press the switch again to stop the opening movement.

You can close the glass roof in a similar manner by pressing the switch forwards. The sliding visor remains open and can be closed by hand.

For Convenient opening and closing using the remote control, refer to page 34. For Conve- nient closing using Comfort Access, refer to Locking on page 40.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

44

Controls Opening and closing

After switching off the ignition When the remote control is removed or the igni- tion is switched off, you can still operate the roof for approx. 1 minute as long as no door has been opened.

Pinch protection system If the glass roof encounters an obstruction dur- ing closing from approximately the middle of the opening in the roof, or during closing from the tilted position, the closing movement is interrupted and the glass roof is opened again slightly.

Despite the pinch protection system check and clear the roof's travel path prior

to closing it; otherwise, the safety system might fail to detect certain kinds of obstructions, such as very thin objects, and the roof would con- tinue closing.<

Closing without pinch protection If there is an external danger, press the switch forward past the resistance point and hold it there. The roof closes without pinch protection.

Following interruptions in electrical power supply After a power failure, there is a possibility that the glass roof can only be tilted. The system must be initialized. BMW recommends having this work performed at your BMW center.

Convertible: convertible top The fully automatic top combines reliable weather protection with simple and easy-to- use operation.

The following tips will enhance your driving pleasure in your Convertible:

> It is recommended that you close the con- vertible top whenever the vehicle is parked. The closed convertible top not only pro- tects the vehicle interior from damage due to unforeseen bad weather, but also pro-

vides a certain degree of protection against theft. However, even when the top is closed, valuables should only be stored in the locked trunk.

> Do not mount any roof rack systems on the convertible top.

> If the top is opened while it is wet, e.g. after driving in the rain, water may drip into the trunk. If necessary, remove items from the trunk beforehand to avoid water stains or soiling.

At temperatures below +147/106, do not move the convertible top as this could

result in damage. Do not keep the convertible top in the convert- ible top box for longer than one day if it is wet; otherwise, the moisture may cause damage. Do not place objects on the convertible top, as otherwise they may fall off when you operate the convertible top and cause damage or injury. Never move the convertible top when the roll- over protection system is in the activated position. Always completely finish the operation of the convertible top. Driving with the convertible top incompletely opened or closed can result in damage or injury. Do not reach into the mechanism during the opening or closing procedure. Keep children away from the opening/closing path of the convertible top. For safety reasons, only operate the convertible top while the vehicle is standing.<

While opening and closing, the convert- ible top pivots upward. When operating

the convertible top in a garage, under a bridge, etc., ensure that there are at least 6.5 ft/2 m of headroom; otherwise, the vehicle may be damaged.<

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

45

Opening and closing Controls

Before opening and closing > Comply with the safety precautions

described above.

> Ensure that the trunk partition is folded down and engaged on both sides, refer to page 118; otherwise, it will not be possible to open the convertible top.

> Ensure that the cargo does not press against the trunk partition from below.

> Ensure that the trunk lid is closed.

Opening and closing Convertible top operation with Comfort Access, also refer to page 34.

As of radio readiness, refer to page 61:

To conserve battery power, if possible operate the convertible top only while the

engine is running. Prior to closing the convertible top, check for and remove all debris from the windshield frame; otherwise, the closing of the top may be hampered.<

1 Push button: close the convertible top

2 Push button: open convertible top

3 LEDs

The side windows move down when the convertible top is opened.<

If it is no longer possible to operate the cover after it has been actuated several times in immediate succession or after the cover has remained in an intermediate position for a longer period, then the convertible top drive has overheated.

If possible, close the convertible top and allow the drive unit to cool for a few minutes.

Operating while driving You can open or close the convertible top while driving, as long as the car is not moving faster than approx. 25 mph/40 km/h.

If you accelerate to over 30 mph/50 km/h while the convertible top is moving, the procedure is interrupted.

While operating the convertible top, pay close attention to the surrounding traffic;

otherwise, an accident may happen. Try to avoid operating the convertible top while reversing the vehicle since the rear view is very limited during the convertible top's movement. Do not operate the convertible top while driving in windy conditions. Do not drive faster than 30 mph/50 km/h; otherwise, damage to the vehicle can occur.<

LEDs > While the convertible top is being operated,

the left LED lights up green. It goes out as soon as the top is fully opened or closed.

In the following situations, a message appears on the Control Display or an acoustic signal sounds in addition to the LED lighting up:

> If the right-hand LED flashes red when you release the button, the opening or closing action has not yet finished.

> If the right-hand LED lights up red when the button is pressed, the trunk partition is raised, the trunk lid is not closed or there is a malfunction. The convertible top cannot be moved.

Interruption The automatic sequence of movements is interrupted if the button for the convertible top operation is released. The sequence can be continued in the desired direction by pushing or pulling the buttons.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

46

Controls Opening and closing

If the opening or closing procedure is inter- rupted for an extended period, the convertible top remains in the raised position for approx. 10 minutes and then slowly moves to a stable position.

A convertible top which is not completely open or closed is hazardous.<

If the convertible top is not fully opened or closed, the trunk lid cannot be opened

and the windows cannot be moved.<

Convenient opening and closing using the remote control Refer to page 34.

Closing manually Only close the convertible top manually if it is absolutely necessary. Never open it

manually. The convertible top box cover cannot be locked if there is an electrical defect and would then open while the vehicle is in motion. Incorrect handling can result in damage.<

Closing the convertible top manually should be performed by two people. The rear seats must not be occupied.

Only move the convertible top and the convert- ible top box cover when the ignition is switched off.

Before closing 1. Open the trunk lid.

2. Take the screwdriver out of the onboard vehicle tool kit, refer to page 243.

3. If the convertible top box cover is locked, release the two buttons in the trunk, arrows 1, using the screwdriver and pull forcefully all the way out. The convertible top box cover is unlocked.

After unlocking, do not push the buttons back into the luggage

compartment trim panel.<

4. When the top is closed manually, it is no longer possible to open the trunk lid. Take urgently needed items out of the luggage compartment and close the trunk lid.

5. Switch off ignition.

Closing 1. Slide the protective cap, arrow 2, forward.

2. Slowly and smoothly open the convertible top box cover all the way, arrow 3.

3. The locking pins must have engaged com- pletely. If they are still visible: close the con- vertible top box cover as far as necessary until the locking bolts engage audibly, then slowly open the cover. During this process, do not close the convertible top box cover completely.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

47

Opening and closing Controls

4. Lift out the front part of the convertible top, arrows 4, on both sides and swing it for- ward. At the same time keep the convertible top box cover from closing, e.g. using your shoulder.

5. Position the rear convertible top frame upright, arrow 5, and close the convertible top box cover, arrow 6. Then lower the rear convertible top frame.

6. Together with another person, press down the front convertible top frame from the out- side and on both sides as far as possible.

7. Carefully remove the cover in the center of the front convertible top frame using a pointed object. Take the allen wrench out of the onboard literature pouch.

8. Attach the handle of the screwdriver to the allen wrench and insert the wrench into the opening provided.

9. Turn the allen wrench all the way to the left, arrow 7, until the front convertible top frame is locked to the windshield frame. The rear convertible top frame is automatically pressed down onto the convertible top box cover and is sealed tight under tension.

The closing procedure must be fully completed; otherwise, injury or damage

may occur.<

Please contact your BMW center to have the cause of the malfunction eliminated.

Wind deflector With the convertible top open, the wind deflec- tor keeps air movement in the passenger com- partment to a minimum, thus providing you with a more pleasant drive, even at higher speeds.

Installation 1. Remove the wind deflector from the protec-

tive cover and unfold it, arrows 1.

2. Press together the top and bottom parts of the wind deflector until the catch engages, arrow 2.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

48

Controls Opening and closing

3. Position both locking pins of one side at the openings provided for them.

4. Press the wind deflector into the openings, arrows 3, overcoming the tension in the springs, and push the free locking pin in the same direction, arrow 4.

5. Position the free locking pins at the corre- sponding openings and let the spring tension lock the wind deflector in place, arrow 5.

6. Fold up the top section of the wind deflec- tor, arrow 6.

With the wind deflector installed: do not recline the front-seat backrests too far if

the seat is to be slid all the way back, as this would damage the wind deflector.<

Removing the wind deflector Proceed in the reverse order as used for instal- lation.

Folding

Slide the red release lever towards the middle of the wind deflector and push the two halves apart.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

49

Adjustments Controls

Adjustments

Vehicle equipment In this chapter, all production, country, and optional equipment that is offered in the model range is described. As a result, some equip- ment described may not be available in a partic- ular vehicle, for example due to the options or national-market version selected. This also applies to safety related functions and systems.

Sitting safely The ideal sitting position can make a vital contribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving. In conjunction with the safety belts, the head restraints and the airbags, the seated position has a major influence on your safety in the event of an accident. To ensure that the safety sys- tems operate with optimal efficiency, we strongly urge you to observe the instructions contained in the following section.

For additional information on transporting children safely, refer to page 58.

Airbags Always maintain an adequate distance between yourself and the airbags. Always

grip the steering wheel on the rim, with your hands in the 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to minimize the risk of injury to the hands or arms in the event of the airbag being triggered off. No one and nothing should come between the airbags and the seat occupant. Do not use the cover of the front airbag on the front passenger side as a storage area. Make sure that the front passenger is sitting correctly, i.e. not resting feet or legs on the dashboard; otherwise, leg injuries can occur if the front air- bag deploys. Make sure that passengers keep their heads away from the side airbag and do not lean

against the cover of the head airbag; otherwise, serious injuries can result if the airbag deploys.<

Even if you follow all the instructions, injuries resulting from contact with airbags cannot be fully excluded, depending on the circum- stances. The ignition and inflation noise may provoke a mild hearing loss in extremely sensitive individuals. This effect is usually only temporary.

For airbag locations and additional information on airbags, refer to page 97.

Head restraint A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the risk of neck injury in the event of an accident.

Adjust the head restraint in such a way that its center is at approx. ear level.

Otherwise, there is an increased risk of injury in the event of an accident.<

Head restraints, refer to page 52.

Safety belt Before every drive, make sure that all occupants wear their safety belts. Airbags complement the safety belt as an additional safety device, but they do not represent a substitute.

Your vehicle has four seats, each of which is equipped with a safety belt.

Never allow more than one person to wear a single safety belt. Never allow

infants or small children to ride in a passenger's lap. Make sure that the belt in the lap area sits low across the hips and does not press against the abdomen. The safety belt must not rest against the throat, run across sharp edges, pass over hard or frag- ile objects or be pinched. Fasten the safety belt so that it sits as snugly as possible against the lap and shoulder without being twisted. Other- wise, the belt could slide over your hips and

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

50

Controls Adjustments

injure your abdomen in the event of a frontal collision. Avoid wearing bulky clothing and regularly pull the belt in the upper-body area taut; otherwise, its restraining effect could be impaired.<

Safety belts, refer to page 54.

Seats Note before adjusting

Never attempt to adjust your seat while the vehicle is moving. The seat could

respond with unexpected movement, and the ensuing loss of vehicle control could lead to an accident. On the front passenger seat as well, do not incline the backrest too far to the rear while the vehicle is being driven; otherwise, there is a danger in the event of an accident of sliding under the safety belt, eliminating the protection normally provided by the belt.<

Comply with the instructions on head restraint height on page 52, and on damaged safety belts on page 55.

Manual adjustment Observe the adjustment instructions above to ensure the best possible

personal protection.<

Longitudinal direction Pull lever 1 and slide the seat to the desired position. After releasing the lever, move the seat gently forward or back to make sure it engages properly.

Height Pull lever 2 and apply your weight to the seat or lift it off, as necessary.

Backrest

Pull lever 3 and apply your weight to the back- rest or lift it off, as necessary.

Angle

Pull the lever and apply your weight to the seat or lift it off, as necessary.

Thigh support

Pull the lever and move the thigh support for- ward or back.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

51

Adjustments Controls

Electrical adjustment Observe the adjustment instructions above to ensure the best possible per-

sonal protection.<

1 Longitudinal direction

2 Height

3 Angle

4 Backrest

The head restraints are adjusted manually, refer to Head restraints on page 52.

Lumbar support

You can also adjust the contour of the backrest to obtain additional support in the lumbar region.

The upper hips and spinal column receive supplementary support to help you maintain a relaxed, upright sitting position.

> Increase or decrease curvature: press the switch at the front or rear, respectively.

> Shift curvature up or down: press the switch at the top or bottom, respectively.

Backrest width

You can change the width of the backrest to suit your individual preferences by adjusting the lateral-support pads.

Press the front or rear end of the switch. Backrest width decreases or increases accordingly.

Longitudinal adjustment from outside/ behind

To move the front seats forward or backward from outside or from one of the rear seats: with the door open, press the front end 1 or rear end 2 of the switch.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

52

Controls Adjustments

Head restraints

Correctly adjusted head restraint A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the risk of neck injury in the event of an accident.

Correctly adjust the head restraints of all occupied seats; otherwise, there is an

increased risk of injury in an accident.<

Height Adjust the head restraint so that its center is approximately at ear level.

Distance Adjust the distance so that the head restraint is as close as possible to the back of the head.

Front seats

Height adjustment

> To raise: pull up.

> To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and slide the head restraint down.

Removing Only remove a head restraint if no one will be sitting on the seat in question.

1. Pull up as far as it will go.

2. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the head restraint all the way out.

Rear seats

Coupe: height adjustment

> To raise: pull up.

> To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and slide the head restraint down.

Convertible: raising and lowering Only lower the head restraints if there are no passengers in the rear. Raise all

lowered head restraints before transporting passengers in the rear.<

> To raise: pull up.

> To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and slide the head restraint down, arrow 2.

Removing Only remove a head restraint if no one will be sitting on the seat in question.

1. Pull up as far as it will go.

2. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the head restraint all the way out.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

53

Adjustments Controls

Coupe: folding head restraint down and up Only fold down a head restraint if no one will be sitting in the seat in question. Fold up the head restraints again before transporting passengers in the rear.

Depending on your vehicle's equipment, it may contain foldable head restraints.

Folding down: Press the button, arrow 1.

Folding up: Pull the head restraint.

Entering the rear seats

Seat with manual longitudinal adjustment

Easy entry The easy entry feature includes a memory function for the longitudinal adjustment and backrest angle.

1. Pull lever 1 and swing the backrest forward.

2. Push the seat forward.

Previous position Push the seat backward and swing the backrest back.

When pushing the seat into its rearmost position, make sure that no one is injured

and that no objects are damaged. Before driving off, engage both seats and backrests so that they are locked in place. Otherwise, there is a risk of an accident due to unexpected movement.<

Seat with electrical longitudinal adjustment

Easy entry The easy entry feature includes a memory function for the longitudinal adjustment and backrest angle.

1. Pull lever 1 and swing the backrest forward.

2. Press the front end 2 of the switch until the seat has moved into the desired position.

Previous position Press the rear end 3 of the switch until the seat automatically stops in its previous position, and fold the backrest back. If you release the switch before the previous seat position is reached, the seat will stop at its current position.

When sliding the seat backward, make sure no one is injured and no objects are

damaged. Before driving off, engage both seats and backrests so that they are locked in place. Otherwise, there is a risk of an accident due to unexpected movement.<

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

54

Controls Adjustments

Seat heating

Press the button once per temperature level. Three LEDs indicate the highest temperature.

To switch off: Press button longer.

If you continue driving within approx. the next 15 minutes, the seat heating is automatically activated at the previously set temperature.

The temperature is lowered or the heating is switched off entirely to save on battery power. The LEDs stay lit.

Seat and mirror memory You can store and call up two different combi- nations of driver's seat and exterior mirror positions.

Settings for the backrest width and lumbar support are not stored in memory.

Storing

1. Switch on radio readiness or the ignition, refer to page 61.

2. Adjust the seat and exterior mirrors to the desired positions.

3. Press the button. The LED in the button lights up.

4. Press the desired memory button 1 or 2: the LED goes out.

Call-up Do not call up the memory while you are driving; otherwise, unexpected seat

movement could result in an accident.<

Comfort function 1. Unlock and open the driver's door or switch

on radio readiness, refer to page 61.

2. Briefly press the desired memory button 1 or 2.

The adjusting procedure is halted when you touch a seat adjustment switch or one of the memory buttons.

Safety feature 1. Close the driver's door and switch the

ignition on or off, refer to page 61.

2. Press the desired memory button 1 or 2 and keep it pressed until the adjustment process has been completed.

If the button was pressed accidentally: Press the button again; the LED goes out.

Safety belts Observe the adjustment instructions on page 49 to ensure the best possible

personal protection.<

Before every drive, make sure that all occupants wear their safety belts. Airbags complement the safety belt as an additional safety device, but they do not represent a substitute.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

55

Adjustments Controls

Closing Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in the belt buckle.

The upper belt anchor is suitable for adults of any stature as long as the seat is adjusted prop- erly, refer to page 50.

Opening 1. Grasp the belt firmly.

2. Press the red button in the buckle.

3. Guide the belt into its reel.

Safety belt reminder for front seats The indicator lamps light up and an acoustic signal sounds. In addition, a message appears on the Control Dis- play. Check whether the safety belt

has been fastened correctly.

The 'Fasten safety belts' reminder is issued as long as the driver's safety belt has not been fas- tened. The 'Fasten safety belts' reminder is also issued above approx. 5 mph/8 km/h if the front passenger safety belt has not been fastened, if there are objects on the front passenger seat or if the driver or front passenger unfasten their safety belts.

Damage to safety belts If the safety belts are damaged or stressed in an accident: have the belt sys-

tem, including any belt tensioners or child restraint systems, replaced and the belt anchors checked. Have this work carried out only at your BMW center. Otherwise correct operation of this safety equipment is not guaranteed.<

Mirrors

Exterior mirrors The front passenger's mirror is more con- vex than the driver's mirror. The objects

seen in the mirror are closer than they appear. Do not gauge your distance from traffic behind you on the basis of what you see in the mirror; otherwise, there is an increased risk of an accident.<

1 Adjustments

2 Switching to the other mirror or to the auto- matic curb monitor

3 Folding mirrors in and out

The setting for the exterior mirrors is stored for the remote control currently in use. The stored position is called up automatically when the vehicle is unlocked.

Manual adjustment The mirrors can also be adjusted manually: press the edge of the glass.

Folding mirrors in and out By pressing button 3, you can fold the mirrors in and out at driving speeds up to approx. 12 mph/ 20 km/h. This can be beneficial in narrow streets, for example, or for moving mirrors that were folded in by hand back out into their cor- rect positions. Mirrors that have been folded in will fold out automatically at a speed of approx. 25 mph/40 km/h.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

56

Controls Adjustments

Automatic heating Depending on the outside temperature, both exterior mirrors are heated automatically when the engine is running or the ignition is switched on.

Passenger side mirror tilt function automatic curb monitor

Activating 1. Push the switch to the position for the

driver's side mirror, arrow 1.

2. Shift into reverse or move the selector lever into the R position. The glass of the mirror on the passenger side tilts slightly down. This allows the driver to see the area immediately adjacent to the vehicle, e.g. a curb, when backing into a parking space.

Deactivating Push the switch to the position for the passen- ger side mirror, arrow 2.

Interior rearview mirror

Turn the knob to reduce glare from the head- lamps of cars behind you when driving at night.

Interior and exterior mirrors, automatic dimming feature

The automatic dimming feature of the interior and exterior mirrors is controlled by two photo cells in the interior rearview mirror. One photo cell is in the mirror frame, see arrow; the other is on the back of the mirror.

In order to ensure that the system functions correctly, keep the photo cells clean, do not cover the area between the interior rearview mirror and windshield, and do not affix adhesive labels or stickers of any kind to the windshield directly in front of the mirror.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

57

Adjustments Controls

Steering wheel

Adjustments Do not adjust the steering wheel position while the car is in motion; otherwise, there

is a risk of an accident due to unexpected movement.<

1. Fold the lever down.

2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred height and angle to suit your seated position.

3. Swing the lever back up.

Do not use force to swing the lever back up; otherwise, the mechanism

will be damaged.<

Steering wheel heating

Press the button.

The LED in the button lights up when the steer- ing wheel heating is switched on.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

58

Controls Transporting children safely

Transporting children safely

Vehicle equipment In this chapter, all production, country, and optional equipment that is offered in the model range is described. As a result, some equip- ment described may not be available in a partic- ular vehicle, for example due to the options or national-market version selected. This also applies to safety related functions and systems.

The right place for children Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle; otherwise, they could endanger

themselves and/or other persons by opening the doors, for example.<

Children should always sit in the rear Accident research has shown that the safest place for children is on the rear seat.

Children under the age of 13 or smaller than 5 ft/150 cm may be transported only

in the rear in suitable child restraint systems appropriate for their age, weight and size. Oth- erwise, there is an increased risk of injury in the event of an accident.<

Children 13 years of age or older must be buck- led in with a safety belt as soon as there no longer is any child restraint system that is appropriate for their age, size and weight.

Children in the front passenger seat Should it be necessary to use a child restraint system on the front passenger

seat, the front and side airbags for the front pas- senger must be deactivated. Otherwise, a child traveling on that seat will face a significant risk of injury if the airbags are triggered off, even with a child restraint system.<

For more information on automatic deactivation of the front passenger airbags refer to page 97.

Installing child restraint systems

Observe the child restraint system manu- facturer's instructions when selecting,

installing and using child restraint systems. Otherwise, the protective effect may be diminished. <

Standard child restraint systems are designed to be secured with a lap belt or with the lap-belt section of a lap-and-shoulder belt. Incorrectly or improperly installed child restraint systems can increase the risk of injury to children. Always follow the installation instructions for the system with the greatest care.

On the front passenger seat After installing a child restraint system on the front passenger seat, make sure that

the front and side airbags for the front passen- ger are deactivated; otherwise, there is an increased risk of injury if the airbags deploy.<

Seat position Before installing a child restraint system, move the front passenger seat as far back and up as possible to obtain the best possible position for the belt. Do not change the seat position after this.

Backrest width The backrest width of the front passenger seat must be at its widest possible set-

ting. Do not change the setting after installing the child seat; otherwise, the child seat's stabil- ity on the front passenger seat is limited.<

1. Adjust the backrest width to its widest setting, refer to page 51.

2. Install the child seat.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

59

Transporting children safely Controls

Child seat security

The rear safety belts and the front passenger safety belt can be prevented from being pulled out in order to fasten child restraint systems.

To lock the safety belt 1. Secure the child restraint system with the

belt.

2. Pull the belt strap all the way out.

3. Allow the belt strap to retract and pull it taut against the child restraint system.

The safety belt is locked.

To unlock the safety belt 1. Open the belt buckle.

2. Remove the child restraint system.

3. Allow the safety belt strap to retract all the way.

LATCH child restraint fixing system LATCH: lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren.

To install and use the LATCH child restraint system, follow the operating and

safety instructions provided by the manufac- turer of the system; otherwise, the protective function of the seat may be compromised.<

Mounts for lower LATCH anchors Before installing the child seat, pull the belt out of the area for the child restraint fixing system.

The lower anchors may be used to attach the CRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined child and CRS weight of 65 lbs/30 kg when the child is restrained by the internal harnesses.

Ensure that both lower LATCH anchors are correctly engaged and that the child

restraint system is resting firmly against the backrest; otherwise, the protective function of the seat may be compromised.<

Coupe: rear seats

The mounts for the lower LATCH anchors are located behind the labeled protective caps.

Convertible: rear seats

The mounts for the lower LATCH anchors are located at the positions indicated by arrows, in the gap between the seat and the backrest.

Installing LATCH child restraint systems 1 Installing child restraint system, refer to the

system operating instructions.

2 Make sure that both LATCH anchors are correctly locked in position.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

60

Controls Transporting children safely

Child restraint system with tether strap

Convertible For Canadian Customers Only.

The following statement is required by Trans- port Canada.

This vehicle is not equipped with user-ready tether anchorages. As such neither a child restraint system, nor a booster cushion, requir- ing the use of a tether strap can be properly secured in the vehicle.

Coupe Use the tether anchors to secure child restraint systems only; otherwise, the

anchors could be damaged.<

For child restraint systems with tether straps there are two additional anchors, see arrows.

Placement of the tether strap

Coupe Make sure the upper retaining strap does not run over sharp edges and is not

twisted as it passes to the top anchor. Other- wise, the strap will not properly secure the child restraint system in the event of an accident.<

1 Direction of travel

2 Head restraint

3 Hook for upper retaining strap

4 Anchor

5 Rear window shelf

6 Seat backrest

7 Upper retaining strap of child restraint system

If necessary, fold the head restraints upward before use.

1. Push the head restraint upward.

2. Guide the upper retaining strap between the head restraint holders.

3. Use the hook to clip the retaining strap to the anchor.

4. Push the head restraint into its lowermost position.

5. Pull the retaining strap taut.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

61

Driving Controls

Driving

Vehicle equipment In this chapter, all production, country, and optional equipment that is offered in the model range is described. For this reason, descrip- tions will be given of some equipment that may not be available in a vehicle, for example due to the special options or national-market version selected. This also applies to safety related functions and systems.

Ignition lock

Insert the remote control into the ignition lock

Insert the remote control all the way into the ignition lock.

> Radio readiness is switched on. Individual electrical consumers can operate.

Comfort Access If the car is equipped with Comfort Access, only insert the remote control into the ignition lock under special circumstances, refer to page 40.

Removing the remote control from the ignition lock

Do not forcibly pull the remote control out of the ignition lock as this may cause

damage.<

Before removing the remote control, push it all the way in to release the locking mechanism.

> The ignition is switched off if it was on.

Automatic transmission You cannot take out the remote control unless the selector lever is in the P position: interlock.

Start/Stop button

Pressing the Start/Stop button switches radio readiness or the ignition on or off.

Manual transmission: if you press the Start/Stop button and depress the clutch,

the engine starts. Automatic transmission and Sport automatic transmission with double clutch: when you press the Start/Stop button and depress the brake pedal, the engine starts.<

Radio readiness Individual electrical consumers can operate. The time and the outside temperature are displayed in the instrument cluster.

Radio readiness is switched off automatically:

> When the remote control is removed from the ignition lock

> In cars with Comfort Access, by touching the surface above the door lock, refer to Locking on page 40

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

62

Controls Driving

Ignition on All electrical consumers can operate. The odometer and trip odometer are displayed in the instrument cluster.

When the engine is off, please switch off the ignition and any unnecessary

electrical consumers in order to preserve the battery.<

Radio readiness and ignition off All indicator and warning lamps as well as displays in the instrument cluster go out.

Starting the engine Do not run the engine in enclosed areas; otherwise, the inhalation of toxic exhaust

gases can cause loss of consciousness and death. The exhaust gases contain carbon mon- oxide, an odorless and colorless, but highly toxic gas. Never leave an unattended vehicle with the engine running; otherwise, such a vehicle represents a potential safety hazard. Before leaving the car with the engine running, place the transmission in neutral or move the selector lever to position P and forcefully apply the parking brake to prevent the car from moving.<

Do not wait for the engine to warm up while the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving right away, but at moderate engine speeds.

Avoid frequent starting in quick succes- sion as well as repeated start attempts in

which the engine does not start. Otherwise, the fuel is not burned or incompletely burned and there is a danger of overheating and damaging the catalytic converter.<

Manual transmission Remote control in the ignition lock or, with Comfort Access, inside the vehicle, refer to page 40.

1. Depress the brake.

2. Depress the clutch and shift into neutral.

3. Press the Start/Stop button.

The starter operates automatically for a certain time, and stops automatically as soon as the engine has started.

Automatic transmission Remote control in the ignition lock or, with Comfort Access, inside the vehicle, refer to page 40.

1. Depress the brake.

2. Move the selector lever to position P.

3. Press the Start/Stop button.

The starter operates automatically for a certain time, and stops automatically as soon as the engine has started.

Sport automatic transmission with double clutch Remote control in the ignition lock or, with Comfort Access, inside the vehicle, refer to page 40.

1. Depress the brake.

2. Press the Start/Stop button.

The engine starts independent of the current transmission position.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

63

Driving Controls

Switching off the engine When leaving the vehicle, always take along the remote control; this precaution

prevents children from starting the engine, for example.<

When parking, apply the parking brake forcefully; otherwise, the vehicle could

begin to roll. On steep uphill and downhill inclines, also secure the vehicle by turning the wheels toward the curb, for example.<

Manual transmission 1. With the car at a standstill, press the

Start/Stop button.

2. Shift into first gear or reverse.

3. Forcefully apply the parking brake.

4. Removing the remote control from the ignition lock, refer to page 61.

Automatic transmission 1. With the car at a standstill, move the selec-

tor lever to position P.

2. Press the Start/Stop button.

3. Forcefully apply the parking brake.

4. Removing the remote control from the ignition lock, refer to page 61.

Sport automatic transmission with double clutch 1. With the car at a standstill, press the

Start/Stop button. If the transmission is shifted into N when the engine is switched off, you will be notified visually and acoustically of this fact.

2. Forcefully apply the parking brake.

3. Remove remote control from the ignition lock, refer to page 61. The transmission is automatically shifted into transmission position P.

Parking brake The parking brake is primarily intended to pre- vent the vehicle from rolling while parked; it brakes the rear wheels.

Also follow the instructions on page 63, under Switching off the engine.

Indicator lamp The indicator lamp is lit, and when you drive off a signal sounds in addition. The parking brake is still applied.

Indicator lamp for Canadian models.

Applying The lever locks in position automatically.

Releasing

Pull slightly upwards, press the button and lower the lever.

In exceptional cases, if the parking brake has to be used to slow or stop the car, do

not pull the lever up too hard. In doing so, con- tinuously press the button of the parking brake lever. Otherwise, excessive force on the parking brake can lock up the rear wheels and cause the rear of the car to swerve.<

To prevent corrosion and one-sided brak- ing action, occasionally apply the parking

brake lightly when the vehicle is slowly coming to a stop if the traffic conditions are suitable. The brake lamps do not light up when the park- ing brake is applied.<

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

64

Controls Driving

Manual transmission

When shifting into 5th or 6th gear, press the gearshift lever to the right. Otherwise,

the engine could be damaged if you inadvert- ently shift into 3rd or 4th gear.<

Reverse gear Select this only when the vehicle is stationary. When the gearshift lever is pressed to the left, a slight resistance has to be overcome.

Automatic transmission with Steptronic In addition to fully automatic operation, you can also manually shift with the Steptronic, refer to page 65.

Vehicle parking To prevent the vehicle from rolling, always select position P and apply the

parking brake before leaving the vehicle with the engine running.<

Disengaging the remote control In order to remove the remote control from the ignition lock, you must first move the selector lever to position P and switch off the engine: interlock. Removing the remote control from the ignition lock, refer to page 61.

Selector lever positions P R N D M/S +

Displays in the instrument cluster

The selector lever position is displayed and, in manual mode, the engaged gear, e.g. M4.

Changing selector lever positions > With the ignition switched on or the engine

running, the selector lever can be moved out of position P.

> Before moving the lever away from P or N with the vehicle stationary, first depress the brake; otherwise, the selector lever will refuse to move: shiftlock.

To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you select a driving position,

depress the brake until you are ready to start.<

A lock prevents inadvertent shifting into the selector lever positions R and P. To release the lock, press the button on the front of the selec- tor lever, see arrow.

P Park Select this only when the vehicle is stationary. The transmission locks to prevent the drive wheels from turning.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

65

Driving Controls

R Reverse Select this only when the vehicle is stationary.

N Neutral You can select this in a car wash, for example. The vehicle can roll.

D Drive, automatic position Position for normal vehicle operation. All for- ward gears are selected automatically.

Under normal operating conditions, fuel con- sumption is lowest when you are driving in position D.

Kickdown Kickdown enables you to achieve maximum performance. Press the accelerator pedal beyond the full- throttle resistance point.

Sport program and manual mode M/S

Move selector lever from position D toward the left into the M/S shifting slot; the Sport program is activated. This position is recommended for a performance-oriented driving style.

DS is displayed in the instrument cluster.

To deactivate the sport program or manual mode M/S, move the selector lever to the right into position D.

Shifting gears via the selector lever Move selector lever from position D toward the left into the M/S shifting slot: When you press the selector lever forwards or backwards, the manual mode is activated and Steptronic changes gear.

The engaged gear, e.g. M1 is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Upshifts and downshifts are executed only when they will result in a plausible combination of engine and vehicle speed; thus, for example, a downshift that would cause the engine to overrev will not be executed by the system.

The gear selected is briefly displayed in the instrument cluster, followed again by the gear actually in use.

Changing gears using shifting paddles on steering wheel The shift paddles allow you to shift gears quickly since both hands can remain on the steering wheel.

> When you use the shift paddles on the steering wheel to shift gears in automatic mode, the transmission switches to manual mode.

> If you do not accelerate or shift gears using the shift paddles for a certain amount of time, the transmission switches back to automatic mode.

If the selector lever is in the M/S gear plane, manual mode remains active.<

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

66

Controls Driving

> To upshift, briefly pull the right shift paddle +.

> To downshift, briefly pull the left shift paddle .

Upshifts and downshifts are executed only when they will result in a plausible combination of engine and vehicle speed; thus, for example, a downshift that would cause the engine to overrev will not be executed by the system.

The gear selected is briefly displayed in the instrument cluster, followed again by the gear actually in use.

Overriding selector lever lock If the selector lever will not move out of position P even though the ignition is switched on, the brake is depressed, and the button on the selector lever is pressed, the selector lever lock can be overridden:

1. Unclip the sleeve of the selector lever.

2. Pull the sleeve up over the selector lever until the sleeve is inside out.

3. Using the screwdriver from the onboard vehicle tool kit, refer to page 243, press the red lever, see arrow, while moving the selector lever to the desired position.

7-gear Sport automatic transmission with double clutch

The concept The 7-gear Sport automatic transmission with double clutch is an automated manual trans- mission with two clutches and secondary gear sets in which the clutching and shifting is handled by an electrohydraulic system. With the 7-gear Sport automatic transmission with double clutch, the gears are shifted without an interruption in driving power.

You operate the 7-gear Sport automatic trans- mission with double clutch using the selector lever and two shift paddles on the steering wheel.

It offers you the following functions:

> Either manual or automatic mode: sequen- tial mode or drive mode

> Automatic downshifting and protection against incorrect gear selection, even in sequential mode

> Acceleration assistant, Launch Control, refer to page 70

> Automatic intermediate throttle application

System limitations The 7-gear Sport automatic transmission with double clutch has an overheating protection that protects the clutch from extreme loads.

The indicator lamp lights up in yellow if the transmission becomes too warm. Avoid high engine loads and frequent

accelerations from zero. If the transmission is overheated, the indicator lamp lights up in red and the power flow to the motor is interrupted. It is only possible to continue driving once the transmission has cooled down.

Avoid frequent powerful accelerations from zero and do not hold the vehicle on inclines by pressing lightly on the accelerator while letting the clutch slip, as this may cause the transmis- sion to overheat.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

67

Driving Controls

Selector lever positions P R N D M/S +

The selector lever position and the engaged gear are displayed, e.g. M4.

Engaging selector lever positions > The selector lever can be moved out of

position P only with the engine running: interlock.

> Before moving the lever away from P or N with the vehicle stationary, first depress the brake; otherwise, the desired shift will not be executed: shiftlock.

Shifting into N, D, R

Briefly push the selector lever in the desired direction, overcoming a resistance point if necessary. When shifting out of P or into R, simultaneously press the button 1.

The engaged selector lever position is also displayed on the selector lever.

When you release the selector lever, it returns to its center position.

Shifting into P

Press the button P.

P Park Select this only when the vehicle is stationary. The rear wheels are locked.

The transmission is shifted into P if, with the engine running, you open the driver's

door, do not have your safety belt fastened, and subsequently actuate neither the brake pedal nor the accelerator. Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the automatic transmission selector lever is in the park position. Otherwise, the vehicle may begin to move.<

The transmission is shifted into P as soon as you switch off the engine, unless the

transmission is in N and the remote control is in the ignition lock, refer to page 61. As soon as you remove the remote control from the ignition lock, then the transmission is shifted into P.<

R Reverse Select this only when the vehicle is stationary.

N Neutral You can select this in a car wash, for example. The vehicle can roll.

After the engine is switched off, the trans- mission remains in N if you leave the

remote control in the ignition lock. You can use this function at a car wash, for example, refer to page 240.<

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

68

Controls Driving

D Drive mode In Drive mode, all forward gears are shifted automatically.

Kickdown For sudden acceleration maneuvers such as passing, depress the accelerator past the resis- tance point. This provides maximum accelera- tion.

Sport program and manual operation M/S

Push selector lever toward the left from the selector lever position D, the Sport program is activated. This position is recommended for a performance-oriented driving style. The engaged gear, e.g. S1, is displayed in the instrument cluster.

When you press the selector lever forwards or backwards, the manual mode is activated and Steptronic changes gear. The engaged gear, e.g. M1 is displayed in the instrument cluster.

In the following situations, the 7-gear Sport automatic transmission with double clutch does the thinking for you:

> Upshifts and downshifts are executed only when they will result in a plausible combina- tion of engine and vehicle speed; thus, for example, a downshift that could cause the engine to overrev will not be executed by the system.

> At a stop, the transmission is automatically shifted down to the first gear.

> Shortly before the speed falls below a gear- dependent minimum speed, the transmis- sion automatically downshifts without your intervention.

Quick downshifting: even in sequential mode, you can skip over several gears in order to achieve an optimum acceleration. To do so, depress the accelerator past the resistance point.

To return to automatic mode, push the selector lever to the right.

Gear shifting Upshift or downshift using the selector lever or the shift paddles. You do not need to lift your foot off the accelerator when doing so.

Using the selector lever > To upshift, pull the selector lever toward the

rear.

> To downshift, push it toward the front.

Using the shift paddles on the steering wheel You can also shift manually using two shift pad- dles on the steering wheel. The shift paddles allow you to shift gears quickly since both hands can remain on the steering wheel.

> When you use the shift paddles on the steering wheel to shift gears in automatic mode, the transmission switches to manual mode.

> If you do not accelerate or shift gears using the shift paddles for a certain amount of time, the transmission switches back to automatic mode if the selector lever is in position D.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

69

Driving Controls

> To upshift, briefly pull the right shift paddle +.

> To downshift, briefly pull the left shift paddle .

Driving dynamics control The driving dynamics control permits you, at the push of a button, to have your BMW react in an even more sporty fashion when driving:

> Optimal use is made of the engine's speed range.

> Gear changes occur more quickly.

> The engine reacts more spontaneously to accelerator pedal movements.

Activating the system

Press the SPORT button. The LED in the button lights up.

Deactivating the system > Press the SPORT button again

> Switch off the engine

The LED in the button goes out.

Manually unlocking parking lock In the event of a power supply interrup- tion such as a discharged or discon-

nected battery or an electrical malfunction, the parking lock must be manually unlocked; other- wise, the rear wheels are immobilized and the vehicle cannot be towed.<

Only unlock the parking lock manually for towing and make sure to set the parking brake forcefully beforehand so that the vehicle cannot roll. Lock the parking lock again after the vehicle is parked.

Releasing 1. Unclip the sleeve of the selector lever.

2. Pull the sleeve up over the selector lever until the sleeve is inside out.

3. Using the allen wrench from the tool kit, refer to page 243, rotate the cover until it reaches the stop, arrow 1, and remove, arrow 2.

4. Insert allen wrench into the opening, arrow 1.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

70

Controls Driving

5. Rotate allen wrench until it reaches the stop, arrow 2. The parking lock is unlocked.

Do not turn allen wrench in the oppo- site direction; otherwise, you may

damage the mechanism.<

6. Remove allen wrench from the opening.

After parking the vehicle, lock the parking lock again. Otherwise, there is a danger

that the vehicle will roll.<

Locking 1. Press the button, see arrow.

The parking lock is locked again.

2. Replace cover again.

3. Clip the selector lever sleeve back into place.

4. Forcefully apply the parking brake.

Jump starting and towing, starting on page 251.

Launch Control Launch Control enables an optimum accelera- tion when starting off on a road surface with good traction.

Do not use Launch Control too often; oth- erwise, the powerful stresses on the vehi-

cle will lead to premature component wear.<

Launch Control is ready for use when the engine is at operating temperature, i.e. after uninterrupted travel of at least 6.2 miles/10 km.

1. With the engine running, step on the brake with your left foot.

2. Activate Dynamic Traction Control (DTC), refer to page 90.

3. Activate Driving dynamics control, refer to page 69.

4. With the vehicle stationary, activate the manual mode and select 1st gear.

5. With your right foot, push the accelerator pedal past the resistance point. The engine speed for pulling away is adjusted. A flag symbol appears in the instrument cluster.

6. When you release the brake pedal, the vehi- cle accelerates. Keep the accelerator pedal floored.

7. The upshifting occurs automatically as long as you keep the accelerator pedal pressed past the resistance point.

Launch Control will be ready for use again after you drive a certain distance.

Launch Control is not available for use during the break-in phase, refer to page 124.

To maintain driving stability, keep DSC activated whenever possible.<

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

71

Driving Controls

Turn signals/ headlamp flasher

1 High beams

2 Headlamp flasher

3 Turn signal

Using turn signals Press the lever beyond the resistance point.

To turn off manually, press the lever to the resistance point.

Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator lamp and the turn signals indicates that

one of the turn signal bulbs has failed.<

Signaling a turn briefly Press the lever as far as the resistance point for as long as you wish to signal a turn.

Triple turn signal activation Press the lever as far as the resistance point. The turn signals flash three times.

You can activate or deactivate this function.

1. "Settings"

2. "Lighting"

3. "Triple turn signal"

The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Wiper system Do not switch on the wipers if they immo- bilized by ice; otherwise, damage to the

wiper blades and wiper motor may occur.<

Do not use the wipers when the window glass is dry; otherwise, the wiper blades

may experience accelerated wear or damage.<

1 Switching on wipers

2 Switching off wipers or brief wipe

3 Activating/deactivating intermittent wipe or rain sensor

4 Cleaning windshield and headlamps

5 Setting speed for intermittent wipe or sensitivity of the rain sensor

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

72

Controls Driving

Switching on wipers Press the lever upward, arrow 1.

The lever automatically returns to its initial position when released.

Normal wiper speed Press once. The system switches to operation in the inter- mittent mode when the vehicle is stationary.

Fast wiper speed Press twice or press beyond the resistance point. The system switches to normal speed when the vehicle is stationary.

Intermittent wipe or rain sensor If the car is not equipped with a rain sensor, the intermittent-wipe time is a preset.

If the car is equipped with a rain sensor, the time between wipes is controlled automatically and depends on the intensity of the rainfall. The rain sensor is mounted on the windshield, directly in front of the interior rearview mirror.

Activating intermittent wipe or rain sensor

Press the button, arrow 3. The LED in the button lights up.

Setting speed for intermittent wipe or sensitivity of the rain sensor Turn the thumb wheel 5.

Deactivating intermittent wipe or rain sensor Press the button again, arrow 3. The LED goes out.

Deactivate the rain sensor before enter- ing an automatic car wash. Failure to do

so could result in damage caused by undesired wiper activation.<

Cleaning windshield and headlamps Pull the lever, arrow 4. Washer fluid is sprayed onto the windshield and the wipers are operated for a short time.

When the vehicle lighting system is switched on, the headlamps are cleaned at regular and appropriate intervals.

Do not use the washers if there is any danger that the fluid will freeze on the

windshield. If you do, your vision could be obscured. Antifreeze should therefore be added to the fluid, refer to Washer fluid. Do not use the washers when the washer fluid reservoir is empty; otherwise, you will damage the washer pump.<

Windshield washer nozzles Both windshield washer nozzles are automati- cally heated with the engine running or the ignition switched on.

Washer fluid Washer fluid antifreeze is flammable. Therefore, keep it away from ignition

sources and only store it in the closed original container that is kept out of reach of children; otherwise, there is a risk of personal injury. Comply with the instructions on the container.<

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

73

Driving Controls

United States: the washer fluid mixture ratio is regulated by the U.S. EPA and many individual states; do not exceed the allowable washer fluid dilution ratio limits that apply. Follow the usage instructions on the washer fluid container. Use BMW's Windshield Washer Concentrate or the equivalent.

Washer fluid filler neck Only add washer fluid after allowing the engine to cool and close the cover com-

pletely in order to prevent the washer fluid from contacting hot engine parts. Otherwise, fluid spills or leaks constitute a fire hazard and a risk to personal safety.<

All washer nozzles are supplied with washer fluid by the same reservoir.

The recommended minimum filling quantity is 0.2 US gal/1 liter.

Fill with a mixture of window cleaner concen- trate, tap water and, if required, with a washer antifreeze, according to manufacturer's recom- mendations.

Do not fill with undiluted window cleaner concentrate or with pure water since these can result in damage to the wiper system.

Do not mix window cleaner concentrates from different manufacturers since this may clog the washer nozzles.

Cruise control

The concept You can use the cruise control feature begin- ning at approx. 20 mph/30 km/h. The car then stores and maintains the speed that you specify using the lever on the steering column.

Do not use cruise control when driving at constant speed is prevented by adverse

conditions, e.g. winding roads, dense traffic or poor road conditions due to, e.g. snow, rain, ice or loose surfaces. Otherwise, you could lose control of the vehicle and cause an accident as a result.<

One lever for all functions

1 Storing and maintaining speed or accelerating

2 Storing and maintaining speed or decelerating

3 Deactivating cruise control

4 Resuming a previously stored speed

Maintaining current speed Briefly press the lever, arrow 1, or pull it briefly, arrow 2. The car's current speed is stored and main- tained. It is briefly displayed in the instrument cluster.

If the engine braking power is insufficient on a downhill slope, the set speed may be exceeded. On uphill grades vehicle speed may drop if the engine output is insufficient.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

74

Controls Driving

Increasing speed Briefly press the lever, arrow 1, until the desired speed is reached. Each time the lever is pressed briefly, the speed is increased by approx. 1 mph/1 km/h.

Accelerating using the lever Press the lever, arrow 1, until the desired speed is reached. The vehicle accelerates without pressure on the accelerator pedal. The system stores and maintains the speed.

Decreasing speed Repeatedly pull the lever, arrow 2,until the desired speed is reached. The functions here are the same as for increas- ing the speed or accelerating, except that the speed will be decreased.

Deactivating cruise control Push the lever briefly upwards or downwards, arrow 3.

In addition, the system is automatically deactivated:

> When the brakes are applied.

> When the clutch of the manual transmission is engaged or the transmission is shifted into neutral.

> When the automatic transmission selector lever is moved into the neutral position N.

> When the selector lever of the sport auto- matic transmission with double clutch is moved into the neutral position N.

> When the vehicle travels faster or slower than the set speed for an extended period, e.g. when the accelerator is depressed.

> When DSC is intervening.

Resuming a previously stored speed Press the button, arrow 4. The last stored speed is resumed and maintained.

The stored speed is briefly displayed in the instrument cluster.

The stored speed is cleared when the ignition is switched off.

Display in the instrument cluster

When the speed at which the vehicle is traveling is stored or when a stored speed is called up, the speed is briefly displayed in the instrument cluster.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

75

Controls overview Controls

Controls overview

Vehicle equipment In this chapter, all production, country, and optional equipment that is offered in the model range is described. For this reason, descrip- tions will be given of some equipment that may not be available in a vehicle, for example due to the special options or national-market version selected. This also applies to safety related functions and systems.

Odometer, outside temperature display, clock

1 Knob in the instrument cluster

2 Outside temperature and clock

3 Odometer and trip odometer

Knob in the instrument cluster > To reset the trip odometer while the ignition

is switched on

> To display the time, outside temperature and odometer briefly while the ignition is switched off

Units of measure To select the respective units of measure, miles or km for the odometer as well as 7 or 6 for the outside temperature, refer to Units of mea- sure on page 80.

The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Time, outside temperature display Setting the time, refer to page 82.

Outside temperature warning When the displayed temperature sinks to approx. +377/+36, a signal sounds and a warning lamp lights up. There is an increased risk of black ice.

Black ice can also form at temperatures above +377/+36. You should there-

fore drive carefully on bridges and shaded roads, for example; otherwise, there is an increased risk of an accident.<

Odometer and trip odometer Resetting the trip odometer: With the ignition switched on, press button 1 in the instrument cluster.

When the vehicle is parked If you still want to view the time, outside tem- perature and odometer reading briefly after the remote control has been taken out of the igni- tion lock: Press button 1 in the instrument cluster.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

76

Controls Controls overview

Tachometer

Never force the engine speed up into the red warning field, see arrow. In this range, the fuel supply is interrupted to protect the engine.

Engine oil temperature

When the engine is at normal operating temper- ature, the engine oil temperature is between approx. 2107/1006 and approx. 3007/ 1506.

If the engine oil temperature is too high, a message appears on the Control Display.

Fuel gauge

Fuel tank capacity: approx. 14 US gal/53 liters.

You can find information on refueling on page 221.

If the tilt of the vehicle varies for a longer period, when you are driving in mountainous areas, for example, the indicator may fluctuate slightly.

Fuel display 135i: in speedometer.

Reserve Once the fuel level has fallen to the reserve zone, a message briefly appears on the Control Display and the remaining cruising range is dis- played on the computer. Under a cruising range of approx. 30 miles/50 km, the message remains in the Control Display.

With a dynamic driving style, e.g. rapid corner- ing, engine functions are not always assured.

Refuel as soon as possible once your cruising range falls below 30 miles/

50 km; otherwise, engine functions are not ensured and damage can occur.<

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

77

Controls overview Controls

Computer

Displays in the instrument cluster

Calling up information

Press the button in the turn signal/high beam lever.

The following items of information are displayed in the order listed:

> Cruising range

> Average speed

> Average fuel consumption

> Current fuel consumption

> No information

To set the corresponding units of measure, refer to Units of measure on page 80.

Cruising range Displays the estimated cruising range available with the remaining fuel. The range is calculated on the basis of the way the car has been driven over the last 18 miles/30 km and the amount of fuel currently in the tank.

It is important that you refuel as soon as possible once your cruising range falls

below 30 miles/50 km; otherwise, engine func- tions are not ensured and damage can occur.<

Average speed Periods with the vehicle parked and the engine switched off are not included in the calculations of average speed.

With the trip computer, refer to page 79, you can have the average speed for another trip displayed.

To reset average speed: press the button in the turn signal/high beam lever for approx. 2 seconds.

Average fuel consumption The average fuel consumption is calculated for the time during which the engine is running.

With the trip computer, refer to page 79, you can have the average consumption for another trip displayed.

To reset average fuel consumption: press the button in the turn signal/high beam lever for approx. 2 seconds.

Current fuel consumption Displays the current fuel consumption. This allows you to see whether your current driving style is conducive to fuel economy with mini- mum exhaust emissions.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

78

Controls Controls overview

Displays on the Control Display The computer can also be opened via iDrive.

1. "Vehicle Info"

2. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer"

Displaying "Onboard info":

> Cruising range

> Distance from destination

> Estimated time of arrival if a destination has been entered in the navigation system.

Displaying "Trip computer":

> Departure time

> Trip duration

> Trip distance

Both displays show:

> The average speed and

> the average fuel consumption.

Resetting the fuel consumption and speed You can reset the values for average speed and average consumption:

1. Select the respective menu entry.

2. Press the controller again to confirm your selection.

Resetting the trip computer You can reset all values:

1. "Vehicle Info"

2. "Trip computer"

3. "Reset"

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

79

Controls overview Controls

Settings and information

Operating principle

1 Button for:

> Selecting display

> Setting values

2 Button for:

> Confirming selected display or set values

> Calling up computer information 77

3 When the lights are on: instrument lighting brightness 104

4 Calling up Check Control 84

5 Checking oil level 233

6 Setting the time 82

7 Setting the date 84

8 Viewing service requirement display 80

Exiting displays The outside temperature reading and the time reappear when you press button 2 or if you make no entries within approx. 15 seconds. If required, complete the current setting first.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

80

Controls Controls overview

Units of measure You can change the units for fuel consumption, route/distance, temperature and pressure.

1. "Settings"

2. "Language/Units"

3. Select the desired menu item.

4. Select the desired unit.

The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use.

Service requirements

The remaining driving distance and the date of the next scheduled service are displayed briefly immediately after you start the engine or switch on the ignition.

The extent of service work required can be read out from the remote control by

your dealership Service Advisor.<

For certain maintenance operations, you can view the respective distance remaining or due date individually in the instrument cluster.

1. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 61.

2. Push button 1 in the turn signal/high beam lever up or down repeatedly until the appro- priate symbol appears in the display, accompanied by the words "SERVICE- INFO".

3. Press button 2.

4. Use button 1 to scroll through the individual service items.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

81

Controls overview Controls

Possible displays

1 Button for selecting functions

2 Service requirements

3 Engine oil

4 Roadworthiness test

5 Front brake pads

6 Rear brake pads

7 Brake fluid

The sequence of displayed service items may vary. The data for the next service appointment is shown first.

More information

Detailed information on service requirements You can call up additional information on the maintenance regimen on the Control Display.

1. "Vehicle Info"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Service required"

Required maintenance procedures and legally mandated inspections are displayed.

You can request more detailed information on every entry:

Select the entry and press the controller.

To exit from the menu: Move the controller to the left.

Symbols No service is currently required.

The deadline for service or a legally mandated inspection is approaching.

The service deadline has already passed.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

82

Controls Controls overview

Entering deadlines for legally required inspections Make sure the date on the Control Display is always set correctly, refer to page 84; other- wise, the effectiveness of Condition Based Service CBS is not ensured.

1. "Vehicle Info"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Service required"

4. " Vehicle inspection"

5. Open the menu for entering the deadline.

6. "Date:"

7. Create the settings.

8. Press the controller to apply the setting. The year is highlighted.

9. Turn the controller to make the adjustment.

10. Press the controller to apply the setting. The date entry is stored.

To exit from the menu: Move the controller to the left.

More information on the BMW Maintenance System can be found on page 237.

Automatic Service Request Data regarding the maintenance status or legally mandated inspections of the vehicle are automatically transmitted to your BMW center prior to a service due date.

You can check when your BMW center was notified.

1. "Vehicle Info"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Options"

4. "Last Service Request"

Clock The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use, refer also to Personal Profile on page 32.

Setting the time

In the instrument cluster To set the 12h/24h format, refer to Setting the time format on page 83.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

83

Controls overview Controls

1. Push button 1 in the turn signal/high beam lever up or down repeatedly until the appro- priate symbol appears in the display, accompanied by the time and the word "SET".

2. Press button 2.

3. Use button 1 to set the hours.

4. Press button 2 to confirm the entry.

5. Use button 1 to set the minutes.

6. Press button 2 to confirm the entry.

7. Press button 2. The system accepts the new time.

Via iDrive 1. Press the MENU button.

The main menu is displayed.

2. "Settings"

Setting the time 1. "Settings"

2. "Time/Date"

3. "Time:"

4. Turn the controller until the desired hours are displayed, and then press the controller.

5. Turn the controller until the desired minutes are displayed, and then press the controller.

The time is stored.

Setting the time format 1. "Settings"

2. "Time/Date"

3. "Format:"

4. Select the desired format and press the controller.

The time format is stored.

Setting time zone 1. "Settings"

2. "Time/Date"

3. "Time zone:"

4. Select desired time zone.

The time zone is stored.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

84

Controls Controls overview

Date The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use, refer also to Personal Profile on page 32.

Setting the date

In the instrument cluster To set the dd/mm or mm/dd date format, refer to Setting the date format below.

1. Push button 1 in the turn signal/high beam lever up or down repeatedly until the appro- priate symbol appears in the display, accompanied by the date and the word "SET".

2. Press button 2.

3. Use button 1 to set the day of the month.

4. Press button 2 to confirm the entry.

5. Set the month and the year in the same way.

6. Press button 2. The system stores the new date.

Via iDrive 1. "Settings"

2. "Time/Date"

3. "Date:"

4. Turn the controller until the desired day is displayed, and press the controller.

5. Create the necessary settings for the month and year.

The date is stored.

Setting the date format 1. "Settings"

2. "Time/Date"

3. "Format:"

4. Select the desired format.

The date format is stored.

Check Control

The concept The Check Control monitors vehicle functions and alerts you to any malfunctions in the sys- tems monitored. Such a Check Control mes- sage includes indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster and, in some circum- stances, an acoustic signal as well as text messages at the top of the Control Display.

Indicator and warning lamps

Indicator and warning lamps can light up in a variety of combinations and colors.

Several of the lamps are checked for proper functioning and light up temporarily when the engine is started or the ignition is switched on.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

85

Controls overview Controls

indicates that Check Control messages have been stored. These Check Control messages can be viewed again later, refer to page 85.

Text messages Text messages at the upper edge of the Control Display explain the meaning of the displayed indicator and warning lamps.

Supplemental text messages You can call up more information on the Control Display, e.g. on the cause of a malfunction and on how to respond, via Check Control.

The text of urgent messages is displayed auto- matically.

To exit the display: Select "OK" and press the Controller.

Symbols Depending on the Check Control message, you can select from among the following functions in the supplementary text messages.

> "Service request" Contact your BMW center.

> "Roadside Assistance" Contact BMW Roadside Assistance.

Hiding Check Control messages

Press the button on the turn signal/high beam lever.

> Some Check Control messages are dis- played continuously and remain visible until the malfunction has been rectified. If several malfunctions occur at once, the messages are displayed consecutively. These messages can be hidden for approx. 8 seconds. After this, they are displayed again automatically.

They are marked with the symbol shown here.

> Other Check Control messages are hidden automatically after approx. 20 seconds. They are stored and can be displayed again later.

They are marked with the symbol shown here.

Displaying stored Check Control messages

1. Push button 1 in the turn signal/high beam lever up or down repeatedly until the appro- priate symbol appears in the display, accompanied by the words "CHECK".

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

86

Controls Controls overview

2. Press button 2. "CHECK OK" appears if there are no Check Control messages. If a Check Control mes- sage has been stored, the corresponding lamp lights up. It is accompanied by a text message on the Control Display.

3. Push button 1 to check for other messages.

4. Press button 2. The display again shows the outside temperature and the time.

Via iDrive 1. "Vehicle Info"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Check Control"

4. Select the text message.

Speed limit You can enter a speed, and a Check Control message will indicate when you reach this speed. This enables you, for example, to receive warnings if you exceed a speed limit in an urban area. You are only warned of reaching this speed a second time if your vehicle speed falls below it again by at least 3 mph/5 km/h.

Displaying, setting or changing the limit 1. "Settings"

2. "Speed"

3. "Warning at:"

4. Turn the controller until the desired speed is displayed.

5. Press the controller.

The speed limit is stored.

Applying your current speed as the limit 1. "Settings"

2. "Speed"

3. "Select current speed"

The system adopts your current speed as the limit.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

87

Controls overview Controls

Activating/deactivating the limit 1. "Settings"

2. "Speed"

3. "Warning"

4. Press the controller.

Settings on the Control Display

Language on the Control Display

Setting the language 1. "Settings"

2. "Language/Units"

3. "Language:"

4. Select the desired language.

The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Setting the voice dialog Switch between a standard dialog and a short dialog.

1. "Settings"

2. "Language/Units"

3. "Speech mode:"

4. Select the desired dialog.

The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Brightness of the Control Display The brightness is automatically adapted to the ambient lighting conditions. However, you can change the basic setting.

1. "Settings"

2. "Control display"

3. "Brightness"

4. Turn the controller until the desired setting is selected.

5. Press the controller.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use. In bright conditions, for example, the brightness control may not be clearly visible.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

88

Controls Technology for driving comfort and safety

Technology for driving comfort and safety

Vehicle equipment In this chapter, all production, country, and optional equipment that is offered in the model range is described. For this reason, descrip- tions will be given of some equipment that may not be available in a vehicle, for example due to the special options or national-market version selected. This also applies to safety related functions and systems.

Park Distance Control PDC

The concept The PDC assists you with maneuvering in tight parking spaces. Acoustic signals and a visual indicator warn you of the presence of an object behind your vehicle. Four ultrasonic sensors in the bumper measure the distance.

These sensors have a range of approx. 6.5 ft/ 2 m. However, an acoustic warning does not sound until an object is approx. 24 in/60 cm from the corner sensors or approx. 5 ft/1.50 m from the center sensors.

PDC is a parking aid that can indicate objects when they are approached

slowly, as is usually the case when parking. Avoid approaching an object at high speed; oth- erwise, physical circumstances may lead to the system warning being issued too late.<

Switching on automatically With the engine running or the ignition switched on, the system is activated after approx. second when you engage reverse gear or move the automatic transmission selector lever to position R. Wait this short period before driving.

Switching off automatically After approx. 164 ft/50 m of driving or above approx. 18 mph/30 km/h, the system switches off and the LED goes out.

Signal tones When nearing an object, its position is indicated correspondingly by an interval tone. As the dis- tance between vehicle and object decreases, the intervals between the tones become shorter. If the distance to the nearest object falls to below roughly 1 ft/30 cm, then a contin- uous tone sounds.

An interval tone is interrupted after approx. 3 seconds:

> If you stop in front of an object that has been detected by only one of the corner sensors

> If you are driving parallel to a wall

Malfunction The warning lamp lights up. A mes- sage appears on the Control Display. PDC is malfunctioning. Have the

system checked.

To avoid this problem, keep the sensors clean and free of ice or snow in order to ensure that they will continue to operate effectively. When using a high-pressure cleaner, do not spray the sensors for extended periods of time and only from a distance of at least 1 ft/30 cm.

PDC with visual warning The approach of the vehicle to an object is shown on the Control Display. Objects that are farther away are displayed on the Control Dis- play before a signal tone sounds. The display appears on the Control Display as soon as PDC is activated.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

89

Technology for driving comfort and safety Controls

System limitations Even with PDC, final responsibility for estimating the distance between the

vehicle and any obstructions always remains with the driver. Even when sensors are pro- vided, there is a blind spot in which objects can no longer be detected. The system is also sub- ject to the physical limits that apply to all forms of ultrasonic measurement, such as those encountered with trailer towbars and hitches, thin or wedge-shaped objects, etc. Low objects that have already been displayed, e.g. curbs, can disappear again from the detection area of the sensors before or after a continuous tone sounds. Higher, protruding objects, e.g. ledges, cannot be detected. Loud sound sources out- side or inside the car can drown out the PDC signal. Therefore, always drive cautiously; oth- erwise, there is a risk of personal injury or prop- erty damage.<

Driving stability control systems Your BMW has a number of systems that help to maintain the vehicle's stability even in adverse driving conditions.

Antilock Brake System ABS ABS prevents locking of the wheels during braking. Safe steering response is maintained even during full braking. Active safety is thus increased.

The ABS is operational every time you start the engine. Braking safely, refer to page 126.

Electronic brake-force distribution EBV The system controls the brake pressure in the rear wheels to ensure stable braking behavior.

Dynamic Brake Control DBC When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system automatically produces the maximum braking force boost and thus helps to achieve the short- est possible braking distance during full brak- ing. This system exploits all of the benefits provided by ABS.

Do not reduce the pressure on the brake for the duration of the full braking application.

Dynamic Stability Control DSC DSC prevents the driving wheels from losing traction when you pull away from rest or accel- erate. The system also recognizes unstable driving conditions, for example if the rear of the car is about to swerve or if momentum is acting at an angle past the front wheels. In these cases, DSC helps the vehicle maintain a safe course within physical limits by reducing engine output and through braking actions at the indi- vidual wheels.

The laws of physics cannot be repealed, even with DSC. An appropriate driving

style always remains the responsibility of the driver. Therefore, do not reduce the additional safety margin again by taking risks, as this could result in an accident.<

Deactivating DSC

Press the button for at least 3 seconds until the indicator lamp for DSC OFF lights up and DSC OFF is displayed in the instrument cluster. Dynamic Traction Control DTC and DSC have been simultaneously deactivated. Stabilizing and drive-output promoting actions are no longer executed.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

90

Controls Technology for driving comfort and safety

In the same way as with a differential interlock, even if DSC is deactivated, brake actions are still performed on the rear axle to enhance drive output if the drive wheels experience a signifi- cant loss of traction.

To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again as soon as possible.

Activating DSC Press the button again; the indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out.

For better control If the indicator lamp flashes: the DSC controls the driving and braking forces.

If the indicator lamp lights up: DSC and DTC have failed.

The indicator lamp lights up and DSC OFF is displayed in the instrument cluster: DSC is deactivated.

Dynamic Traction Control DTC DTC is a version of DSC in which the drive out- put is optimized for particular road conditions, e.g. unplowed snow-covered roads. The sys- tem assures the maximal drive output, but with reduced driving stability. It is therefore neces- sary to drive with appropriate caution.

You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC under the following special circumstances:

> When driving uphill on snow-covered roads, in slush or on unplowed, snow-covered roads

> When rocking a stuck vehicle free or start- ing off in deep snow or on loose ground

> When driving with snow chains

Activating DTC

Press the button; the indicator lamp for DSC OFF lights up and TRACTION is displayed in the instrument cluster.

For better control If the indicator lamp flashes: DTC con- trols the driving and braking forces.

If the indicator lamp lights up: DSC and DTC have failed.

The indicator lamp lights up and TRAC- TION is displayed in the instrument cluster: DTC is activated.

Deactivating DTC Press the button again; the indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out.

Drive-off assistant The drive-off assistant enables you to drive off smoothly on uphill gradients. It is not necessary to use the parking brake for this.

1. Hold the car in place by depressing the brake.

2. Release the brake and drive off without delay.

The drive-off assistant holds the car in place for approx. 2 seconds after the

brake is released. Drive off without delay after releasing the brake. Otherwise, the drive-off assistant will no longer hold the car in place after approx. 2 seconds and the car will start to roll backwards.<

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

91

Technology for driving comfort and safety Controls

Flat Tire Monitor FTM

The concept The system does not measure the actual infla- tion pressure in the tires.

The system detects a pressure loss in a tire by comparing the rotational speeds of the individ- ual wheels while moving.

In the event of a pressure loss, the diameter and therefore the rotational speed of the corre- sponding wheel change. This is detected and reported as a flat tire.

Functional requirement The system must have been initialized while the tire inflation pressure was correct; otherwise, reliable signaling of a flat tire is not ensured.

Each time a tire inflation pressure has been corrected or a wheel or tire has been changed, reinitialize the system.

System limitations Sudden serious tire damage caused by external influences cannot be indicated in

advance.<

The system will not detect a natural, uniform pressure loss in all four tires. Therefore, check the tire inflation pressure regularly.

In the following situations, the system could be delayed or malfunction:

> System has not been initialized

> Driving on snowy or slippery road surface

> Performance-oriented style of driving: slip in the drive wheels, high lateral acceleration

> Snow chains are attached

Status display The current status of the Flat Tire Monitor can be displayed on the Control Display, e.g. whether or not the FTM is active.

1. "Vehicle Info"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Flat Tire Monitor"

The status is displayed.

Initialization The initialization process adopts the set infla- tion tire pressures as reference values for the detection of a flat tire. Initialization is started by confirming the inflation pressures.

Do not initialize the system when driving with snow chains.

1. "Vehicle Info"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Reset"

4. Start the engine do not drive away.

5. Start the initialization by selecting "Reset".

6. Start driving.

The initialization is completed during driv- ing, which can be interrupted at any time.

When driving resumes, the initialization is con- tinued automatically.<

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

92

Controls Technology for driving comfort and safety

Indication of a flat tire The warning lamps come on in yellow and red. A message appears on the Control Display. In addition, a signal sounds. There is a flat tire or a major

loss in tire pressure.

1. Reduce speed and stop the vehicle with caution. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers.

If the vehicle is not equipped with run-flat tires, do not continue driving; continuing

to drive can result in serious accidents.<

When a flat tire is reported, the Dynamic Stabil- ity Control DSC is activated.

Actions in the event of a flat tire

Run-flat tires With a damaged tire, is possible to continue driving at speeds of up to 50 mph/80 km/h.

When driving with a damaged tire:

1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers.

2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

3. At the next opportunity, check the inflation pressure in all four tires.

If the inflation pressure in all four tires is cor- rect, the Flat Tire Monitor might not have been initialized. The system must then be initialized.

Possible driving distance with complete loss of tire pressure:

The distance it is possible to drive with a flat tire depends on the load and the stress on the vehicle while driving.

With an average load, it may be possible to drive for approx. 50 miles/80 km.

When driving with damaged tires, the handling characteristics change, e.g. the vehicle will skid sooner when braking, braking distances will be longer, or self-steering response will change.

Adapt your driving style accordingly. Avoid turning abruptly and driving over obstacles such as curbs, potholes, etc.

Since the possible driving distance depends to a considerable degree on the strain exerted on the vehicle while driving, it can be shorter or, with a gentle driving style, can also be longer, depending on the speed, road condition, out- side temperature, vehicle load, etc.

Drive cautiously and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

When there is a tire pressure loss, the handling characteristics change, e.g. there will be reduced directional stability during braking, braking distances will be longer, and self- steering response will change.<

Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indicate final failure of the tire. Reduce

your speed and bring the vehicle to a stop; oth- erwise, tire components may become detached, which could result in an accident. Do not continue driving; instead, contact your BMW center.<

Tire Pressure Monitor TPM

The concept Check the inflation pressure in the four installed tires. The system notifies you if there is a signif- icant loss of pressure in one or more tires.

Functional requirement The system must have been reset while the inflation pressure was correct; otherwise, reli- able signaling of a flat tire is not ensured. Always use wheels with TPM electronics to ensure that the system will operate properly. Each time a tire inflation pressure has been corrected or a wheel or tire has been changed, reset the system.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

93

Technology for driving comfort and safety Controls

System limitations Sudden serious tire damage caused by external influences cannot be indicated in

advance.<

The system does not function correctly if it has not been reset. For example, a flat tire may be indicated even though the tire inflation pres- sures are correct.

The system is inactive and cannot indicate a flat tire:

> When a wheel without TPM electronics is installed.

> Interference with TPM by other systems or devices with the same transmission frequency.

Status display The current status of the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM can be displayed on the Control Display, e.g., whether or not the TPM is active.

1. "Vehicle Info"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM"

The status is displayed.

Status indicator on the Control Display The color of the tires represents the status of the tires and the system.

A change in the tire inflation pressure during driving is taken into account.

A correction is only required when this is indicated by the TPM.

Green wheels The inflation pressure corresponds to the desired state.

"TPM active" appears in the Control Display.

One wheel yellow There is a flat tire or substantial loss of tire pres- sure in the indicated tire.

All wheels yellow > There is a flat tire or substantial loss of tire

pressure in several tires.

> The system was not reset after a wheel change and thus issues a warning based on the inflation pressures initialized last.

Gray wheels The system cannot detect a puncture.

Reasons for this may be:

> TPM is being reset.

> Interference from systems or devices that use the same radio frequency.

> Malfunction.

Resetting the system Each time a tire inflation pressure has been cor- rected or a wheel or tire has been changed, reset the system.

1. "Vehicle Info"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Reset"

4. Start the engine do not drive away.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

94

Controls Technology for driving comfort and safety

5. Reset the inflation pressure by selecting "Reset".

6. Start driving.

The tires are shown in gray and "Resetting TPM..." is displayed.

After driving a few minutes, the set inflation pressures in the tires are accepted as the target values to be monitored. The resetting process is completed automatically as you drive. On the Control Display, the wheels are shown in green and "Status: TPM active" is displayed.

The trip can be interrupted at any time. When driving resumes, resetting continues automati- cally.

If a flat tire is detected while the system is resetting, all tires on the Control Display

are displayed in yellow. The message "Low tire!" is displayed.<

Message for low tire inflation pressure The warning lamps light up in yellow and red. A message appears on the Control Display. In addition, a signal sounds.

> There is a flat tire or substantial loss of tire pressure in the indicated wheel.

> The system was not reset after a wheel change and thus issues a warning based on the inflation pressures initialized last.

Reduce speed and stop the vehicle with caution. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers.

If the vehicle is not equipped with run-flat tires, do not continue driving; continuing

to drive can result in serious accidents.<

When a low tire pressure is reported, the Dynamic Stability Control DSC is activated.

Actions in the event of a flat tire

Run-flat tires You can continue driving with a damaged tire at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.

When driving with a damaged tire:

1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers.

2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

3. At the next opportunity, check the inflation pressure in all four tires.

If the inflation pressure is correct in all four tires, then the Tire Pressure Monitor may not have been reset. The system must then be reset.

Possible driving distance with complete loss of tire pressure:

The distance it is possible to drive with a flat tire depends on the load and the stress on the vehi- cle while driving.

With an average load, it may be possible to drive for approx. 50 miles/80 km.

When driving with damaged tires, the handling characteristics change, e.g. the vehicle will skid sooner when braking, braking distances will be longer, or self-steering response will change. Adapt your driving style accordingly. Avoid turning abruptly and driving over obstacles such as curbs, potholes, etc.

Since the possible driving distance depends to a considerable degree on the strain exerted on the vehicle while driving, it can be shorter or, with a gentle driving style, can also be longer, depending on the speed, road condition, out- side temperature, vehicle load, etc.

Drive cautiously and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

When there is a tire pressure loss, the handling characteristics change, e.g. there will be reduced directional stability during braking, braking distances will be longer, and self-steer- ing response will change.<

Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indicate complete failure of the tire.

Reduce your speed and bring the vehicle to a stop; otherwise, tire components may become detached, which could result in an accident. Do not continue driving; instead, contact your BMW center.<

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

95

Technology for driving comfort and safety Controls

Message for unsuccessful system reset

Yellow warning lamp lights up. A message appears on the Control Display.

The system has detected a wheel change, but was not reset. A reliable warning is not possible at the current inflation pressures.

Check the tire inflation pressure and reset the system, refer to page 93.

Malfunction The small warning lamp flashes in yellow and then lights up continu- ously; the large warning lamp lights up in yellow. The tires appear in gray

in the Control Display. No punctures can be detected.

Display in the following situations:

> A wheel without TPM electronics has been installed: Have it checked by your BMW center.

> Malfunction Have the system checked

> Tire Pressure Monitor was unable to complete the resetting process. Reset the system again.

The small warning lamp flashes in yellow and then lights up continu- ously; the large warning lamp lights up in yellow. The tires appear in gray

in the Control Display.

Display in the following situations:

Interference from systems or devices that use the same radio frequency. The system auto- matically becomes active again when the vehi- cle moves out of the interference zone.

Declaration according to NHTSA/ FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring Systems Each tire should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recom- mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the

vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire infla- tion pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires. As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring sys- tem, TPMS, that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires are signif- icantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle's han- dling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte- nance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if underin- flation has not reached the level to trigger illumi- nation of the TPMS low tire pressure indicator.

The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the sys- tem detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously lit. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle startups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

96

Controls Technology for driving comfort and safety

Active steering

The concept Active steering varies the turning angle of the front wheels in relation to steering wheel move- ments. It also varies the steering force required to turn the wheels depending on the speed at which you are driving.

When you are driving in the low speed range, e.g. in a town or when parking, the steering angle is increased, i.e. steering becomes very direct and less effort is required to turn the wheels. In the higher speed range, on the other hand, the steering angle is reduced as the speed increases. This improves the handling of your BMW over the entire speed range.

In critical situations, the system can make tar- geted corrections to the steering angle pro- vided by the driver and thus stabilize the vehicle before the driver intervenes. This stabilizing intervention is simultaneously deactivated when DSC is switched off, refer to page 89.

Malfunction The warning lamps come on. Active steering is malfunctioning or is tem- porarily deactivated. At low speeds, greater steering wheel movements

are required, whereas at higher speeds the vehicle reacts more sensitively to steering wheel movements. The stability-enhancing feature may also be deactivated. Drive cau- tiously and think well ahead.

Deactivation Active steering is deactivated to perform an ini- tialization. A message indicates that the feature is deactivated. Initialization may take several minutes.

If the message does not disappear during the current trip, have the system checked.

Defect If there is a defect, a corresponding text mes- sage appears. Have the system checked.

Servotronic

The concept The Servotronic varies the steering force required to turn the wheels relative to the vehicle speed. At low speeds, the steering force is strongly assisted, i.e. less force is needed for steering. As the vehicle speed increases, the steering assisting power is reduced.

This system functions automatically.

Malfunctions The warning lamp lights up. A mes- sage appears on the Control Display. Servotronic is malfunctioning or has

failed. Steering response will be different. You can continue your journey, but moderate your speed and exercise due caution. Have the system checked as soon as possible.

Brake Force Display

On the left: normal braking. On the right: sharp braking.

When the rear fog lamps are switched on, the Brake Force Display is not active and the illumi- nated area for normal braking is reduced by approximately half.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

97

Technology for driving comfort and safety Controls

Airbags

The following airbags are located under the marked covers:

1 Front airbags

2 Coupe: head airbags

3 Side airbags in the seat backrests

4 Convertible: knee airbags

Protective action Observe the adjustment instructions on page 49 to ensure the best possible

personal protection.<

The front airbags help protect the driver and front passenger by responding to frontal impacts in which safety belts alone cannot pro- vide adequate restraint. When needed, the head and side airbags help provide protection in the event of side impact. The relevant side air- bag supports the side upper body area. The head air bag supports the head.

The airbags have been designed to not be trig- gered in every collision situation, e.g. not in minor accidents or rear-end collisions.

Do not apply adhesive materials to the cover panels of the airbags, cover them or

modify them in any other way. Keep the dashboard and window on the front passenger side clear, i.e., do not cover with adhesive labels or coverings, and do not attach holders such as for navigation instruments and mobile phones. Do not attach seat covers, cushions or other objects not specifically approved for seats with integral side airbags to the front seats. Do not hang items of clothing such as coats or jackets

over the backrests. Do not attempt to remove the airbag retention system from the vehicle. Do not modify the individual components of the system or its wiring in any way. This includes the upholstered covers on the steering wheel, instrument panel, seats and roof posts, as well as the sides of the roof lining. Do not attempt to remove or dismantle the steering wheel. Do not touch the individual components imme- diately after the system has been triggered, because there is a danger of burns. In the event of faults, immobilization, or after the airbag system has been triggered, only have the testing, repair, or disassembly and scrapping of gas generator performed by your BMW center or a workshop that has the required explosives licenses. Unprofessional attempts to work on the system could lead to failure in an emer- gency or to undesired airbag activation, either of which could result in personal injury.<

Warning notices and information about the airbags can also be found on the sun visors.

Automatic deactivation of the front passenger airbags An analysis of the impression in the front pas- senger seat cushion determines whether and how the seat is occupied. The front and side air- bags for the front passenger are activated or deactivated by the system accordingly.

The indicator lamp above the interior rearview mirror shows the current status

of the front passenger airbags, deactivated or activated, refer to Status of front passenger airbags below.<

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

98

Controls Technology for driving comfort and safety

Before transporting a child on the front passenger seat, read the safety precau-

tions and handling instructions under Trans- porting children safely, refer to page 58. The front and side airbags can also be deacti- vated by adolescents and adults sitting in cer- tain positions; the indicator lamp for the front passenger airbags lights up. In such cases, the passenger should change his or her sitting position so that the front passenger airbags are activated and the indicator lamp goes out. If the desired airbag status cannot be achieved by changing the sitting position, transport the rele- vant passenger on a rear seat. Do not attach seat covers, seat cushion padding, ball mats or other items to the front passenger seat unless they are specifically recommended by BMW. Do not place any items under the seat which could press against the seat from below. Other- wise, a correct analysis of the seat cushion is not ensured.<

Status of front passenger airbags

The indicator lamp for the front passenger air- bags shows the functional status of the front passenger front and side airbags in accordance with whether and how the front passenger seat is occupied. The indicator lamp shows whether the front passenger airbags are activated or deactivated.

> The indicator lamp lights up when a child in a specially designated child restraint sys- tem is detected, as intended, on the seat. The front and side airbags for the front passenger are not activated.

Most child seats are detected by the system. This particularly applies to

child seats that were required by NHTSA at the time of manufacture of the vehicle. After mounting a child seat, ensure that the indi- cator lamp for the front passenger airbag is lit. It indicates that the child seat has been detected and that the front passenger air- bags are deactivated.<

> The indicator lamp does not come on when, for example, a person of sufficient size and in a correct sitting position is detected on the seat. The front and side airbags for the front passenger are activated.

> The indicator lamp does not light up if the seat is empty. The front and side airbags for the front passenger are not activated.

Operational readiness of airbag system

As of radio readiness, refer to page 61, the warning lamp lights up briefly to indicate that the entire airbag system and the belt tensioners are operational.

Airbag system malfunction > Warning lamp does not light up at radio

readiness or beyond.

> Warning lamp remains permanently on.

In the event of a fault in the airbag system, have it checked without delay; otherwise,

there is the risk that the system will not function as intended even if a sufficiently severe acci- dent occurs.<

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

99

Technology for driving comfort and safety Controls

Convertible: rollover protection system The rollover protection system is activated automatically in the event of an accident of suf- ficient severity or an extreme tilt in the car's lon- gitudinal axis. The protection bars behind the rear head restraints deploy within fractions of a second.

As a supplementary system to the reinforced windshield frame, the rollover protection system increases the safety of the vehicle occupants.

Always keep the area of movement of the rollover protection system clear.

In minor accidents, you are protected by the fastened safety belt and, depending on acci- dent severity, by the safety belt tensioner and multi-phase airbag retention system.<

Resetting If the rollover protection system was not impacted after being automatically activated, it can be reset by lowering the protection bars to their original positions. This does not require tools.

1. Push the locking lever to one side and hold it there.

2. Push the protection bar halfway down from above.

3. Release the locking lever.

4. Push the protection bar down until it snaps into place.

5. Repeat the procedure for the other protec- tion bar.

Have the rollover protection system checked after an unexpected activation.

If the rollover protective system is extended, do not operate the convertible

top. Do not make any modifications to the individual components of the rollover protection system or its cabling. Work on the rollover protection system should be performed only by your BMW center. Faulty repair may lead to the failure of the sys- tem or malfunctions. To check the system and ensure flawless long- term operation, always observe the service intervals, refer to page 80.<

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

100

Controls Lamps

Lamps

Vehicle equipment In this chapter, all production, country, and optional equipment that is offered in the model range is described. For this reason, descrip- tions will be given of some equipment that may not be available in a vehicle, for example due to the special options or national-market version selected. This also applies to safety related functions and systems.

Overview

0 Lamps off, daytime running lights

1 Parking lamps and daytime running lights

2 Low beams, welcome lamps

3 Automatic headlamp control, daytime run- ning lights, welcome lamps, High-beam Assistant, Adaptive Light Control

Parking lamps/low beams, automatic headlamp control

General information When the driver's door is opened with ignition switched off, then the exterior lighting is auto- matically switched off if the light switch is in position 0, 2, or 3.

Parking lamps In switch position 1, the front, rear and side vehicle lighting is switched on. You can use the parking lamps for parking.

With halogen headlamps: when the ignition is switched off and the switch is in position 1, only the outside sections of the rear lamps are illumi- nated, refer to page 246.

The parking lamps will discharge the bat- tery. Therefore, do not leave them on for

unduly long periods of time; otherwise, the bat- tery might not have enough power to start the engine. It is preferable to switch on the left- hand or right-hand roadside parking lamps, refer to page 102.<

Low-beam headlamps The low beams light up when the light switch is in position 2 and the ignition is on.

Automatic headlamp control When the switch is in position 3, the low beams are switched on and off automatically depend- ing on ambient lighting conditions, e.g. in a tun- nel, in twilight, or if there is precipitation. The Adaptive Light Control is active. The LED next to the symbol is illuminated when the low beams are on. You can also activate the daytime running lights, refer to page 101. In the situa- tions described above, the lamps then automat- ically switch from daytime running lights to low beams.

The headlamps may also come on when the sun is sitting low on a blue sky.

The low beams remain switched on inde- pendent of the ambient lighting condi-

tions when you switch on the fog lamps.<

The automatic headlamp control cannot serve as a substitute for your personal

judgment in determining when the lamps should be switched on in response to ambient

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

101

Lamps Controls

lighting conditions. For example, the system cannot detect fog or hazy weather. To avoid safety risks, you should always switch on the low-beam headlamps manually under these conditions.<

Welcome lamps If you leave the light switch in position 2 or 3 when you park the car, the parking lamps and the interior lamps light up briefly when you unlock the vehicle.

Activating/deactivating welcome lamps 1. "Settings"

2. "Lighting"

3. "Welcome light"

The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Pathway lighting If the headlamp flasher is activated after switch- ing off the ignition with the lamps switched off, the low beams come on and remain on for a certain time.

Setting duration 1. "Settings"

2. "Lighting"

3. "Pathway light.:"

4. Set the duration.

The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Daytime running lights The daytime running lights light up in switch position 0, 1, and 3. They output less light than the low beams.

The tail lamps may also light up.

Activating/deactivating daytime running lights 1. "Settings"

2. "Lighting"

3. "Daytime running lamps"

The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Adaptive Light Control

The concept Adaptive Light Control is a variable headlamp control system that enables better illumination of the road surface. Depending on the steering

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

102

Controls Lamps

angle and other parameters, the light from the headlamp follows the course of the road.

In tight curves such as on switchbacks or when turning, at speeds up to approx. 40 mph/ 70 km/h, an additional, cornering light is switched on that lights up the area inside the curve.

Activating Adaptive Light Control With the ignition switched on, turn the light switch to position 3, refer to page 100.

The corner-illuminating lamp is switched on automatically, depending on the steering wheel angle or turn signal indicator.

Standstill function: to avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the Adaptive Light Control does not direct light toward the driver's side when the vehicle is at a standstill.

When you are reversing, only the corner-illumi- nating lamps are switched on and active on both sides.

Malfunction The warning lamp lights up. A mes- sage appears on the Control Display. The Adaptive Light Control is mal-

functioning or failed. Have the system checked as soon as possible.

High beams/roadside parking lamps

1 High beams

2 Headlamp flasher

3 Roadside parking lamps

Roadside parking lamps, left or right There is an additional option of switching on the lamps on the side of the car facing the road when parked.

Switching on After parking the vehicle, press the lever up or down beyond the pressure point for approx. 1 second, arrow 3.

The roadside parking lamps drain the bat- tery. Therefore, do not leave them on for

unduly long periods of time; otherwise, the bat- tery might not have enough power to start the engine.<

Switching off Press the lever in the opposite direction to the pressure point, arrow 3.

High-beam Assistant

The concept This system automatically switches the high beams on and off. The procedure is controlled by a sensor on the front of the interior rearview mirror. The assistant ensures that the high beams are switched on whenever the traffic sit- uation allows. It handles this task for you and gives you the benefit of the best possible view. You can intervene at any time and switch the high beams on and off as usual.

Activating the system 1. Turn the light switch to position 3, refer to

page 100.

2. With the low beams switched on, briefly push the turn signal/high beam lever in the direction of the high beam.

The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the high beams are activated. The system automati-

cally switches from high beams to low beams

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

103

Lamps Controls

and vice versa in response to oncoming traffic, traffic ahead of you, and adequate ambient lighting, e.g. on city streets.

Switching the high beams on and off manually Whenever you wish, or when the situation requires, you can intervene:

> If the High-beam Assistant switches on the high beams, but you would like to drive with the low beams, simply switch off the high beams using the turn signal/high beam lever. This deactivates the High-beam Assistant. To reactivate the system, briefly push the turn signal/high beam lever toward the high beams again.

> If the High-beam Assistant switches on the low beams, but you would like to drive with the high beams, switch on the high beams as usual. This deactivates the system and the high beams need to be switched off manually, if necessary. To reactivate the system, briefly push the turn signal/high beam lever toward the high beams again.

> Use the headlamp flasher as usual with the low beams switched on.

System limitations The High-beam Assistant cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal

judgment of when to use the high beams. Therefore, manually switch off the high beams in situations where this is required to avoid a safety risk.<

The system is not fully functional in situations such as the following, and driver intervention may be necessary:

> In very unfavorable weather conditions, such as fog or heavy precipitation

> In detecting poorly-lit road users, such as pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders and wagons; when driving close to train or ship traffic; and at animal crossings

> In tight curves, on hilltops or in depressions, in cross traffic or half-obscured oncoming traffic on highways

> In poorly lit towns and cities and in the presence of highly reflective signs

> At low speeds

> When the windshield in front of the interior rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov- ered with stickers, etc.

> If the sensor is dirty. Clean the sensor on the front of the interior rearview mirror using a cloth moistened with a small amount of glass cleaner.

Activating via iDrive 1. "Settings"

2. "Lighting"

3. "High beam assistant"

The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Fog lamps

To switch on/off, press the button.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

104

Controls Lamps

The parking lamps or low beams must be switched on for the fog lamps to operate. The green indicator lamp in

the instrument cluster lights up whenever the fog lamps are on.

The fog lamps are switched off while you acti- vate the headlamp flasher or switch on the high beams.

If the automatic headlamp control is acti- vated, the low beams will come on auto-

matically when you switch on the fog lamps.<

Instrument lighting You can adjust the brightness of the instrument lighting only when the parking lamps or the low beams are switched on.

1. Push button 1 in the turn signal/high beam lever up or down repeatedly until the appro- priate symbol appears in the display, accompanied by the brightness level and the word "SET".

2. Press button 2.

3. Push button 1 up or down to select the desired brightness level.

4. Press button 2. The display again shows the outside temperature and the time.

Interior lamps The interior lamps, the footwell lamps, entry lamps, trunk lamp, and courtesy lamps are controlled automatically.

The LEDs for the courtesy lamps are set in the door handles and illuminate the ground in front of the doors.

To reduce the drain on the battery, a few minutes after the radio readiness is

switched off, refer to Start/Stop button on page 61, all lights in the vehicle's passenger compartment are switched off.<

Switching interior lamps on/off manually

Interior lamps, front and rear: To switch on and off, press the button.

To switch off the interior lamps, footwell lamps, entry lamps, and courtesy lamps permanently, press the button for the front interior lamps for about 3 seconds.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

105

Lamps Controls

Reading lamps

There are reading lamps at the front and rear, next to the interior lights. To switch on and off, press the button.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

106

Controls Climate

Climate

Vehicle equipment In this chapter, all production, country, and optional equipment that is offered in the model range is described. For this reason, descrip-

tions will be given of some equipment that may not be available in a vehicle, for example due to the special options or national-market version selected. This also applies to safety related functions and systems.

Overview

1 Airflow directed toward the windshield and side windows

2 Air to the upper body area: Draft-free ventilation 109

3 Air to the footwell

4 Air distribution, manual

5 Temperature, left side

6 Maximum cooling

7 AUTO program

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

107

Climate Controls

8 Air volume, manual adjustment; AUTO intensity

9 Display

10 Automatic recirculated air control AUC/ Recirculated air mode

11 Temperature, right side

12 ALL program

13 Defrosting windows and removing condensation

14 Switching air conditioning on/off manually

15 Rear window defroster

16 Seat heating, right side 54

17 Interior temperature sensor, please keep clear

18 Seat heating, left side 54

Automatic climate control

Comfortable interior climate AUTO program 7 offers the ideal air distribution and air volume for almost all conditions, refer to AUTO program below. All you need to do is select an interior temperature which is comfort- able for you.

The following sections inform you in detail about how to adjust the settings.

Most settings are stored for the remote control currently in use, refer also to Personal Profile settings on page 33.

Adjusting air distribution manually The air distribution can be switched on and off manually. The air is directed to the windshield, to the upper body area and to the

footwell.

The automatic air distribution can be switched back on by pressing the AUTO button. The air conditioning is switched on automatically and the manual air distribution setting is cleared.

Temperature Turn to set the desired tempera- ture.

The automatic climate control achieves this temperature as

quickly as possible regardless of the season, using maximum cooling or heating power if necessary, and then maintains it.

Avoid rapid switching between different tem- perature settings. The automatic climate con- trol will not have sufficient time to adjust the set temperature.

Maximum heating power can be obtained with the highest setting, regardless of the outside temperature.

The system cools steadily in the lowest setting, regardless of the outside temperature.

Maximum cooling Press the button. The system is set to the lowest temperature, maximum air volume and recirculated air mode.

Air flows out of the vent outlets for the upper body region. Open them for this purpose.

Air is cooled as quickly as possible

> Above an outside temperature of approx. 327/06

> When the engine is running

AUTO program Press the button.

Air volume, air distribution and temperature are controlled auto-

matically.

Depending on the selected temperature, AUTO intensity and outside influences, the air is directed toward the windshield, the side windows, the upper body and the footwell.

Pressing the AUTO button automatically switches on the air conditioning.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

108

Controls Climate

At the same time, a condensation sensor controls the program so as to prevent window condensation as much as possible.

The program is switched off when the air distri- bution is set manually or the button is pressed again.

Intensity of the AUTO program With the AUTO program switched on, auto- matic control of the air volume and air distribution can be adjusted:

Press the left side of the button to reduce the intensity. Press the right side of the button to

increase it.

The selected intensity is shown on the display of the automatic climate control.

Convertible Program The Convertible Program is active when the convertible top is open and the AUTO program is switched on. During the Convertible Program, the automatic climate control is optimized for driving with the soft top down. In addition, the air volume is increased as vehicle speed increases.

The effectiveness of the Convertible Program can be enhanced considerably

by installing the wind deflector.<

Adjusting air volume manually To be able to manually adjust the air volume, switch off the AUTO program first.

Press the left side of the button to reduce the air volume. Press the right side of the button to

increase it.

The air flow rate is lowered or switched off entirely to reduce the drain on the battery. The display remains the same.

Automatic recirculated air control AUC/Recirculated air mode You can respond to unpleasant odors or pollut- ants in the immediate environment by tempo- rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The system then recirculates the air currently within the vehicle.

Press the button repeatedly to select an operating mode:

> LED off: outside air flows in continuously.

> Left-hand LED on, AUC mode: a sensor detects pollutants in the outside air and controls the shut-off automatically.

> Right-hand LED on, recirculated air mode: the supply of outside air is permanently shut off. If the windows fog over, switch off recirculated air mode and increase the air volume, if necessary. Make sure that air can flow onto the windshield.

The recirculated air mode should not be used continuously for lengthy periods;

otherwise, the quality of the air inside the car will gradually deteriorate.<

Via the button on the steering wheel You can switch quickly between the recircu- lated air mode and the previous mode using a button on the steering wheel, refer to page 13.

ALL program Press the button.

The current temperature setting on the driver's side is transferred to the front passenger side.

If the temperature setting on the driver's side is changed, the temperature on the front passen- ger side is changed as well.

The program is switched off when the setting is adjusted on the front passenger side or the button is pressed again.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

109

Climate Controls

Defrosting windows and removing condensation

Press the button.

Quickly removes ice and conden- sation from the windshield and

front side windows. For this purpose, also switch on the air conditioning.

Switching air conditioning on/off The passenger compartment can only be cooled while the engine is running.

Press the button.

The air is cooled and dehumidified and depending on the tempera-

ture setting warmed again.

Depending on the weather, the windshield may fog up briefly when the engine is started.

Pressing the AUTO button automatically switches on the air conditioning.

Rear window defroster Press the button.

The defroster is switched off auto- matically after a certain time.

Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the upper wires serve as an antenna and are not part of the rear window defroster.

Switching the system on/off

Switching off Press and hold the left button or press the left button at the lowest level.

All displays are cleared except for the rear window defroster if it is switched on.

The outside air supply is blocked when the automatic climate control is switched

off. If the air quality deteriorates or the window fogs over, switch the system back on and increase the air volume.<

Switching on Press any button, except the buttons for the ALL program or the rear window defroster.

Ventilation

1 Use the thumbwheels to smoothly open and close the air vents

2 Use the levers to change the direction of the airflow

Ventilation for cooling Adjust the vent outlets to direct the flow of cool air in your direction, e.g. if it has become too hot in the car.

Draft-free ventilation Set the vent outlets so that the air flows past you and not straight at you.

Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter The microfilter traps dust and pollen in the incoming air. The activated-charcoal filter pro- vides additional protection by filtering gaseous pollutants from the outside air. Your BMW cen- ter replaces this combined filter during routine maintenance.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

110

Controls Climate

Parked car ventilation

The concept The parked car ventilation provides ventilation to the passenger compartment and lowers its temperature, if necessary.

For any outside temperature, the system can be switched on or off directly or via a preset switch-on time. It will remain on for 30 minutes.

Due to its high power consumption, the parked car ventilation system should not be switched on twice in a row without driving in between to allow the battery to recharge.

Open the vents so that air can flow out.

They can be operated via iDrive.

Switching on and off directly 1. "Settings"

2. "Climate"

3. "Activate parked-car vent."

The symbol on the automatic climate control display flashes.

Preselecting switch-on times 1. "Settings"

2. "Climate"

3. "Activate Timer 1" or "Activate Timer 2"

4. "Timer 1:" or "Timer 2:"

5. Turn the controller: set the hours.

6. Press the controller: the setting is accepted.

7. Turn the controller: set the minutes.

8. Press the controller: the setting is accepted.

The symbol on the automatic climate Control Display lights up.

The symbol on the automatic climate Control Display flashes when the system has switched on.

The respective system is switched on within the next 24 hours only. After these

have elapsed, it must be reactivated.<

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

111

Practical interior accessories Controls

Practical interior accessories

Vehicle equipment In this chapter, all production, country, and optional equipment that is offered in the model range is described. For this reason, descrip- tions will be given of some equipment that may not be available in a vehicle, for example due to the special options or national-market version selected. This also applies to safety related functions and systems.

Integrated universal remote control

The concept The Integrated universal remote control can be used to operate up to 3 functions of remote- controlled devices such as garage door open- ers or lighting systems. The Integrated univer- sal remote control thus replaces as many as three different hand-held transmitters. To oper- ate them, the buttons on the interior rearview mirror must be programmed with the desired functions. Programming requires the hand-held transmitter for the respective device.

To prevent possible damage or injury, before programming or using the inte-

grated universal remote control to operate a device, always inspect the immediate area to make certain that no people, animals or objects are within the pivoting or travel range of the device being operated.

Also follow the safety instructions supplied with the hand-held transmitter.<

For security reasons, make sure to delete the stored functions before selling the vehicle, refer to page 113.

Compatibility If this symbol appears on the package or in the instructions supplied with the device to be operated, you can gener-

ally assume that the device is compatible with the Integrated universal remote control.

For additional questions, please consult:

> Your BMW center.

> www.homelink.com on the Internet.

HomeLink is a registered trademark of Johnson Controls, Inc.

Controls on the interior rearview mirror

1 LED

2 Buttons

3 Hand-held transmitter, required for programming.

Programming

General information 1. Switch on the ignition.

2. Initial operation: Simultaneously hold down the right and left buttons on the inside mirror for approx. 20 seconds until the LED on the inside mirror flashes.

All programs of the buttons on the rearview mirror are deleted.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

112

Controls Practical interior accessories

3. Hold the hand-held transmitter of the device to be controlled about 1 in/2.5 cm to 3 in/8 cm away from the buttons on the inside mirror.

The required distance depends on the hand-held transmitter.

4. Simultaneously press and hold the button of the desired function on the hand-held transmitter and the button to be pro- grammed on the inside mirror.

The LED on the inside mirror will flash slowly at first.

5. As soon as the LED flashes rapidly, release both buttons. The rapid flashing indicates that the button on the inside mirror has been programmed.

If the LED does not flash rapidly within 60 seconds, change the distance between the inside mirror and the hand-held trans- mitter and repeat this step. This may require several attempts. Allow at least 15 seconds between attempts.

6. To program additional functions on the other buttons of the inside mirror, repeat steps 3 through 5.

The buttons on the inside mirror can be used to operate the devices if the ignition is switched on.

Special procedure with alternating- code systems If the device fails to function even after repeated programming, check whether the device to be controlled uses an alternating-code system.

To do so, either read the instructions for the device or hold down the programmed button on the inside mirror. If the LED on the inside mirror flashes quickly at first and then remains lit for 2 seconds, the device uses an alternating-code system. The LED flashes and lights up repeat- edly for approx. 20 seconds.

In devices with an alternating-code system, the Integrated universal remote control and the device must also be synchronized.

For information about synchronizing can also be found in the operating instructions for the device to be set.

Programming will be easier with the aid of a second person.

Synchronizing:

1. Park your vehicle within the range of the remote-controlled device.

2. Program the Integrated universal remote control as described above.

3. Locate and press the synchronization button on the device to be set. You have approx. 30 seconds to perform the next step.

4. Hold down the programmed button on the inside mirror for approx. 3 seconds and then release it. Repeat this operation, up to three times if necessary, to complete the syn- chronization. If the synchronization has succeeded, the programmed function is performed.

Reprogramming individual buttons 1. Switch on the ignition.

2. Hold the hand-held transmitter of the device to be controlled about 1 in/2.5 cm to 3 in/8 cm away from the buttons on the inside mirror.

The required distance depends on the hand-held transmitter.

3. Press the desired button on the inside mirror.

4. If the LED on the inside mirror flashes slowly after approx. 20 seconds, press the transmit key of the hand-held transmitter.

5. As soon as the LED flashes rapidly, release both buttons.

If the LED does not flash rapidly after approx. 60 seconds, alter the distance and repeat the step.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

113

Practical interior accessories Controls

Canada: if the LED does not flash rapidly after approx. 60 seconds, alter the distance and repeat this step or, if the programming by means of the hand-held transmitter was interrupted, hold down the button on the inside mirror and then press and release the button on the hand-held transmitter several times, holding it down for 2 seconds each time.

Operation To prevent possible damage or injury, before programming or using the inte-

grated universal remote control to operate a device, always inspect the immediate area to make certain that no people, animals or objects are within the pivoting or travel range of the device being operated.

Also follow the safety instructions supplied with the hand-held transmitter.<

The button on the inside mirror can be used to operate the device, for example the garage door, if the engine is running or the ignition is switched on. To do so, within the reception range of the device, press the button of the device until the function is triggered. The LED on the inside mirror remains lit during transmis- sion of the radio signal.

Deleting stored functions Simultaneously hold down the right and left buttons on the inside mirror for approx. 20 sec- onds until the LED on the inside mirror flashes rapidly. All stored functions are deleted. The functions cannot be deleted individually.

Digital compass

1 Adjustment button

2 Display

The display shows you the main or secondary compass direction in which you are driving.

Operating principle You can call up various functions by pressing the adjustment button with a pointed object such as a pen or similar item. The following adjustment options are displayed one after the other, depending on how long you keep the adjustment button pressed:

> Press briefly: switch display on/off

> 3 to 6 seconds: set compass zone

> 6 to 9 seconds: calibrate compass

> 9 to 12 seconds: set left-hand/right-hand steering

> 12 to 15 seconds: setting the language

Setting compass zones Set the compass zone corresponding to your vehicle's geographic location so that the com- pass can function correctly; refer to the world map with compass zones.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

114

Controls Practical interior accessories

To set the compass zones, press the setting button for approx. 3-4 seconds. The number of the compass zone set is shown in the display.

To change the zone setting, briefly press the adjustment button repeatedly until the display shows the number of the compass zone corre- sponding to your current location.

The compass is operational again after approx. 10 seconds.

Calibrating the digital compass The digital compass must be calibrated in the following situations:

> An incorrect compass direction is shown.

> The compass direction shown does not change although the direction of travel does.

> Not all compass directions are shown.

Procedure 1. Make sure that no large metal objects or

overhead power lines are in the vicinity of your vehicle and that you have enough space to drive in a circle.

2. Set the currently valid compass zone.

3. Convertible: ensure that the convertible top is fully closed.

4. Press the setting button approx. 6-7 seconds to call up C. Then drive in a complete circle at least once at a maximum speed of 4 mph/7 km/h. If the calibration is successful, display C is replaced with the points of the compass.

5. Convertible: open the convertible top fully and repeat step 4.

Setting right-hand/left-hand steering Your digital compass is factory-set to right- hand or left-hand steering, in accordance with your vehicle.

Setting the language You can set the language of the display:

Press the setting button for approx. 12-13 seconds. Briefly press the adjustment button again to switch between English, "E", and German, "O".

The setting is automatically saved after approx. 10 seconds.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

115

Practical interior accessories Controls

Glove compartment

Opening

Pull the handle. The light in the glove compartment comes on.

To prevent injury in the event of an acci- dent while the vehicle is being driven,

close the glove compartment immediately after use.<

Closing Fold the cover up.

Locking To lock the glove compartment, use the integrated key of the remote control, refer to page 32.

USB interface for data transmission

Port for importing and exporting data on USB devices, e.g. music collections, refer to page 173.

Observe the following when connecting:

> Do not forcibly connect the plug to the USB interface.

> Do not connect devices such as fans or lamps to the USB interface.

> Do not connect USB hard discs.

> Do not use the USB interface to recharge external devices.

Center armrest

Storage compartment The center armrest between the front seats contains a credit card holder and, depending on the equipment version, a compartment or a snap-in adapter.

Opening Press the button, see arrow.

Connection for external audio device You can connect an external audio device such as a CD or MP3 player and play audio tracks over the vehicle speakers:

> AUX-IN port, refer to page 177.

> USB audio interface/extended connectivity of the music player in the mobile phone, refer to page 178.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

116

Controls Practical interior accessories

Storage compartments inside the vehicle Compartments are located next to the steering column, on the doors, in the center console, and in the rear between the seats.

Do not place unsecured objects in them; otherwise, they could endanger the car's

occupants, e.g. in the event of braking or evasive maneuvers.<

Do not place non-slip pads, e.g. anti-slip mats, on the dashboard; the materials of

these pads may damage it.<

Coupe: clothes hooks There are clothes hooks in the rear.

Items of clothing hung from the hooks must not obstruct the driver's view. Do

not hang heavy objects from the hooks; other- wise, they could endanger the car's occupants, e.g. in case of heavy braking or sudden swerving.<

Cupholders Use lightweight and shatterproof contain- ers and do not transport hot beverages;

otherwise, there is an increased risk of injury in the event of the accident. Do not force contain- ers that are too large into the cupholders; other- wise, damage could result.<

There is one cupholder in the center console.

You can mount an attachable cupholder on the side of the center console.

Ashtray

Opening

Push the ridge on the cover.

Emptying

Lift out the insert.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

117

Practical interior accessories Controls

Lighter

With the engine running or the ignition switched on, press in the cigarette lighter.

The lighter can be pulled out as soon as it pops back out.

Hold or touch the hot cigarette lighter by the knob only. Holding or touching it in

other areas could result in burns. When leaving the car, always switch off the ignition and remove the remote control so that children cannot operate the cigarette lighter and burn themselves.<

Connecting electrical appliances In your BMW, when the engine is running or the ignition is switched on, you can use electrical devices such as a hand lamp, car vacuum cleaner, etc. if at least one of the following sockets is available.

The total load of all sockets should not exceed 140 watts at 12 volts.

Avoid damaging the sockets by attempting to insert plugs of unsuitable shape or size.

Do not connect battery chargers to the sockets built into the vehicle at the plant;

doing so may damage the vehicle.<

Reinsert cigarette lighter or socket cover after use; otherwise items that fall into the

cigarette lighter receptacle or the socket can cause a short circuit.<

Cigarette lighter socket To access the socket: Open the front ashtray and remove the ciga- rette lighter or cover from the socket.

In the center console To access the socket, refer to External devices on page 177.

Coupe: through-loading system

Opening

1. To release the rear seat backrest, pull the corresponding lever in the trunk.

2. The unlocked rear seat backrest moves for- ward slightly. Fold the backrest forward by the head restraint.

Closing Return the rear seat backrest to the upright seating position and engage it.

When returning the backrest into the seating position, make sure that the

seat's locking mechanism is properly engaged.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

118

Controls Practical interior accessories

Otherwise, cargo could be thrown around and endanger the occupants in the event of sharp braking or swerving.<

The lashing eyes in the trunk provide you with a way to attach trunk nets or draw straps for securing suitcases and luggage, refer to page 127.

Convertible: cargo loading

Enlarging the trunk

When the convertible top is closed you can enlarge the trunk: To do so, fold the trunk partition upward.

Before opening the convertible top, pull the trunk partition down until it engages.

Ensure that pointed objects do not press against the trunk partition from below.

The convertible top can only be opened when the trunk partition is folded down.<

Storage compartments inside the trunk Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the left side trim panel of the trunk will contain a rubber strap for securing small objects such as a fold- ing umbrella.

The lashing eyes in the trunk provide you with a way to attach trunk nets or draw straps for securing suitcases and luggage, refer to page 128.

Coupe: ski bag The ski bag is designed for safe, clean transport of up to 4 pairs of standard skis or up to 2 snowboards.

With the ski bag you can stow skis with a length of up to 6.6 ft/2.0 m. When skis of 6.6 ft/2.0 m length are loaded, the overall capacity of the ski bag is reduced due to its tapered design.

Loading Ensure that the skis are clean when they are loaded into the ski bag. Wrap sharp edges to prevent damage.

1. Fold down the center panel in the rear seat backrest.

2. Press the button, reach into the recess and fold down the cover. To stabilize the cover in the folded-down position, place the center panel underneath it.

3. Open the Velcro fastener, spread the ski bag between the front seats and insert the skis or snowboards.

4. Attach the hook of the ski bag retaining strap to the eyelet on the side of the ski bag opening.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

119

Practical interior accessories Controls

Securing cargo

After loading, secure the ski bag and its contents. Tighten the retaining strap on the tensioning buckle for this purpose.

Secure the ski bag in the manner described; otherwise, it could endanger

the car's occupants, e.g. in case of heavy brak- ing or sudden swerving.<

To store the ski bag, perform the steps described for loading in reverse order.

Removing the ski bag The ski bag can be completely removed, e.g. for faster drying or to allow you to use other inserts.

1. Fold down the center panel in the rear seat backrest.

2. Pull the handle, arrow 1.

3. Pull out the insert, arrow 2.

For more information on the various inserts available, contact your BMW

center.<

Convertible: through-loading opening with integrated transport bag The transport bag is designed for safe, clean transport of up to 4 pairs of standard skis or up to 2 snowboards.

With the transport bag you can stow skis up to a length of 6.6 ft/2.0 m. When skis of 6.6 ft/2.0 m length are loaded, the overall capacity of the ski bag is reduced due to its tapered design.

When using the transport bag, it is not permissible to transport passengers in

the rear seats.<

Loading 1. Pull the grip in the filler piece of the rear

backrest up and take out the filler piece.

2. Place the filler piece onto the seat cushion with the backrest side facing up.

3. In the trunk: press the two recesses together and fold down the cover.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

120

Controls Practical interior accessories

4. Release the strap, lay out the transport bag between the front seats and load it. The zip fastener makes objects in the ski bag easier to reach.

Ensure that the skis are clean when you load them into the transport bag. Wrap sharp edges to prevent damage.

Securing cargo

After loading, secure the transport bag and its contents. Tighten the retaining strap on the tensioning buckle for this purpose.

Secure the transport bag in the manner described; otherwise, it could endanger

the car's occupants, e.g. in case of heavy brak- ing or sudden swerving.<

To store the transport bag, perform the steps described for loading in reverse order.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

121

Practical interior accessories Controls

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

This section provides you with information useful in dealing with specific driving and

operating conditions.

Driving tips

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

124

Driving tips Things to remember when driving

Things to remember when driving

Vehicle equipment In this chapter, all production, country, and optional equipment that is offered in the model range is described. For this reason, descrip- tions will be given of some equipment that may not be available in a vehicle, for example due to the special options or national-market version selected. This also applies to safety related functions and systems.

Break-in period Moving parts need breaking-in time to adjust to each other. Please follow the instructions below in order to achieve the optimal service life and economy of operation for your vehicle.

Engine and differential Always obey all official speed limits.

Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km Drive at varying engine and road speeds, but do not exceed an engine speed of 4,500 rpm or a road speed of 100 mph/160 km/h.

Avoid full-throttle operation and use of the transmission's kickdown mode.

After driving 1,200 miles/2,000 km Engine and vehicle speeds can be gradually increased.

Tires Due to technical factors associated with their manufacture, tires do not achieve their full traction potential until after an initial break-in period. Therefore, drive cautiously during the first 200 miles/300 km.

Brake system Brakes require an initial break-in period of approx. 300 miles/500 km to achieve optimized contact and wear patterns between brake pads and rotors. Drive cautiously during this break-in period.

Clutch The function of the clutch reaches its optimal level only after a distance driven of approx. 300 miles/500 km. During this break-in period, engage the clutch gently.

Following part replacement The same break-in procedures should be observed if any of the components mentioned above have to be renewed in the course of the vehicle's operating life.

Saving fuel The fuel consumption of your vehicle depends on several factors. You can lower fuel consump- tion and the environmental impact by taking certain measures, adjusting your driving style and having the vehicle serviced regularly.

Remove any unneeded cargo Additional weight increases fuel consumption.

Remove any mounted parts after you have finished using them Remove unneeded additional mirrors, the roof rack and the rear luggage rack after use. Mounted parts affect the vehicle's aerodynam- ics and increase fuel consumption.

Close the windows and glass roof An open glass roof or window causes higher air resistance and thus increases fuel consumption.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

125

Things to remember when driving Driving tips

Check tire inflation pressure regularly Check the tire inflation pressure at least twice a month and before embarking on a long journey, and correct it if necessary.

Low tire inflation pressure causes higher rolling resistance and thus increases fuel consumption and tire wear.

Set off immediately Do not let the engine warm up while the car is still standing, but set off immediately at moder- ate engine speed. This is the fastest way for the cold engine to reach its operating temperature.

Drive defensively Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking maneuvers. To do so, keep an adequate dis- tance between you and the vehicle in front of you. A defensive and smooth driving style keeps fuel consumption down.

Avoid high engine speeds Use first gear only for driving off. In second and higher gears, accelerate without hesitation or pauses. When accelerating, shift up before reaching high engine speeds.

When you reach the desired speed, shift into the highest applicable gear and drive with the engine speed as low as possible and at a con- stant speed.

As a rule: driving at low engine speeds lowers fuel consumption and reduces wear.

Coasting When approaching a red light, take your foot off the accelerator and coast to a stop in the high- est applicable gear.

On a downhill slope, take your foot off the accel- erator and coast in a suitable gear.

The fuel supply is interrupted when coasting.

Switch off the engine during lengthy stops Switch off the engine when stopping for lengthy periods, e.g. at traffic lights, railroad crossings or in traffic congestions.

Switch off functions you do not need at the moment Functions such as the air conditioner, seat heating or rear window defroster draw large amounts of power and consume additional fuel. Especially in city traffic and in stop-and-go driv- ing they have a considerable impact. Therefore, switch these functions off when they are not really needed.

Have the vehicle serviced Have the vehicle serviced regularly to achieve good economy and a long vehicle life. BMW recommends having the vehicle serviced at your BMW center. Also note the BMW Mainte- nance System, refer to page 237.

General driving notes

Close the trunk lid Only drive with the trunk closed. Failure to do so may endanger passengers or other

road users or may damage the vehicle in the event of an accident or a braking and evasive maneuver. In addition, exhaust gas may flow into the passenger compartment.<

If special circumstances make it absolutely necessary to drive with the trunk open:

1. Close all windows and the glass roof.

2. Greatly increase the air volume of the automatic climate control system, refer to page 108.

3. Drive cautiously.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

126

Driving tips Things to remember when driving

Hot exhaust system In all vehicles, extremely high tempera- tures are generated in the exhaust sys-

tem. Do not remove the heat shields installed in its vicinity, and never apply undercoating to them. When driving, standing at idle and while parking, take care to avoid possible contact between the hot exhaust system and any highly flammable materials such as hay, leaves, grass, etc. Such contact could lead to a fire, with the risk of serious personal injuries and property damage. Do not touch hot exhaust tail pipes. Otherwise, there is a risk of burns.<

Mobile phones in the vehicle It is not advisable to use wireless devices such as mobile phones inside the vehicle

without a direct connection to an external aerial. Otherwise, it is not possible to exclude the pos- sibility of a reciprocal interference occurring between the vehicle electronics and the wire- less device. Otherwise, there is no assurance that the radiation generated by the radio trans- mission will be conveyed out of the passenger compartment.<

Hydroplaning When driving on wet or slushy roads, reduce road speed. If you do not, a wedge

of water can form between tires and road sur- face. This situation, known as hydroplaning, means that the tire can completely lose contact with the road surface, so that neither the car can be steered nor the brake be properly applied.<

The risk of hydroplaning increases with declining tread depth on the tires, refer also to Minimum tread depth on page 229.

Driving through water Drive through water on the road only if it is not deeper than 1 ft/30 cm, and then only

at walking speed at the most. Otherwise, the vehicle's engine, the electrical systems and the transmission may be damaged.<

Use the parking brake on inclines On inclines, do not hold the vehicle for a lengthy period using the clutch; use the

parking brake instead. Otherwise, greater clutch wear will result.<

For more information about the drive-off assistant, refer to page 90.

Braking safely Your BMW is equipped with ABS as a standard feature. Applying the brakes fully is the most effective way of braking in situations in which this is necessary. Since the vehicle maintains steering responsiveness, you can still avoid possible obstacles with a minimum of steering effort.

Pulsation of the brake pedal, combined with sounds from the hydraulic circuits, indicate that ABS is in its active mode.

Objects in the movement range of the pedals

Keep floor mats, carpet, and other objects out of the movement range of the pedals;

otherwise, they may inhibit the function of the pedals during driving. Do not place additional floor mats onto an existing one or onto other objects. Only use floor mats that have been approved for the vehicle and can be appropriately fastened. Make sure that the floor mats are securely fastened again after they have been removed, e.g. for cleaning.<

Driving in wet conditions When roads are wet or there is heavy rain, briefly exert gentle pressure on the brake pedal every few miles. Monitor traffic conditions to ensure that this maneuver does not endanger other road users. The heat generated in this process helps dry the pads and rotors. Full braking efficiency will then be available when you need it.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

127

Things to remember when driving Driving tips

Hills To prevent overheating and the resulting reduced efficiency of the brake system,

drive long or steep downhill gradients in the gear in which the least braking is required. Even light but consistent brake pressure can lead to high temperatures, brake wear and possibly even brake failure.<

You can increase the engine's braking effect by shifting down, all the way to first gear if nec- essary. This strategy helps you avoid placing excessive loads on the brake system. Down- shifting in manual mode of the automatic transmission, refer to page 65.

Sport automatic transmission with double clutch: never drive with the transmission

in neutral or with the engine switched off; other- wise, there will be no engine braking action and no power assistance to the brakes and steering. Manual transmission: never drive with the clutch held down, with the transmission in neu- tral or with the engine switched off; otherwise, there will be no engine braking action and no power assistance to the brakes and steering. Never allow floor mats, carpets or any other objects to protrude into the area around the pedals; otherwise, pedal function could be impaired.<

Corrosion on brake rotors When the vehicle is driven only occasionally, during extended periods when the vehicle is not used at all, and in operating conditions where brake applications are less frequent, there is an increased tendency for corrosion to form on rotors, while contaminants accumulate on the brake pads. This occurs because the minimum pressure which must be exerted by the pads during brake applications to clean the rotors is not reached.

Should corrosion form on the brake rotors, the brakes will tend to respond with a pulsating effect that even extended application will fail to cure.

When the vehicle is parked Condensation forms while the automatic climate control is in operation, and then exits under the vehicle. Traces of condensed water under the vehicle are therefore normal.

Cargo loading To avoid loading the tires beyond their approved carrying capacity, never over-

load the vehicle. Overloading can lead to over- heating and increases the rate at which damage develops inside the tires. In some situations, this can result in sudden loss of tire pressure.<

Avoid fluid spills in the trunk as they could damage the vehicle.<

Determining loading limit

1. Locate the following statement on your vehicle's placard:

The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed

XXX kg or YYY lbs. Otherwise damage to the vehicle may occur and unstable driving conditions may result.<

2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or YYY pounds.

4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the YYY amount equals

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

128

Driving tips Things to remember when driving

1,400 lbs and there will be five 150-lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs: 1,400 lbs minus 750 lbs = 650 lbs.

5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, part of the load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult the manual for transporting a trailer to determine how this may reduce the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

Load

The permissible load is the sum of the occu- pants' weights and the weight of the cargo. The greater the weight of the occupants, the less cargo/luggage can be transported.

Stowing cargo

Coupe

Convertible

Storing cargo > Position heavy objects as low and as far

forward as possible, ideally directly behind the respective seat backrests.

> Cover sharp edges and corners.

> For very heavy cargo when the rear seat is not occupied, secure each safety belt in the opposite buckle.

Securing cargo > Secure smaller and lighter items using draw

straps.

> Heavy-duty cargo straps for securing larger and heavier objects are available at your BMW center. To attach the cargo straps, there are two lashing eyeson the inside wall of the trunk. Comply with the information enclosed with the load-securing devices.

Always position and secure the cargo as described above, so that it cannot endan-

ger the car's occupants, for example if sudden braking or swerving is necessary. Never exceed either the approved gross vehicle weight or either of the approved axle loads, refer to page 259, as excessive loads can pose a safety hazard, and may also place you in viola- tion of traffic safety laws. Heavy or hard objects should not be carried loose inside the car, since they could be thrown around, for example as a result of heavy braking, sudden swerves, etc., and endanger the occupants.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

129

Things to remember when driving Driving tips

Only attach the cargo straps using the lashing eyes shown in the illustration. Do not secure cargo with the anchors for tether straps, refer to page 60, otherwise, these could be damaged.<

Coupe: roof-mounted luggage rack A special rack system is available as an option for your BMW. Comply with the directions given in the installation instructions.

Mounting points

Fold open the cover.

Loading roof-mounted luggage rack Because roof racks raise the vehicle's center of gravity when loaded, they have a major effect on vehicle handling and steering response. You should therefore always remember not to exceed the approved roof load capacity, the approved gross vehicle weight or the axle loads when loading the rack.

You can find the applicable data under Weights on page 259.

The roof load must be distributed uniformly and should not be too large in area. Heavy items should always be placed at the bottom. Be sure that adequate clearance is maintained for tilting the glass roof, and that objects do not project into the opening path of the trunk lid.

Fasten roof-mounted cargo correctly and securely to prevent it from shifting or falling off during the trip.

Drive smoothly. Avoid sudden acceleration and braking maneuvers. Take corners gently.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

This chapter describes how you can enter destinations and specify your route

so that your navigation system guides you reliably to your destination.

Navigation

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

132

Navigation Navigation system

Navigation system

Vehicle equipment In this chapter, all production, country, and optional equipment that is offered in the model range is described. Equipment is also described that is not available because of, for example, selected options or country version. This also applies to safety related functions and systems.

General information The navigation system can determine the pre- cise position of the vehicle, with the aid of satel- lites and vehicle sensors, and can reliably guide you to every entered destination.

Enter data only with the vehicle station- ary, and always give priority to the appli-

cable traffic regulations in the event of any con- tradiction between traffic and road conditions and the instructions issued by the navigation system. Failure to take to this precaution can place you in violation of the law and put vehicle occupants and other road users in danger.<

Accessing navigation system

1. Press the button.

2. "Navigation"

The navigation system can also be accessed directly with the button on the

controller.

Navigation data

General information Navigation data and authorization codes are available from your BMW center. Navigation data are stored in the vehicle and can be updated.

> Depending on the data volume, a data update may take several hours.

> Update data while driving to reduce the drain on the battery.

> Only the main functions of the navigation system are available during updating.

The update is resumed automatically when a trip is continued after an interruption.

> You can inquire as to the status of the update.

> The data are stored in the vehicle.

> After the update, the system restarts.

> The medium that holds the navigation data can be removed after the update is completed.

Information about navigation data 1. "Navigation"

2. Open "Options".

3. "Navigation system version": Information about the data version is displayed.

Updating the navigation data

Inserting navigation DVD 1. Insert the navigation DVD into the DVD

player with the labeled side facing up.

2. Follow the instructions on the Control Display.

3. Enter the authorization code of the naviga- tion DVD and change the DVD if needed.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

133

Navigation system Navigation

Removing navigation DVD

1. Press button 1. The DVD emerges slightly from the drive.

2. Remove the DVD.

Querying status

1. Press the button.

2. "Navigation update"

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

134

Navigation Destination entry

Destination entry

Vehicle equipment In this chapter, all production, country, and optional equipment that is offered in the model range is described. Equipment is also described that is not available because of, for example, selected options or country version. This also applies to safety related functions and systems.

General information In entering your destination you can select from the following options:

> Entering a destination manually, see below

> Selecting destination from address book, refer to page 136

> Last destinations, refer to page 137

> Special destinations, refer to page 137

> Entering a destination on the map, refer to page 139

> Selecting home address, refer to page 137

> Destination entry via voice, refer to page 140

> Destination entry via BMW Assist, refer to page 139

You can also store a navigation destination on the programmable memory keys, refer to page 25.

Entering a destination manually To make it easier to enter town/city names and street names, the system assists you with auto- matic name completion and entry comparison, refer to page 143. This makes it possible to enter different spellings and completes your entry automatically so that stored town/city names and street names can be accessed quickly.

1. Press the button.

2. "Navigation"

3. "Enter address"

The system also supports you with the following features:

> If you do not enter a street, the system will guide you to the downtown area of a town or city.

> You can skip the entry of state/province and town/city if the current entries should be retained for your new destination.

Entering a state/province 1. "Navigation"

2. "Enter address"

3. Select "State/Province" or displayed country.

Entering a town/city 1. Select "Town/City/Postal Code" or the

displayed town/city.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

135

Destination entry Navigation

2. Select letters, if necessary. The list is reduced in steps with each entry.

To delete letters:

> To delete individual letters: Turn the controller to select , and then press the controller.

> To delete all letters: Turn the controller to select , and then press the controller for an extended period.

To enter spaces:

> Select the symbol.

The list gradually grows smaller each time you enter a new letter.

3. Move the controller to the right.

4. Select the name of the town/city from the list.

If there are several towns/cities with the same name:

1. Change to the list of town/city names.

2. Highlight the town/city.

3. Select the town/city.

Entering the postal code 1. Select "Town/City/Postal Code" or the

displayed town/city.

2. Select the symbol.

3. Select the digits.

4. Change to the list of postal codes and towns/cities.

5. Highlight the entry.

6. Select an entry.

Entering street and intersection 1. Select "Street" or displayed street.

2. Enter the street and cross-street the same way you entered the town/city.

After you enter the street, you can also enter the cross street or the house number.

If there are several streets with the same name:

1. Change to the list of street names.

2. Highlight street.

3. Select the street.

Alternative: entering street and house number 1. Select "Street" or displayed street.

2. Enter the street the same way you entered the town/city.

3. "House number"

4. Select the digits.

5. Change to the list of house numbers.

6. Select a house number or range of house numbers.

No such street at the destination The desired street is not in the entered town/ city because it belongs to another district of the town/city.

1. "Navigation"

2. "Enter address"

3. Select "Street" or displayed street.

4. Change to the list of street names.

5. Select "In" displayed country.

All streets of the entered country are offered. The corresponding town/city is displayed after the street name.

6. Select the letters.

7. Change to the list of street names.

8. Highlight street.

9. Select the street.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

136

Navigation Destination entry

Starting destination guidance after entering the destination 1. "Accept destination"

2. "Start guidance" or "Add as another desti- nation", refer to page 141.

> Setting "Route preference", refer to page 143.

> Search for "Points of Interest at loc.", refer to page 137.

Address book To create contacts, refer to page 212.

Selecting a destination from the address book 1. "Navigation"

2. "Address book" Contacts with addresses are displayed if these addresses have been checked as destinations.

If the contacts with addresses from the mobile phone are not displayed, they first need to be checked as destinations, refer to page 202.

3. Select a contact in the list or if so desired, using the "A-Z search".

4. Select "Business address" or "Home address"

Storing a destination in the address book Store the destination in the address book after entering the destination.

1. "Navigation"

2. "Map"

3. "Guidance"

4. Open "Options".

5. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing contact".

6. Select an existing contact, if available.

7. "Business address" or "Home address"

8. "Last name" and "First name" if you wish.

9. "Store in vehicle"

Storing the position Your current position can be stored in the address book.

1. "Navigation"

2. Open "Options".

3. "Store position as contact" or "Add position to contact".

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

137

Destination entry Navigation

4. Depending on the selection, select an exist- ing contact from the list or the type of address and enter the last and first name.

5. "Store in vehicle"

Editing or deleting an address 1. "Navigation"

2. "Address book"

3. Highlight the entry.

4. Open "Options".

5. "Edit in Contacts" or "Delete entry".

Using the home address as a destination The home address must be created. Specifying a home address, refer to page 212.

1. "Navigation"

2. "Address book"

3. "Home"

4. "Start guidance"

Last destinations The last destinations are stored automatically. These destinations can be called up and used as a destination for destination guidance.

Opening the last destinations 1. "Navigation"

2. "Last destinations"

3. Select the destination.

4. "Start guidance" or "Add as another destination"

Editing a destination Destinations can be edited, for example, to change the house number of an existing entry.

1. "Navigation"

2. "Last destinations"

3. Highlight the destination.

4. Open "Options".

5. "Edit destination"

Deleting the last destinations 1. "Navigation"

2. "Last destinations"

3. Highlight the destination.

4. Open "Options".

5. "Delete entry" or "Delete all last destinations".

Special destinations

General information Even with the most up-to-date navigation data, information about certain special destinations may have changed; for example, filling stations may not be in operation.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

138

Navigation Destination entry

Opening the search for special destinations 1. "Navigation"

2. "Points of Interest"

The search can be narrowed by entering the location and type of special destination.

Searching online 1. "Google Local Search"

2. Select the special destination.

3. Select the symbol.

4. "Start guidance"

Special destination location As you input the search destination, you can select from among various options.

> "At current location"

> "At destination"

> "At different location"

> "Along route"

A-Z search 1. "A-Z search"

2. "Town/City"

3. Select or enter town/city.

4. "Category"

5. Select category.

6. "Category details" For some special destinations, it is possible to select several category details. Move the controller toward the left to exit category details.

7. "Keyword"

8. Enter keyword.

A list of the special destinations is displayed.

9. Select the special destination.

Details are displayed.

If several details are stored, then you can scroll through the pages.

If a phone number is available, a connection can be established, if desired.

10. Select the symbol.

11. "Start guidance" or "Add as another desti- nation". Adding destination as another destination, refer to page 141.

"Start search": without entering a search term, the search is repeated with the last stored search term.

Category search 1. "Category search"

2. "Town/City"

3. Select or enter town/city.

4. "Category"

5. Select category.

6. "Category details" For some special destinations, it is possible to select several category details. Move the controller toward the left to exit category details.

7. "Start search"

A list of the special destinations is displayed.

8. Select the special destination.

Details are displayed.

If several details are stored, then you can scroll through the pages.

If a phone number is available, a connection can be established, if desired.

9. Select the symbol.

10. "Start guidance" or "Add as another desti- nation". Adding destination as another destination, refer to page 141.

Displaying special destinations List of special destinations: the special destina- tions are displayed in order of their distance and are displayed with a direction arrow pointing toward the destination.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

139

Destination entry Navigation

With the Professional navigation system: In the split screen, special destinations from the selected category are displayed as symbols in the map view. The display depends on the map scale and the category.

Destination entry via BMW Assist A connection to the BMW Concierge service is established, refer to page 213.

1. "Navigation"

2. "Enter address"

3. Open "Options".

4. "BMW Assist dest. entry"

Displaying special destinations in the map To display symbols of the special destinations in the map:

1. "Navigation"

2. "Map"

3. Open "Options".

4. "Display Points of Interest"

5. Select the settings.

Destination entry via map If you only know the location of a destination or street, then you can enter the destination with the aid of the map.

Selecting the destination 1. "Navigation"

2. "Map"

The current position of the vehicle is displayed on the map.

3. "Interactive map"

4. Select the destination with the cross-hairs.

> To change the scale: turn the controller.

> To shift the map: move the controller in the required direction.

> To shift the map diagonally: move the controller in the required direction and turn it.

5. Press the controller to display additional menu items.

> Select the symbol: "Start guidance" or "Add as another destination".

> "Find points of interest": the search for special destinations is started.

Specifying the street If the system cannot recognize a street, it dis- plays one of the following pieces of information:

> A street name in the vicinity.

> The district.

> The coordinates of the destination.

Interactive map In the interactive map, the scale can be adjusted and the visible map section can be shifted. In addition, pressing the controller makes further functions available:

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

140

Navigation Destination entry

> Select the symbol. "Start guidance" or "Add as another destination"

> "Exit interactive map": Go back to the map view.

> "View in northern direction" or "View in driving direction"

> "Display destination": The section of the map around the destination is displayed.

> "Display current location": The section of the map around the current position is displayed.

> "Find points of interest", refer to page 137.

Destination entry via voice

General information For instructions on the voice activation system, refer to page 27.

> During the destination entry by voice, you can switch between voice operation and entry via iDrive at any time. To do so, reactivate the voice activation system if necessary.

> Having the possible spoken commands read aloud: {Voice commands}

Saying the entries > With the Professional navigation system:

City/town, street, and house number can be entered with a single command.

> Countries, towns and cities, streets and intersections can be said as whole words or spelled in the system language, refer to page 87.

Example: to enter a destination in a US state as a complete word, the system language must be English.

> Spell the entry if the language spoken in the area is different from the system language.

> Say the letters smoothly, and avoid exag- gerating the pronunciation and inserting lengthy pauses between the letters.

> The methods of entry depend on the navi- gation data in use and on the country and language settings.

Entering an address in a command 1. Press the button on the steering wheel.

3. Wait for a request from the system.

4. Say the address aloud in the suggested order.

5. Continue making the entry as prompted by the system.

If necessary, individually name the separate components of the address, e.g. the town/city.

Entering a town/city The town/city name can be spoken as a complete word or spelled.

With the destination entry menu displayed:

1. Press the button on the steering wheel.

3. Wait for the system to prompt you for the town/city.

4. Say the name of the town/city or say at least the first three letters.

2. {Enter address}

2. {City} or {Spell city}.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

141

Destination entry Navigation

Depending on the entry, up to 20 towns/ cities may be suggested.

6. Continue making the entry as prompted by the system.

If there are several towns/cities with the same name:

Towns/cities that sound the same are compiled in a separate list and are displayed as one town/ city followed by three dots.

1. Select an entry:

2. Select the desired town/city.

The town/city can also be selected from the list via iDrive: turn the controller until the town/city is selected and press the controller.

Entering a street or intersection The street or intersection is entered in the same manner as the town/city.

Entering a house number Depending on the data in the navigation sys- tem, house numbers up to the number 2,000 can be entered:

Starting destination guidance

Destination guidance starts immediately.

Planning a trip with intermediate destinations

New trip A trip can be planned using intermediate destinations.

1. "Navigation"

2. "Map"

3. Move the controller to the left, if necessary.

4. "Guidance"

5. "Enter new destination"

6. Select the type of destination entry.

7. Enter the intermediate destination.

8. "Start guidance"

Entering intermediate destinations A maximum of 30 intermediate destinations can be entered for one trip.

1. "Enter new destination"

2. Select the type of destination entry.

3. Enter the intermediate destination.

4. "Add as another destination" The intermediate destination is inserted into the destination list and highlighted.

5. Turn the controller until the intermediate destination is at the desired place in the list.

6. Press the controller.

5. Select a location:

> To select a recommended town/city: {Yes}

> To select other town/city: {New entry}

> To select an entry, e.g. {Entry }

> To spell an entry: {Spell city}

{Yes} or {Entry } e.g. entry 2.

1. {House number}

2. Say the house number. Say each digit separately.

3. Continue making the entry as prompted by the system.

{Start guidance}

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

142

Navigation Destination entry

Starting the trip After entering all intermediate destinations, highlight the first destination and say "Start guidance"

For example if the second destination is high- lighted at the start of route guidance, then the first destination is skipped over.

The symbol indicates the active intermedi- ate destination.

Storing a trip Up to 30 trips can be stored in the trip list. Delete existing trips as necessary to permit you to store new trips.

1. Open "Options".

2. "Store trip"

3. Enter a name.

4. "OK"

The trip is stored in the trip list under the entered name.

Selecting a stored trip 1. "Navigation"

2. "Stored trips"

3. Select the desired trip.

4. "Start guidance"

Trips, changing

Changing the trip direction Intermediate destinations are displayed in reverse order in the list.

1. "Map"

2. "Guidance"

3. Open "Options".

4. "Reverse order of trip dest."

Options for intermediate destinations 1. "Map"

2. "Guidance"

3. "Display all trip destinations"

4. Select an intermediate destination.

> "Edit destination"

> "Reposition dest. in the trip": move the intermediate destination within the list.

> "Delete dest. in the trip"

> "Go to next dest. in the trip"

Some options are not possible for some trips.

Deleting a stored trip 1. "Navigation"

2. "Stored trips"

3. Select the desired trip.

4. Open "Options".

5. "Delete all trips" or "Delete trip".

Selecting last trip 1. "Navigation"

2. "Stored trips"

3. "Last trip"

4. "Start guidance"

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

143

Destination guidance Navigation

Destination guidance

Vehicle equipment In this chapter, all production, country, and optional equipment that is offered in the model range is described. Equipment is also described that is not available because of, for example, selected options or country version. This also applies to safety related functions and systems.

Starting destination guidance 1. "Navigation"

2. Entering a destination, refer to page 134.

3. "Accept destination"

4. "Start guidance"

The route is displayed on the Control Display after it is calculated.

In the map view, the distance to the destination/ intermediate destination and the estimated time of arrival are displayed.

The arrow display appears on the Control Display, if so desired.

Terminating destination guidance 1. "Navigation"

2. "Map"

3. "Guidance".

4. "Stop guidance"

Continuing destination guidance If the destination was not reached during the last trip, destination guidance can be resumed.

"Resume guidance"

Route criteria

General information > You can influence the calculated route by

selecting certain trip criteria.

> Route criteria can be changed during desti- nation entry and during route guidance.

> Street types are part of the navigation data and are taken into account in route plan- ning, e.g. avoiding highways.

> The proposed route can differ from personal experience.

> The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use.

> Route guidance with traffic bulletins, refer to page 149.

Changing route criteria 1. "Navigation"

2. "Map"

3. "Route preference"

4. Selecting a criterion:

> "Fast route": time-optimized route through a combination of the least pos- sible distance and stretches of road that allow rapid driving.

> "ECO PRO route": optimized combination of the fastest and shortest possible route.

> "Short route": short distance without taking time into account.

> "Alternative routes": are suggested, where possible, during active route guidance. The individual suggestions are labeled in color.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

144

Navigation Destination guidance

5. Select additional route criteria, if desired. Where possible, the selected criteria will be avoided on the route.

> "Avoid highways": highways are avoided where possible.

> "Avoid toll roads": toll roads are avoided where possible.

> "Avoid ferries": ferries are avoided where possible.

The setting applies to the current route and to the planning of future routes.

Route General information Depending on your vehicle's equipment, vari- ous views of the route are available during route guidance:

> Arrow display on the Control Display.

> List of route segments.

> Map view, refer to page 145.

Arrow display The following information is displayed during route guidance:

> Large arrow: current direction of travel.

> Small arrow: indicates the next change of direction.

> Intersection view.

> Lane information.

> Traffic bulletins.

> Distance to the next change of direction.

> Street name of the next change of direction.

Lane information In the arrow display, the recommended lanes of multi-lane roads are each marked with a triangle.

> Filled triangle: optimum lane.

> Empty triangle: likewise possible lane. It can, however, also be possible to briefly make additional lane changes.

Displaying the list of route segments If the route guidance has been started, then you can display a list of route segments. The dis- tance to be traveled and traffic bulletins are displayed for each segment of the route.

1. "Navigation"

2. "Route information"

3. Highlight the route segment.

The route segment is displayed in the preview map.

Bypassing a section of the route During route guidance, prompt the navigation system to bypass certain route segments. In doing so, you will specify how many kilometers to travel before returning to the original route.

1. "Navigation"

2. "Route information"

3. "New route for"

4. Turn the controller: enter the desired mileage.

5. Press the controller.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

145

Destination guidance Navigation

Resuming the original route If the route section should no longer be bypassed:

1. "Navigation"

2. "Route information"

3. "New route for"

4. "Remove blocking"

Gas station recommendations The remaining range is calculated and filling stations along the route are displayed.

Even with the most up-to-date navigation data, information about certain special destinations may have changed; for example, filling stations may not be in operation.

1. "Navigation"

2. "Route information"

3. "Recommended refuel" A list of filling stations is displayed.

4. Select a gas station.

5. Select the symbol.

6. "Start guidance": route guidance to the selected filling station is started.

"Add as another destination": the filling sta- tion is incorporated into the route.

Destination guidance through voice instructions

Switching voice instructions on/off Voice instructions can be switched on or off during destination guidance.

1. "Navigation"

2. "Map"

3. "Voice instructions"

For rapid access, the feature can be stored on a programmable memory key, refer to page 25.

Repeating a voice instruction 1. "Navigation"

2. "Map"

3. Highlight the symbol.

4. Press the controller twice.

Adjusting volume for voice instructions The volume can be adjusted only while a voice instruction is being issued.

1. Have the last voice instruction repeated, if necessary.

2. Turn the button during the voice instruction to select the desired volume.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.

Map view

Displaying the map view 1. "Navigation"

2. "Map"

Overview

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

146

Navigation Destination guidance

1 Toolbar

2 Route segment with traffic obstruction

3 Road sign for traffic obstruction

4 Planned route

5 Current location

6 Upper status box

7 Lower status box

Lines on the map Streets and roads are depicted with different colors and lines according to their classification. Dotted lines represent railroad and ferry con- nections. National borders are depicted with thin lines.

Traffic obstructions Small triangles along the planned route identify route segments with traffic obstructions, depending on map scale. The direction of the triangles indicates the direction of the obstruc- tion.

Road signs classify the obstructions.

> Red road sign: the obstruction relates to the planned route or direction of travel.

> Gray road sign: the obstruction does not relate to the planned route or direction of travel.

Traffic bulletins, refer to page 147.

Planned route After route guidance is started, the planned route is displayed on the map.

Status boxes Show/hide: press the controller.

> Upper status box: time, phone details, and entertainment details.

> Lower status box: symbol for active route guidance, traffic bulletin status, arrival time, and distance from destination.

Toolbar The following functions are available directly in the map view:

Changing the map section "Interactive map"

> To shift the map: move the controller in the required direction.

> To shift the map diagonally: move the con- troller in the required direction and turn it.

Changing scale 1. Select the symbol.

2. Turn the controller to adjust the scale.

Automatic scaling of the map In the map view facing north, turn the controller in any direction until AUTO is displayed as the map scale. The map shows the entire range from your location to the destination.

Settings for the map view The map is shown on the Control Display.

1. Open "Options".

2. "Settings"

Set the optimized map view.

Symbol Function

Starting/stopping destination guidance

Switching voice instructions on/ off

Changing route criteria or selecting route alternatives

Special destinations

Displaying traffic bulletins

Interactive map

Map view settings

Changing scale

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

147

Destination guidance Navigation

> "Day/night mode" Select and adjust depending on light conditions.

"Traffic conditions/gray map" active: Settings are not taken into account.

> "Satellite images" Depending on the availability and resolu- tion, satellite images are displayed in scales of approx. 1 mile to 600 miles/2 km to 1,000 km.

> "Perspective view in 3D" Displays a three-dimensional view. Promi- nent areas that are contained in the naviga- tion data are displayed on the map in 3D.

> "Traffic conditions/gray map" The map is optimized for displaying traffic bulletins. Symbols for the special destina- tions are no longer displayed.

Map view for the split screen display The map view for the split screen can be selected separately from the main screen.

1. Open "Options".

2. "Split screen"

3. Move the controller to the right repeatedly until the split screen content is selected.

4. Select "Split screen content" or scale.

5. Select the map view:

> "Arrow display"

> "Map facing north"

> "Map direction of travel"

> "Map view with perspective"

> "Position"

> "Exit ramp view"

> "Traffic conditions/gray map"

6. To change the scale: switch to the split screen and turn the controller.

Traffic bulletins

Overview > You can display the traffic bulletins from

radio stations that broadcast the TMC (Traffic Message Channel) of a traffic infor- mation service. Bulletins about traffic obstructions and hazards are continuously updated.

> Traffic bulletins are indicated by symbols on the map.

> Traffic bulletins for the surrounding area are stored in a list.

The symbol in the toolbar of the map view turns red if a traffic bulletin relates to the calculated route.

Real Time Traffic Information End-User Provisions Certain BMW models equipped with navigation have the capability to display real-time traffic information. If your system has this capability the following additional terms and conditions apply:

An End-User shall no longer have the right to use the Traffic Data in the event that the End- User is in material breach of the terms and conditions contained herein.

A. Total Traffic Network, a division of Clear Channel Broadcasting, Inc. ("Total Traffic Net- work") holds the rights to the traffic incident data and RDS-TMC network through which it is delivered. You may not modify, copy, scan or use any other method to reproduce, duplicate, republish, transmit or distribute in any way any portion of traffic incident data. You agree to indemnify, defend and hold harmless BMW of North America, LLC. ("BMW NA") and Total Traffic Network, Inrix, Inc (and their affiliates) against any and all claims, damages, costs or other expenses that arise directly or indirectly out of (a) your unauthorized use of the traffic

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

148

Navigation Destination guidance

incident data or the RDS-TMC network, (b) your violation of this directive and/or (c) any unautho- rized or unlawful activities by you in connection herewith.

B. Total Traffic Network traffic data is informa- tional only. User assumes all risk of use. Total Traffic Network, BMW NA, and their suppliers make no representations about content, traffic and road conditions, route usability, or speed.

C. The licensed material is provided to license "as is," and "where is". Total Traffic Network, including, but not limited to, any and all third party providers of any of the licensed material, expressly disclaims, to the fullest extent permit- ted by law, all warranties or representations with respect to the licensed material (including, without limitation, that the licensed material will be error-free, will operate without interruption or that the traffic data will be accurate), express, implied or statutory, including, without limita- tion, the implied warranties of merchantability, non-infringement fitness for a particular pur- pose, or those arising from a course of dealing or usage of trade.

D. Neither Total Traffic Network, Inrix, Inc. nor BMW NA will be liable to you for any indirect, special, consequential, exemplary, or incidental damages (including, without limitation, lost rev- enues, anticipated revenues, or profits relating to the same) arising from any claim relating directly or indirectly to use of the traffic data, and even if Total Traffic Network, Inrix, Inc., or BMW NA are aware of the possibility of such damages. These limitations apply to all claims, including, without limitation, claims in contract and tort (such as negligence, product liability and strict liability). Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or conse- quential damages, so those particular limita- tions may not apply to you.

Activating/deactivating reception 1. "Navigation"

2. Open "Options".

3. "Receive Traffic Info"

Accessing traffic bulletins 1. "Navigation"

2. "Map"

3. "Traffic Info"

First, the traffic bulletins for the calculated route are displayed.

The traffic bulletins are sorted in the order of their distance from the current vehicle position.

4. Select a traffic bulletin.

"More information": Display additional information.

5. Scroll to the next or previous traffic bulletin if desired.

Traffic bulletins on the map "Traffic conditions/gray map" active: the Con- trol Display changes to a grayscale display. This enables a better view of the traffic bulletins. The day/night mode is disregarded in this setting. Symbols or special destinations are no longer displayed.

1. "Navigation"

2. "Map"

3. Open "Options".

4. "Settings"

5. "Traffic conditions/gray map"

Symbols in the map view Depending on the scale of the map and the location of the traffic obstruction along the route, the symbols for the traffic obstructions are displayed.

Additional information in the map view Depending on the map scale, a traffic obstruc- tion's length, direction and impact are displayed on the map using triangles or gray bars along the calculated route.

> Red: traffic congestion

> Orange: stop-and-go traffic

> Yellow: heavy traffic

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

149

Destination guidance Navigation

> Green: clear roads

> Gray: general traffic information, e.g. construction zone

The bulletins displayed depend in the respec- tive traffic information service.

Filtering traffic bulletins Set which traffic bulletins are displayed on the map.

1. "Navigation"

2. "Map"

3. Open "Options".

4. "Traffic Info categories"

5. Select the desired categories.

Traffic bulletins from the selected categories are displayed on the map.

> Traffic bulletins that lie on the route are always shown.

> For your personal safety, it is not possible to hide traffic bulletins that announce a poten- tial hazard.

Route guidance with traffic bulletins

Semi-dynamic route guidance With traffic bulletin reception switched on, semi-dynamic route guidance is active.

The system takes into account the existing traf- fic bulletins during route guidance. A message is displayed as a function of the route, the traffic bulletins, and the possible alternate routes. In the event of a traffic obstruction, an alternate route will be suggested if possible.

The upper part of the message shows:

> The symbol of the first traffic obstruction, possibly with the remaining distance before the start of the traffic obstruction.

> Total length of traffic obstructions on the route.

> Extension of driving time due to the traffic obstructions

The lower part of the message shows:

> Suggested alternate route with remaining distance before the start of the alternate route.

> Difference of the route length compared to the original route.

> Time gained by taking the alternate route compared to the original route with the traffic obstructions.

In addition to the original route displayed in white, the split screen will also show the alter- nate route.

Taking an alternate route:

"Detour"

With particular hazards, e.g. objects on the roadway, a message is displayed without a possible alternate route.

It is also possible to take alternate routes can also be taken if the traffic reports are accessed via the list:

1. "Navigation"

2. "Map"

3. "Traffic Info"

4. "Detour information"

5. "Detour"

Dynamic destination guidance The route is automatically changed in the event of traffic obstructions.

> The system does not point out traffic obstructions along the original route.

> Traffic bulletins will continue to be dis- played on the map.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

150

Navigation Destination guidance

> Depending on the type of road and the nature and length of the traffic obstruction, the route can also be calculated so that you travel through the traffic obstruction.

> Certain hazards are displayed regardless of the setting.

To activate dynamic route guidance:

1. "Navigation"

2. Open "Options".

3. "Dynamic guidance"

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

151

What to do if Navigation

What to do if

Vehicle equipment In this chapter, all production, country, and optional equipment that is offered in the model range is described. Equipment is also described that is not available because of, for example, selected options or country version. This also applies to safety related functions and systems.

What to do if > The current position cannot be displayed?

The position is in an unrecognized region, in a poor reception area, or the system is in the process of determining the position. Reception is generally available when you are in the open.

> The destination guidance does not accept a destination without a street name? A downtown area cannot be determined for the town or city that has been entered. Input any street in the selected town/city and start destination guidance.

> The destination guidance does not accept a destination? The destination data is not contained in the navigation data. Choose a destination as close as possible to the original one.

> The letters for a destination cannot be selected during destination entry? The stored data do not contain the data of the destination. Select a destination that is as close as possible to the original.

> The map view is displayed in grayscale? "Traffic conditions/gray map" active: the Control Display changes to a grayscale display. This enables a better view of the traffic bulletins.

> Voice instructions are no longer issued before intersections during destination guidance?

The area has not been fully recorded yet, or you have left the recommended route and the system requires a few seconds to calcu- late a new route suggestion.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

Operation of the radio, CD equipment and external audio devices as well as their tone

settings are described in this chapter.

Entertainment

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

154

Entertainment On/off and tone

On/off and tone

Vehicle equipment In this chapter, all production, country, and optional equipment that is offered in the model range is described. Equipment is also described that is not available because of, for example, selected options or country version. This also applies to safety related functions and systems.

General information The following audio and video sources share the same control elements and adjustments:

> Radio

> CD/DVD player

> Video

> External devices, e.g. MP3 player

Controls The audio and video sources can be controlled using the:

> Buttons near the CD/DVD player

> iDrive

> Buttons on the steering wheel, refer to page 13

> Programmable memory keys, refer to page 25

> Voice activation system

Buttons near the CD/DVD player

1 Sound output for entertainment on/off, volume

> Press: switch on/off When you switch on the unit, the last set radio station or track is played.

> Turn: adjusting the volume

2 Eject the CD/DVD

3 CD/DVD drive

4 FM/AM: change the radio station waveband

5 MODE: change the audio and video sources

6 Station scan/track search

> Change the radio station

> Select the track for the CD/DVD player and certain multimedia devices

Switching on/off To switch the entertainment audio output on or off: Press knob 1 next to the CD/DVD player.

This symbol on the Control Display indicates that sound output is switched off.

The sound output is available for approx. 20 minutes after the ignition was switched off. For sound output, switch the unit back on.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

155

On/off and tone Entertainment

Adjusting volume Turn knob 1 next to the CD/DVD player until the desired volume is obtained.

You can also adjust the volume with buttons on the steering wheel, refer to page 13.

Setting tone controls You can alter various tone settings, e.g. treble and bass or the speed-dependent volume increase. The tone settings are set for all audio sources at once.

The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use.

Treble, bass, balance, fader > "Treble": treble adjustment.

> "Bass": bass adjustment.

> "Balance": left/right volume distribution

> "Fader": front/rear volume distribution

Adjustments 1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings".

2. "Tone"

3. Select the desired tone setting.

4. To adjust: turn the controller.

5. To store: press the controller.

Equalizer You can set individual sound frequency ranges.

1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings".

2. "Tone"

3. "Equalizer"

4. Select the desired setting.

5. To adjust: turn the controller.

6. To store: press the controller.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

156

Entertainment On/off and tone

Multi-channel playback, surround You can choose between stereo and multi- channel playback, surround.

1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings".

2. "Tone"

3. "Surround"

When surround is activated, multi-channel playback is simulated when playing an audio track in stereo.

Volume levels > "Speed volume": volume is adapted

depending on the speed

> "PDC": volume of the PDC acoustic signal relative to the entertainment sound output

> "Gong": volume of the acoustic signal, e.g. for the acoustic Safety Belt Reminder rela- tive to the entertainment sound output

> "Microphone": volume of the microphone during a phone conversation.

> "Loudspeak.": volume of the speaker during a phone conversation.

Adjustments 1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings".

2. "Tone"

3. "Volume settings"

4. Select the desired volume setting.

5. To adjust: turn the controller.

6. To store: press the controller.

Resetting tone settings You can reset all tone settings to the default setting.

1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings".

2. "Tone"

3. "Reset"

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

157

Radio Entertainment

Radio

Vehicle equipment In this chapter, all production, country, and optional equipment that is offered in the model range is described. Equipment is also described that is not available because of, for example, selected options or country version. This also applies to safety related functions and systems.

General information Your radio is designed for reception of the following stations:

> FM and AM

> HD Radio

> Satellite radio

Selecting a station

Press the knob if the sound output is switched off.

1. "Radio"

2. "FM" or "AM"

3. Select the desired station.

The selected station is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Changing stations Turn the controller and press it

or

Press the button for the corresponding direction

or

Press the buttons on the steering wheel, refer to page 13.

Selecting a station manually Station selection via the frequency.

1. "Radio"

2. "FM" or "AM"

3. "Manual"

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

158

Entertainment Radio

4. Select the frequency: turn the controller.

To store the station: press the controller for an extended period.

Renaming a radio station An FM station with changing station names can be renamed.

1. "Radio"

2. "FM"

3. Select the desired station.

4. Open "Options".

5. "Rename to:"

If necessary, wait until the desired name appears.

The selected station name is added to the list of current stations and stored stations.

Storing stations

Via iDrive 1. "Radio"

2. "FM" or "AM"

3. Select the desired station.

4. Press the controller for an extended period.

5. Select the desired memory location.

The stations are stored for the remote control currently in use.

Via programmable memory keys You can store a station on the programmable memory keys, refer to page 25.

1. Select a station.

2. ... Press and hold the desired button.

RDS Radio Data System In the FM waveband, additional information is transmitted via RDS. If the reception conditions are good, the station names are shown on the Control Display. If the reception is weak or dis- rupted, it can take some time before the station names are displayed.

Switching the RDS on/off 1. "Radio"

2. "FM"

3. Open "Options".

4. "RDS"

The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

159

Radio Entertainment

HD Radio reception Many radio stations transmit analog and digital signals.

License conditions

HD radio technology manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corporation. U.S. and foreign patents. HD Radio and the HD, HD Radio, and Arc logos are proprietary trade- marks of iBiquity Digital Corp.

Activating/deactivating digital radio reception 1. "Radio"

2. "FM" or "AM"

3. Open "Options".

4. "HD Radio Reception"

The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

This symbol is displayed when a station is being received digitally.

When setting a station that has a digital signal, it may take several seconds before the station plays in digital quality.

Instructions for HD stations whose station name ends with ...HD or ...HD1:

In areas in which the station is not continuously received in digital mode, playback switches between analog and digital reception. In this case, switch off digital radio reception.

Instructions for HD multicast stations whose station name ends with ...HD2 or ...HD3:

In areas in which the station is not continuously received in digital mode, interruptions in the audio signal may occur, which can last for sev- eral seconds. This depends on the reception.

Displaying additional information Some stations broadcast additional information on the current track, such as the name of the artist.

1. Select the desired station.

2. Open "Options".

3. "Station info"

Selecting a substation The symbol indicates that a main station also broadcasts additional substations. The station name of the main station ends in HD1. The sta- tion names of the substations end in HD2, HD3, etc.

1. Select the desired station.

2. Press the controller.

3. Select the substation.

When reception is poor, the substation is muted for several seconds.

Presets It is possible to store up to 40 stations.

Selecting a station 1. "Radio"

2. "Presets"

3. Select the desired station.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

160

Entertainment Radio

Storing stations The station currently selected is stored.

1. "Radio"

2. "Presets"

3. "Store station"

4. Select the desired memory location.

The list of stored stations is stored for the remote control currently in use.

You can also store the stations on the program- mable memory keys, refer to page 25.

Deleting a station 1. "Radio"

2. "Presets"

3. Select the desired station.

4. Open "Options".

5. "Delete entry"

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

161

Satellite radio Entertainment

Satellite radio

Vehicle equipment In this chapter, all production, country, and optional equipment that is offered in the model range is described. Equipment is also described that is not available because of, for example, selected options or country version. This also applies to safety related functions and systems.

General information The channels are offered in fixed packages. Packages must be activated by telephone.

Navigation bar

The functions of the navigation bar symbols can also be stored on the programmable memory buttons, refer to page 25.

Managing subscription Clear reception is required for activating and deactivating channels. Reception is best when you have an unobstructed view to the sky. The channel name is displayed in the status line.

Activating channels The Unsubscribed Channels category contains all disabled channels.

1. "Radio"

2. "Satellite radio"

3. "Category"

4. Select the Unsubscribed Channels category.

5. Select desired channel. The telephone number and electronic serial number, ESN, are displayed.

6. Dial the telephone number to have the channels activated.

This telephone number can also be used to deactivate the channels.

Deactivating channels 1. "Radio"

2. "Satellite radio"

3. Open "Options".

Symbol Function

Changing list view

Selecting category

Entering channel directly

Time shift

Accessing favorites, selecting the My Favorites category

Managing favorites

Traffic Jump

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

162

Entertainment Satellite radio

4. "Manage subscription"

The telephone number and electronic serial number, ESN, are displayed.

5. Call Sirius to deactivate the channels.

Selecting channels You can only listen to activated channels.

The selected channel is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Via iDrive 1. "Radio"

2. "Satellite radio"

3. Select "All channels" or the desired category.

4. Select desired channel.

Via the button in the area of the CD/DVD player Press the button for the corresponding direction. The next channel is selected.

Using direct channel entry 1. "Radio"

2. "Satellite radio"

3. "Set channel"

4. Turn the controller until the desired channel is reached and press the controller.

Storing channel 1. "Radio"

2. "Satellite radio"

3. Select "All channels" or a desired category.

4. Select desired channel.

5. Press the controller again.

6. Press the controller again to confirm the highlighted channel.

7. Select the desired memory location.

The channels are stored for the remote control currently in use.

You can also store the channels on the pro- grammable memory keys, refer to page 25.

Changing list view The list view changes each time the first symbol on the navigation bar is pressed.

Information about the channel is displayed.

Symbol Function

Channel name

Artist

Track

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

163

Satellite radio Entertainment

Selecting category 1. "Radio"

2. "Satellite radio"

3. "Category"

4. Select the desired category.

Time shift Approximately one hour of the channel cur- rently being listened to is temporarily stored in a cache memory. Prerequisite: the signal must be available.

The stored audio track can be played back at a different time from the live broadcast. If the cache memory is full, then the older tracks are recorded over. The cache memory is deleted if a new channel is selected.

Accessing Time shift 1. "Radio"

2. "Satellite radio"

3. "Replay - Time shift"

> The red arrow indicates the current playback position.

> The time difference from the live broadcast is displayed next to the cache memory bar.

> For live transmissions: "live".

Time shift menu

Automatic time shift When the function is activated, audio playback is stopped automatically in the event of:

> Incoming and outgoing telephone calls.

> Activation of the voice activation system.

> Muting.

The audio playback then continues with a time delay.

Activating 1. "Radio"

2. "Satellite radio"

3. "Replay - Time shift"

4. "Automatic time shift"

Deactivating "Automatic time shift"

Storing favorites Up to 30 favorites can be stored in the favorites list. Possible favorites include artist, track, game, league, and team.

Symbol Function

Go to live broadcast

Playback/pause

Next track

Previous track

Fast forward

Reverse

Automatic time shift deactivated/ activated

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

164

Entertainment Satellite radio

Storing artist, track, or game Only current broadcasts can be stored as favor- ites. The channel information must be available.

1. "Radio"

2. "Satellite radio"

3. Select "All channels" or the desired category.

4. Select desired channel.

5. Press the controller again.

6. Select artist, track, or game.

Storing league or team Leagues or teams can be added to the favorites from a selection list.

1. "Radio"

2. "Satellite radio"

3. "Manage favorites"

4. "Add sports information"

5. Select the desired league.

6. Select "Add all teams" or a desired team.

Accessing favorites If an activated favorite is being played, the message "Favorite alert!" appears for approx. 20 seconds.

Select "Favorites" while the alert message is being displayed.

The displayed favorite will be played.

If there is no message, the system changes to the My Favorites category. All of the favorites currently being broadcast can be selected from a list.

Managing favorites

Activating/deactivating favorites Favorites can be activated or deactivated globally and individually.

1. "Satellite radio"

2. "Manage favorites"

3. Select "Activate alert" or desired favorites.

The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Deleting favorites 1. "Satellite radio"

2. "Manage favorites"

3. Highlight the favorites you wish to delete.

4. Open "Options".

5. "Delete entry"

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

165

Satellite radio Entertainment

Traffic Jump Traffic and weather information for a selected region are broadcast at intervals of a few minutes.

Selecting region 1. "Radio"

2. "Satellite radio"

3. Open "Options".

4. "Set jump"

5. Select the desired region.

The region is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Activating/deactivating Jump 1. "Radio"

2. "Satellite radio"

3. "Jump to:"

As soon as information about the selected region becomes available, it is broadcast.

A new panel appears in the display.

Cancel Traffic Jump: "Cancel".

Select one of the symbols to deactivate Traffic Jump.

Automatic update About twice a year, Sirius carries out an update of the names and positions of the channels. The update occurs automatically and can take several minutes.

Notes > Under some circumstances, reception may

not be possible, e.g. under certain environ- mental or topographical conditions. The satellite radio has no influence on this.

> The signal may not be available in tunnels or underground garages or near trees, moun- tains, or other powerful sources of radio interference.

Symbol Meaning

Information will be broadcast soon.

Information is currently being broadcast.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

166

Entertainment CD/DVD player

CD/DVD player

Vehicle equipment In this chapter, all production, country, and optional equipment that is offered in the model range is described. Equipment is also described that is not available because of, for example, selected options or country version. This also applies to safety related functions and systems.

CD/DVD playback

Inserting a CD/DVD Insert the CD/DVD into the drive with the labeled side facing up. The CD/DVD is drawn in automatically. Playback starts automatically if the sound output is on. For CDs/DVDs with compressed audio files, it can take several minutes to read in the data, depending on the directory structure.

Playable formats CD/DVD player

> DVD: DVD-ROM, DVD-R, DVD+R, DVD- RW, DVD+RW, DVD-R DL, DVD+R DL, DVD audio (video part only), DVD video

> CD: CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW, CD-DA

> Compressed audio files: MP3, WMA, AAC, M4A

Starting playback A CD/DVD is in the CD/DVD player.

1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "CD/DVD"

3. Select the desired CD or DVD:

Ejecting a CD/DVD Press the button next to the CD/DVD player. The CD/DVD emerges slightly from the drive.

Audio playback

Selecting the track using the button Press the button for the appropriate direction as often as necessary until the desired track is reached.

Selecting a track using iDrive

Audio CDs 1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "CD/DVD"

3. Select the desired CD or DVD.

Symbol Meaning

CD/DVD player

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

167

CD/DVD player Entertainment

4. Select the desired track to begin playback.

CDs/DVDs with compressed audio files Depending on the data, some letters and numbers of the CD/DVD may not be displayed correctly.

1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "CD/DVD"

3. Select the desired CD or DVD.

4. Select the directory, if necessary. To change to a higher level directory: move the controller to the left.

5. Select a track and press the controller.

Displaying information about the track If information about a track has been stored, it is displayed automatically:

> Artist

> Album title

> Number of tracks on the CD/DVD

> Track file name

Random sequence playback The tracks on the current CD/DVD are played once in random sequence.

1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "CD/DVD"

3. Select the desired CD or DVD.

4. Open "Options".

5. "Random"

CDs/DVDs with compressed audio files: all the tracks in the selected directory are played in random sequence.

Random mode is switched off when the audio source is changed or the ignition is switched off.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

168

Entertainment CD/DVD player

Fast forward/reverse Press and hold the button for the corresponding direction.

Video playback

Country codes Only DVDs with the code of the home region can be played back; also refer to the information on your DVD.

Starting playback For your own safety, the video image is only dis- played up to approx. 2 mph/3 km/h and in some market-specific versions, only with the parking brake engaged or the selector lever of the auto- matic transmission is in the park position.

DVD video 1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "CD/DVD"

3. Select a DVD with video content.

4. "DVD menu"

5. Start the DVD via the DVD menu.

VCD/SVCD 1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "CD/DVD"

3. Select a CD/DVD with video content.

4. "Select track"

5. Select the desired track.

The CD/DVD is started.

Video menu To open the Video menu:

1. Turn the controller during playback.

2. Press the controller when "Back" is displayed.

The Video menu is displayed:

Code Region

1 USA, Canada

2 Japan, Europe, Middle East, South Africa

3 Southeast Asia

4 Australia, Central and South America, New Zealand

5 Northwest Asia, North Africa

6 China

0 All regions

Symbol Function

Open the DVD menu

Starting playback

Pause

Stop

Next chapter/next track

Previous chapter/previous track

Fast forward

Reverse

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

169

CD/DVD player Entertainment

In fast forward/reverse: the speed increases every time the controller is pressed. To stop, start playback.

DVD menu 1. If necessary, turn the controller to open the

Video menu.

2. "DVD menu" The DVD menu is displayed. The display depends on the contents of the DVD.

> To select menu items: move and press the controller.

> To change to the Video menu: turn the controller and select "Back".

DVD/VCD settings For some DVDs, settings can only be made via the DVD menu; also refer to the information on your DVD.

Language 1. Turn the controller during playback.

2. Open "Options".

3. "Audio/language"

4. Select the desired language.

The languages that are available depend on the DVD.

Subtitles Subtitles can be selected if they are contained on the DVD.

1. Turn the controller during playback.

2. Open "Options".

3. "Subtitles"

4. Select the desired language or "Do not display subtitles".

Brightness, contrast, color 1. Turn the controller during playback.

2. Open "Options".

3. "Display settings"

4. "Brightness", "Contrast" or "Color"

5. Turn the controller until the desired setting is displayed, and then press the controller.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

170

Entertainment CD/DVD player

Zoom Display the video image on the full screen.

1. Turn the controller during playback.

2. Open "Options".

3. "Additional options"

4. "Zoom mode"

Selecting track DVD video:

1. Turn the controller when the DVD menu is displayed.

2. Open "Options".

3. "Additional options"

4. "Select title"

5. Select the desired track.

VCD/SVCD:

1. "Select track"

2. Select the desired track.

Camera angle The camera angle depends on the DVD.

1. Turn the controller during playback.

2. Open "Options".

3. "Additional options"

4. "Viewing angle"

5. Select the desired camera angle.

Opening the main menu, back These functions are not contained on every DVD. Therefore, they may not be available for use.

Notes BMW CD/DVD players are officially desig- nated Class 1 laser products. Do not

operate if the cover is damaged; otherwise, severe eye damage can result. Do not use self-recorded CDs/DVDs with labels applied as these can become detached during playback due to heat build-up and can cause irreparable damage to the device. Only use round CDs/DVDs with a standard diameter of 4.7 in/12 cm and do not play CDs/ DVDs with an adapter, e.g. CD singles; other- wise, the CDs or the adapter might jam and no longer eject. Do not use a combined CD/DVD, e.g. DVDPlus; otherwise, the CD/DVD can jam and will no longer eject.<

General malfunctions BMW CD/DVD players have been optimized for performance in vehicles. In some instances they may be more sensitive to faulty CDs/DVDs than stationary devices would be.

If a CD/DVD cannot be played, first check if it has been inserted correctly.

Humidity High levels of humidity can lead to condensa- tion on the CD/DVD or the laser's scan lens and temporarily prevent playback.

Malfunctions with individual CDs/DVDs If malfunctions occur only with particular CDs/ DVDs, this may be due to one of the following reasons

Self-recorded CDs/DVDs Possible reasons for malfunctions with self- recorded CDs/DVDs are, for example, inconsis- tent data-creation or recording processes, or poor quality or old age of the CD/DVD blank.

Only label CDs/DVDs on the top, with a pen designed for this purpose.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

171

CD/DVD player Entertainment

Damage Avoid leaving fingerprints, as well as dust, scratches or moisture on the CDs/DVDs. Keep CDs/DVDs in protective sleeves or cases. Do not subject CDs/DVDs to temperatures above 1227/506, nor to high humidity levels or direct sunlight.

CDs/DVDs with copy protection CDs/DVDs are often copy-protected by the manufacturer. This can mean that some CDs/ DVDs cannot be played or can only be played to a limited extent.

MACROVISION This product contains copyrighted technology that is based on multiple registered U.S. pat- ents and the intellectual property of the Macro- vision Corporation and other manufacturers. The use of this copy protection must be approved by Macrovision. Unless otherwise agreed with Macrovision, media with this pro- tection may only be used for private purposes. Copying of this technology is prohibited.

DTS Digital Surround Manufactured under license of US patent numbers: 5,451,942;

5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,487,535 & other patents granted and pending in both the USA and worldwide. DTS and the logo are reg- istered trademarks & DTS Digital Surround and the DTS logos are trademarks of DTS Inc. DTS, Inc. All rights reserved.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

172

Entertainment Music collection

Music collection

Vehicle equipment In this chapter, all production, country, and optional equipment that is offered in the model range is described. Equipment is also described that is not available because of, for example, selected options or country version. This also applies to safety related functions and systems.

Storing music The music tracks from CDs, DVDs and USB devices can be stored in the music collection in the vehicle and played from there.

> Audio CD: tracks are converted into a com- pressed audio format when they are stored. If available, information on the album, such as the artist, is stored as well.

> CD/DVD or USB device with compressed audio files: the entire content of the CD/ DVD or the USB device is stored in the vehi- cle as an album. After storing, the tracks and directories can be deleted individually. Files are only stored in the WMA, MP3, M4A, and AAC formats. Tracks with DRM copy protection can be stored in the vehicle but cannot be played back.

Regularly back up the music data; other- wise, it could be lost if there is a fault on

the hard disc.<

Music recognition technology and related data are provided by

Gracenote. Gracenote is the industry standard in music recognition technology and related content delivery. For more information, please visit www.gracenote.com.

CD and music-related data from Gracenote, Inc., copyright 2000-2009 Gracenote. Gracenote Software, copyright 2000-2009 Gracenote. This product and service may prac-

tice one or more of the following U.S. Patents: 5.987.525, 6.061.680, 6.154.773, 6.161.132, 6.230.192, 6.230.207, 6.240.459 and 6.330.593 as well as other granted or pending patents. Some services supplied under license from Open Globe, Inc. for U.S. Patent: 6.304.523.

Gracenote and CDDB are registered trade- marks of Gracenote. The Gracenote logo and logotype, and the "Powered by Gracenote" logo are trademarks of Gracenote.

Storing files from CDs/DVDs CDs/DVDs can only be stored from the CD/DVD player.

1. Insert a CD/DVD into the CD/DVD player.

2. "CD/Multimedia"

3. "CD/DVD"

4. Select the symbol for the CD/DVD player.

5. "Store in vehicle"

The music collection is displayed. The tracks are stored and played back in sequence from the music collection.

Observe the following during the storage process: Do not switch back to the CD/DVD player and do not remove the CD/DVD from the CD/DVD player; otherwise, the storage process will be interrupted.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

173

Music collection Entertainment

You can switch to the other audio sources with- out interrupting the storage process. Tracks from the current CD/DVD can also be called up, if they have been stored already.

Interrupting storage 1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "CD/DVD"

3. "Storing..."

4. "Cancel storing"

The storage process is interrupted and can be continued at any time.

Continuing the storage process 1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "CD/DVD"

3. Select the symbol for the CD/DVD player.

4. "Continue storing"

The storing of the CD/DVD continues at the beginning of the track at which storing was interrupted.

Album information During storage, information such as the name of the artist is stored with the track, if this infor- mation is available in the vehicle database or on the CD.

To update the database, contact your service center.

Storing from a USB device To store music, a suitable device must be connected to the USB interface in the glove compartment.

> Suitable devices: USB mass storage devices, such as USB flash drives or MP3 players with a USB interface.

> Unsuitable devices: USB hard drive, USB hubs, USB memory card readers with multi- ple inserts, Apple iPod/iPhone. Music from Apple iPods/iPhones can be played via the USB audio interface in the center armrest.

> File systems: popular file systems for USB devices are supported. The format FAT 32 is recommended.

Music from a USB device can be stored only via the USB interface in the glove

compartment.<

1. Connect the USB device to the USB inter- face in the glove compartment.

2. "CD/Multimedia"

3. "Music collection"

4. Open "Options".

5. "Music data import/export"

6. "Import music (USB)"

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

174

Entertainment Music collection

Playing music

Music search All tracks for which additional information has been stored can be accessed by the music search. Tracks without additional information can be called up via the corresponding album.

1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "Music collection"

3. "Music search"

4. Select the desired category.

5. To select the desired entry:

> Open "A-Z search" and enter the desired input.

or

> Select the desired entry from the list.

6. Select additional categories if desired. The tracks found are listed in alphabetical order. Not all categories need to be selected. For example, to search for all tracks by a certain artist, call up that artist only. All of the tracks by that artist are then displayed.

7. "Start play"

The list of tracks is automatically repeated.

Restarting the music search "New search"

Music search by voice For instructions on the voice activation system, refer to page 27.

1. Press the button on the steering wheel.

To select a track directly:

Say the voice command and the name of the desired track in one command.

Current playback The list of tracks that was generated last by the music search or the album selected last.

1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "Music collection"

3. "Current playback"

4. Select the desired track, if necessary.

2. {Music search}

3. Open the desired category, e.g. {Select artist}.

4. Say the desired entry in the list.

5. Select additional categories if desired.

{Title }

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

175

Music collection Entertainment

Top 50 List of the 50 most frequently played tracks.

1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "Music collection"

3. "Top 50"

4. Select the desired track, if necessary.

Albums All stored albums, listed in order of their storage dates. Symbols indicate the format.

1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "Music collection"

3. Select the desired album.

Depending on the album, the tracks or the subdirectories of the album are displayed. The first track is played automatically, if possible.

4. To select tracks, change directories if needed. To go up one level in the directory, move the controller to the left.

Random sequence playback All tracks of the selection are played back in random sequence.

1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "Music collection"

3. Open "Options".

4. "Random"

Managing music

Albums

Renaming an album The name of the album, if available, is automat- ically entered when the album is stored. If the name is unknown, it can be changed later.

An album cannot be renamed while a track from that album is being played.

1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "Music collection"

3. Highlight the desired album.

4. Open "Options".

5. "Rename album"

6. Select the letters individually.

Symbol Format

Audio CD

Compressed audio files

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

176

Entertainment Music collection

Deleting an album An album cannot be deleted while a track from it is being played.

1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "Music collection"

3. Highlight the desired album.

4. Open "Options".

5. "Delete album"

Deleting a track and directory A track cannot be deleted while it is being played.

A directory cannot be deleted while a track from it is being played.

1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "Music collection"

3. Highlight the directory or track.

4. Open "Options".

5. "Delete folder" or "Delete track".

Free memory capacity Display the free memory capacity in the music collection.

1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "Music collection"

3. Open "Options".

4. "Free memory"

Music collection

Backing up the music collection The entire music collection can be stored on a USB medium. Make sure there is enough free memory capacity on the USB device.

Depending on the number of tracks, backing up the music collection may take several hours. Therefore, it is best to perform the backup during a long trip.

1. Start the engine.

2. Connect the USB medium to the USB inter- face in the glove compartment, refer to page 115.

3. "CD/Multimedia"

4. "Music collection"

5. Open "Options".

6. "Music data import/export"

7. "Backup music on USB"

Restoring the music collection in the vehicle

When storing from the USB device, the music collection existing in the vehicle is

replaced.<

1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "Music collection"

3. Open "Options".

4. "Music data import/export"

5. "Restore music from USB"

Deleting the music collection 1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "Music collection"

3. Open "Options".

4. "Delete music collection"

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

177

External devices Entertainment

External devices

Vehicle equipment In this chapter, all production, country, and optional equipment that is offered in the model range is described. Equipment is also described that is not available because of, for example, selected options or country version. This also applies to safety related functions and systems.

Overview

AUX-IN port

Overview > It is possible to connect audio devices, e.g.

MP3 players. Sound is output over the vehicle speakers.

> Recommended settings: mid-level tone and volume settings on the audio device. Tone may depend on the quality of the audio files.

Connecting Lift up the center armrest.

Connection for audio playback: TRS connector 1/8 in/3.5 mm

The AUX-In connection is in the center armrest

Connect the headphone connection or line-out connection of the device to the jack plug.

Playback 1. Connect the audio device, switch it on, and

using the audio device, select a track.

2. "CD/Multimedia"

3. "External devices" if applicable

4. "AUX front"

Sound is output over the vehicle speakers.

Volume The volume of the sound output depends on the audio device. If this volume differs markedly from the volume of the other audio sources, it is advisable to adjust the volumes.

Adjusting volume 1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "External devices" if applicable

3. "AUX front"

Symbol Meaning

AUX-In connection

USB audio interface

Music interface for smartphones

Bluetooth audio

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

178

Entertainment External devices

4. "Volume"

5. Turn the controller until the desired volume is set and then press the controller.

USB audio interface/Music interface for smartphones

Overview It is possible to connect external audio devices. They can be operated via iDrive. Sound is out- put over the vehicle speakers.

Options for connecting external devices > Connection via USB audio interface: Apple

iPod/iPhone, USB devices, e.g. MP3 player, USB flash drive, or mobile phones that are supported by the USB audio interface.

> Connection via snap-in adapter if the vehi- cle is equipped with a music interface for smartphones: Apple iPhone or mobile phones. Playback may only be possible when no device is connected to the AUX-IN port.

Because of the large number of audio devices available on the market, an operation via the vehicle cannot be guaranteed for every audio device/mobile phone. Ask your BMW center for suitable audio devices/mobile phones.

File systems Popular file systems for USB devices are sup- ported. The format FAT 32 is recommended.

Audio files Playback of standard audio files is possible:

> MP3

> WMA

> WAV (PCM)

> AAC, M4A

> Playback lists: M3U, WPL, PLS

Connection via the USB audio interface Lift up the center armrest.

1 AUX-IN port for audio playback: TRS connector 1/8 in/3.5 mm

2 USB interface

Apple iPod/iPhone Use a flexible adapter cable for the connection. Connect the Apple iPod/iPhone to the USB interface 2.

The Apple iPod/iPhone menu structure is supported by the USB audio interface.

USB device To protect the USB interface and USB device from mechanical damage, connect them with a flexible adapter cable.

Connect the USB device to the USB interface 2.

After initial connection Information about all tracks, e.g. artist or music style and the playlists are imported into the vehicle. It can take some time, depending on the USB device and the number of tracks.

During transmission, the tracks can be accessed via the file directory.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

179

External devices Entertainment

Number of tracks The data from up to four USB devices or for approx. 36,000 tracks can be stored in the vehicle. If a fifth device is connected or if more than 36,000 tracks are stored, then the data of existing tracks may be deleted.

Copy protection Music tracks with integrated Digital Rights Management (DRM) cannot be played.

Playback 1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "External devices"

3. Select the or symbol.

Playback begins with the first track.

The CD cover that belongs to the track appears on the Control Display, possibly after a few seconds.

Track search Selection is possible via:

> Playback lists

> Information: music style, artist; if applicable, composer, album, track.

> Additionally for USB devices: file directory; if applicable, composer.

Track titles are displayed if they have been stored in the Latin alphabet.

Starting the track search 1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "External devices"

3. Select the or symbol.

4. "Search"

5. Select desired category, e.g. "Genre", "Artist".

All entries are displayed in a list.

> Open "A-Z search" and enter the desired input. When a letter is entered, the results are filtered using this letter as the first letter. If multiple letters are entered, all results that contain that sequence are displayed.

> Select the desired entry from the list.

6. Select additional categories if desired.

Not all categories need to be selected. For example, if all of the tracks by a certain artist are to be displayed, call up that artist only. All of the tracks by that artist are then dis- played.

7. "Start play"

Restarting a track search "New search"

Playback lists To open playback lists.

1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "External devices"

3. Select the or symbol.

4. "Playlists"

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

180

Entertainment External devices

Current playback List of tracks currently being played.

1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "External devices"

3. Select the or symbol.

4. "Current playback"

Random play sequence The current list of tracks is played in random sequence.

1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "External devices"

3. Open "Options".

4. "Random"

Fast forward/reverse Press and hold the button.

Video playback

Overview Video playback possible via snap-in adapter. They can be operated via iDrive. Sound is output over the vehicle speakers.

Playback For your own safety, the video image is only dis- played up to approx. 2 mph/3 km/h and in some market-specific versions, only with the parking brake engaged or the selector lever of the auto- matic transmission is in the park position.

1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "External devices"

3. Select the symbol.

4. "Video"

5. Select the directory, if necessary.

To change to a higher level directory: move the controller to the left.

6. Select the desired video file to begin playback.

Video menu

Notes Do not expose the audio device to extreme environmental conditions, e.g. very high tem- peratures, refer to the operating instructions of the audio device.

Depending on the configuration of the audio files, e.g. bit rates greater than 256 Kbit/s, proper playback cannot always be ensured.

Information on connection > The connected audio device is supplied

with a max. power of 500 mA if supported by the device. For this reason, do not con- nect the device to a charging socket in the vehicle; otherwise, it may not be possible to ensure proper playback.

> Do not use force when plugging the con- nector into the USB interface.

> Do not connect devices such as fans or lamps to the USB audio interface.

> Do not connect USB hard drives.

> Do not use the USB audio interface to recharge external devices.

Bluetooth audio Overview > It is possible to use Bluetooth to play music

files from external devices, e.g. audio devices or mobile phones.

Using a mobile phone as an audio source, refer to page 178.

> Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

Symbol Format

Next video file

Previous video file

It may be necessary to click the symbol twice in order to play the previous video file.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

181

External devices Entertainment

> Sound is output over the vehicle speakers.

> The volume of the sound output depends on the device. If necessary, change the volume setting on the device.

> Up to four external devices can be paired with the vehicle.

Requirements > Suitable device. For information, go to

www.bmwusa.com/bluetooth.

> Device operational.

> Ignition switched on.

> Bluetooth activated in vehicle, refer to page 189, and in the device.

> Activating Bluetooth audio, refer to page 189.

> Bluetooth presets in the device are required, e.g. connection not confirmed or visible, refer to Owner's Manual for the device.

> A number with at least 4 and at most 16 digits has been established as the Bluetooth passkey. Only required once for pairing.

Pairing and connecting Only pair the device when the vehicle is stopped; otherwise, inattention may lead

to endangerment of passengers or other road users.<

1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "Bluetooth (audio)"

3. "Bluetooth audio" if applicable

4. "Add new phone"

The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is displayed.

5. To perform other operations on the device, refer to the owner's manual for the device: e.g. search for and connect Bluetooth device or a new device.

The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears on the device's display.

6. Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle on the device's display.

You will be prompted by iDrive or the device to enter the same Bluetooth passkey.

7. Enter the passkey and confirm.

8. Select desired functions with which the device is to be connected, e.g. "Audio".

9. "OK"

If the pairing was successful, the device is displayed as connected.

symbol displayed in white: device is active as an audio source.

If the pairing was not successful: what to do if, refer to page 183.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

182

Entertainment External devices

Connecting a particular device A device that has already been paired can be connected as an active audio source.

Connection is not possible if a data exchange is currently taking place via a mobile phone that is connected via Bluetooth.

Prerequisite If necessary, activate the audio connection of the desired device from the list of paired devices.

1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "Bluetooth (audio)"

3. "Bluetooth audio" if applicable

4. Select the desired device from the list of paired devices.

5. Open "Options".

6. "Configure phone"

7. Activate "Audio".

8. "OK"

Connecting a device 1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "Bluetooth (audio)"

3. "Bluetooth audio" if applicable

4. Select the desired device from the list of paired devices.

symbol displayed in white: device is active as an audio source.

Playback

General information > The display of track information depends on

the device.

> Operation via the device or iDrive are both possible.

> Playback is interrupted if a data exchange is taking place with a mobile phone that is connected via Bluetooth.

Starting playback 1. Connect device.

2. "CD/Multimedia"

3. "External devices"

4. Select the symbol.

5. Select the desired title from the list.

Playback menu Depending on the device, all functions may not be available.

Symbol Function

Next track

Fast forward: press and hold the symbol.

Previous track

Reverse: press and hold the symbol.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

183

External devices Entertainment

Disconnecting an audio connection 1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "Bluetooth (audio)"

3. Select the desired device from the list of connected devices.

4. Open "Options".

5. "Configure phone"

6. "Audio"

7. "OK"

With a mobile phone, only the audio connection is disconnected. All other connections remain active.

Unpairing device 1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "Bluetooth (audio)"

3. "Bluetooth audio" if applicable

4. Highlight the device to be unpaired.

5. Open "Options".

6. "Remove phone from list"

What to do if Information about suitable devices is available at www.bmwusa.com/bluetooth.

Suitable mobile phones, refer to page 188.

> Device not supported by vehicle.

If necessary, perform a software update, refer to page 184.

> Device could not be paired or connected.

Do the Bluetooth passkeys on the device and vehicle match? Enter the same passkey on the device and via iDrive.

Is the passkey input taking longer than 30 seconds? Repeat the pairing procedure.

Are too many Bluetooth devices connected to the device or to the vehicle? If necessary, delete the connections with other devices.

Is the mobile phone in power economy mode or does it only have a small amount of battery charge remaining? Charge the mobile phone in the snap-in adapter or via a charging cable.

Depending on the mobile phone, it may only be possible to connect one device to the vehicle. Unpair the connected device from the vehicle and only pair and connect one device.

Is the device no longer responding? Switch the device off and back on again.

Repeat the pairing procedure.

> No music can be played.

Start the program for playing music files on the device and if necessary, select a track via the device.

Activate and deactivate the radio mute on the radio control panel.

> Music files only play quietly.

Adjust volume settings on the device.

> Playback is interrupted by the press of a button or other messages on the device.

Switch off key tones and other acoustic signal on the device.

> Playback is interrupted by a phone call or traffic report and does not automatically continue.

Activate and deactivate the radio mute on the radio control panel.

> Playback is not possible when the mobile phone is connected via Bluetooth audio and at the same time via the extended connec- tivity of the music player in the mobile phone.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

184

Entertainment External devices

Disconnect one of the two connections, e.g. the audio connection, refer to page 183, and start playback again.

If you have gone through all items in the list and still cannot activate the desired function, please contact Customer Relations or your BMW center.

Software update The vehicle supports various external devices, depending on the software it is currently using. A software update can enable the vehicle to support, for example, new mobile phones or new external devices.

Software updates and associated, up-to-date instructions are available on the web page www.bmwusa.com/update.

Displaying current version The currently installed software is displayed.

1. "Settings"

2. "Software update"

3. "Show current version"

Select the desired version to display additional information.

Updating software by USB The software update can only be performed when stopped.

1. Save the file for the software update in the main directory of a USB data storage device.

2. Connect the USB data storage device to the USB audio interface in the center armrest. It is not possible to perform the update using the USB interface in the glove compart- ment.

3. "Settings"

4. "Software update"

5. "Update software"

6. "Start update"

7. "OK"

All of the listed software updates are installed.

Restoring to previous version The software version can be restored to before the last software update.

The restoring to the previous version can only be performed when stopped.

1. "Settings"

2. "Software update"

3. "Restore previous version"

4. Select "OK" twice.

All of the listed software updates are removed.

Note BMW Assist, Office functions, and connected devices may be temporarily unavailable during a software update or while restoring to the previous version. Wait a few minutes until the functions are available once more.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

185

External devices Entertainment

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

This chapter describes how to use the telephone, BMW Assist and BMW TeleService.

Communications

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

188

Communications Telephone

Telephone

Vehicle equipment In this chapter, all production, country, and optional equipment that is offered in the model range is described. Equipment is also described that is not available because of, for example, selected options or country version. This also applies to safety related functions and systems.

Overview

The concept Mobile phones or other external devices, e.g. audio players, can be connected to the vehicle via Bluetooth.

Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

After being paired once, when the ignition is switched on, these devices are automatically detected as soon as they are present in the vehicle and can be controlled via iDrive, by the buttons on the steering wheel, and by voice.

Depending on whether they are functioning as a telephone and/or as an audio source, external devices can be used via the vehicle. The tele- phone functions will be described below. Oper- ation of audio functions, refer to page 180.

Up to four external devices can be paired.

It may be necessary for some functions to be activated by the mobile phone provider or service provider.

Only make entries when traffic conditions permit. Do not hold the mobile phone in

your hand while you are driving; use the hands- free system instead. Otherwise, you may endanger vehicle occupants and other road users.<

Snap-in adapter The snap-in adapter makes it possible:

> Accommodate the mobile phone.

> Recharge its battery.

> Connect it to an external antenna of the vehicle.

This assures a better network connection and constant sound quality.

Suitable mobile phones For precise information about which mobile phones and external devices with a Bluetooth interface are supported by the mobile phone preparation, go to www.bmwusa.com/ bluetooth.

Displaying vehicle identification number and software part number Checking which mobile phones are supported by the mobile phone preparation requires the vehicle identification number and software part number. The software version of the mobile phone may also be required.

1. "Telephone"

2. Open "Options".

3. "Bluetooth info"

4. "Display system information"

With a certain software version, these suitable mobile phones support the vehicle functions described below.

With other mobile phones or software versions, malfunctions may occur.

A mobile phone that is connected to the vehicle should not be operated via the mobile phone keypad; otherwise, malfunctions may occur.

It is possible to perform a software update, refer to page 184.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

189

Telephone Communications

Notes At high temperatures, the charging function of the mobile phone may be limited and some functions may no longer be carried out.

When using the mobile phone via the vehicle, follow the operating instructions of the mobile phone.

Pairing/unpairing mobile phone

General information The following functions are available:

> Using a mobile phone as a telephone.

> Using the mobile phone as an auxiliary phone.

> Using the mobile phone as an audio source.

> Using an audio device as an audio source, refer to page 180.

Requirements > Suitable mobile phone, refer to page 188.

> Mobile phone operational.

> Bluetooth activated in vehicle, refer to page 191, and in the mobile phone.

> Bluetooth presets in the mobile phone are required, e.g. connection not confirmed or visible, refer to Owner's Manual for the mobile phone.

> Deactivating Bluetooth audio, refer to page 189.

> A number with at least 4 and at most 16 digits has been established as the Bluetooth passkey. Only required once for pairing.

> Ignition switched on.

Activating/deactivating Bluetooth link Bluetooth is not permitted everywhere. Comply with all safety guidelines and regulations.

1. "Telephone"

2. Open "Options".

3. "Bluetooth"

Additional functions

Auxiliary phone A mobile phone can be used as an auxiliary phone.

Incoming calls to the auxiliary phone can be accepted, refer to page 193. Missed calls to the auxiliary phone are shown in the Control Display.

Office Contacts, appointments, tasks, notes, text messages, and e-mails are imported from the mobile phone into the vehicle.

Audio source A mobile phone can be used as an audio source.

Activating/deactivating additional functions To use these functions in the vehicle, activate them before pairing. For information on suitable mobile phones that support these functions, refer to page 188.

1. "Telephone"

2. "Bluetooth (phone)"

3. Open "Options".

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

190

Communications Telephone

4. "Configure Bluetooth"

5. Select the desired additional function:

> "Additional telephone"

> "Office"

> "Bluetooth audio"

If an additional function is deactivated, it cannot be assigned to a phone.

Pairing and connecting a device Only pair the device when the vehicle is stopped; otherwise, inattention may lead

to endangerment of passengers or other road users.<

1. "Telephone"

2. "Bluetooth (phone)"

3. "Add new phone"

The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is displayed.

4. To perform other operations on the mobile phone, refer to the owner's manual for the device: e.g. search for and connect Bluetooth device or a new device.

The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears on the mobile phone display.

5. Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle on the mobile phone display.

6. You will be prompted by iDrive or the mobile phone to enter the same Bluetooth passkey.

Enter the passkey and confirm.

or

Compare the control number in the vehi- cle's display to the control number of the mobile phone. Confirm the control number in the mobile phone and in the vehicle.

"OK"

7. Select the functions for which the mobile phone is to be used.

8. "OK"

If pairing was successful, the mobile phone appears at the top of the list of devices.

Functions supported by the mobile phone and audio device are displayed as symbols during the pairing.

White symbol: function active.

Gray symbol: function inactive.

Four devices can be paired with the vehicle simultaneously. Three devices can be con- nected to the vehicle simultaneously.

If the pairing was not successful: what to do if, refer to page 192.

Symbol Function

Telephone

Auxiliary phone

Audio source

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

191

Telephone Communications

Following the initial pairing > The mobile phone is detected/connected in

the vehicle within a short period of time when the engine is running or the ignition is switched on.

> The phone book entries of the telephone that are stored on the SIM card or the mobile phone are imported into the vehicle once the device is detected, depending on the mobile phone.

> Four devices can be paired.

> Specific settings may be necessary in some mobile phones, e.g. authorization or a secure connection, refer to the Owner's Manual for the mobile phone.

Connecting a particular device 1. "Telephone"

2. "Bluetooth (phone)"

All paired devices are listed.

3. Select the device to be connected.

The functions assigned before the unpairing of the device are assigned to the device when it is reconnected. If a device is already connected, then these functions are deactivated if necessary.

Configuring devices Additional functions can be activated or deactivated in paired and connected devices.

1. "Telephone"

2. "Bluetooth (phone)"

3. Highlight the device to be configured.

4. Open "Options".

5. "Configure phone"

6. Select the desired functions. At least one function must be selected.

> "Telephone"

> "Additional telephone"

> "Audio"

7. "OK"

If a device is assigned a function, this may deac- tivate the function in an already connected device and cause the other device to be unpaired.

Exchanging the telephone and auxiliary phone If the telephone and auxiliary phone are con- nected to the vehicle, the function can be swapped between the two devices.

1. "Telephone"

2. "Bluetooth (phone)"

3. "Swap phone/addit. phone"

Unpairing device 1. "Telephone"

2. "Bluetooth (phone)"

All paired devices are listed.

3. Highlight the device to be unpaired.

4. Open "Options".

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

192

Communications Telephone

5. "Remove phone from list"

What to do if For information on suitable mobile phones, refer to page 188.

The mobile phone could not be paired or con- nected.

> Is Bluetooth activated in the vehicle and in the mobile phone? Activate Bluetooth in the vehicle and in the mobile phone.

> Do the Bluetooth passkeys on the mobile phone and the vehicle match? Enter the same passkey on the mobile phone and via iDrive.

> Is the passkey input taking longer than 30 seconds? Repeat the pairing procedure.

> Are too many Bluetooth devices connected to the mobile phone? If so, delete the con- nections with other devices on the mobile phone.

> Is the audio connection activated? Deacti- vate the audio connection.

> Is the mobile phone in power economy mode or does it only have a small amount of battery charge remaining? Charge the mobile phone in the snap-in adapter or via a charging cable.

> Depending on the mobile phone, it may only be possible to connect one device to the vehicle. Unpair the connected device from the vehicle and only pair and connect one device.

Is the mobile phone no longer responding?

> Switch the mobile phone off and back on again. Repeat the pairing procedure.

> Is the ambient temperature too high or too low? Do not subject your mobile phone to extreme ambient temperatures.

Telephone functions not possible.

> Is the mobile phone paired as an auxiliary phone and is the auxiliary phone function deactivated? Activate the function.

> Outgoing call not possible? Connect the mobile phone as a telephone.

Phone book entries are not displayed, not all of them are displayed, or they are displayed incompletely.

> The transfer of phone book entries has not yet completed.

> In some cases, only the phone book entries of the mobile phone or the SIM card will be transferred.

> It may not be possible to display phone book entries with special characters.

> The number of phone book entries to be stored is too high.

> The data volume of the phone book entry is too great, e.g. due to additionally stored information such as notes? Reduce the data volume.

> Is the mobile phone connected as an audio source or auxiliary phone? The mobile phone must be connected as a telephone.

The telephone connection quality is low.

> Depending on the mobile phone, it is possi- ble to adjust the strength of the Bluetooth signal.

> Insert the mobile phone into the snap-in adapter or place it in the vicinity of the center console.

> Adjust the volume of the microphone and speaker separately.

If you have gone through all items in the list and still cannot activate the desired function, please check the website www.bmw.com/bluetooth for further notes or contact Customer Relations or a BMW center.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

193

Telephone Communications

Operation

Adjusting volume

Turn the knob until the desired volume is reached. The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

The vehicle automatically adjusts the volume of the microphone on the mobile phone and the volume of the person on the phone with you. Depending on the mobile phone, it may be necessary to adjust the volumes.

Adjustments are only possible during a call and must be carried out separately for each phone. When the telephone is unpaired, this deletes the settings.

1. "Settings"

2. "Tone"

3. "Volume settings"

4. To select the desired setting: "Microphone" or "Loudspeak."

5. To adjust: turn the controller.

6. To store: press the controller.

Incoming call

Receiving calls If the number of the caller is stored in the phone book and is transmitted by the network, then the name and number of the contact are displayed; otherwise, only the number is displayed.

If a contact is assigned more than one phone number, then only the name of the caller is displayed.

With calls to the auxiliary phone, only the number is displayed if it is transmitted by the network.

An incoming call to a phone is automatically rejected if a call on the other phone is currently active.

Accepting a call Press the button on the steering wheel

or

"Accept"

Rejecting a call "Reject"

The caller is connected to your mailbox if it has been activated.

Ending a call Press the button on the steering wheel

or

1. "Telephone"

2. "End call"

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

194

Communications Telephone

Entering phone numbers

Dialing a number 1. "Telephone"

2. "Dial number"

3. Select the digits individually.

4. Select the symbol.

It is also possible to enter phone numbers by voice.

Calls with multiple parties

General information It is possible to switch between two calls or to connect two calls to establish a conference call. These functions must be supported by the mobile phone and by the service provider.

Accepting a call while speaking to another party This function may have to be activated by the service provider and the mobile phone may need to be set for this.

When a second call comes in during an ongoing call, a call-waiting signal sounds.

"Accept"

The call is accepted and the existing call is put on hold.

Establishing a second call Establish another call during an active call.

1. "Telephone"

2. "Active calls"

3. "Hold"

The existing call is put on hold.

4. Dial the new phone number or select it from a list.

"Return"

The call on hold is continued.

Switching between two calls, toggling Active call: highlighted.

The call on hold is identified with: "on hold...".

"Swap calls"

The phone switches to the call on hold.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

195

Telephone Communications

Establishing a conference call Two calls can be connected to a single telephone conference call.

1. Establish two calls.

2. "Conference call"

When terminating a conference call, both calls are ended. If one call is terminated by another party, the other call can be continued.

Muting the microphone The microphone can be muted in active calls.

1. "Telephone"

2. "Active calls"

3. "Microphone mute"

The muted microphone is automatically activated:

> If a new call is made.

> When switching between callers on hold.

Keypad dialing Use keypad dialing to gain access to network services or to control devices, e.g. to remotely access an answering machine. This requires the DTMF code.

1. "Telephone"

2. Select contact from a list or "Dial number"

3. "Keypad dialing"

4. Enter a DTMF code.

Phone book

Displays The phone book accesses the contacts of the telephone and shows all contacts for which a phone number is entered. The entries can be selected to make a call.

1. "Telephone"

2. "Phone book"

A symbol indicates the storage location of the contacts, refer to page 202.

Calling a contact

Contacts with a stored phone number: select the desired contact. The connection is established.

Contacts with more than one stored phone number: select the desired contact and then select the phone number. The connection is established.

Symbol Meaning

Contact with a stored phone number.

Contact with more than one stored phone number.

Call not possible. The mobile phone has no reception or network or a Ser- vice Request is currently active.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

196

Communications Telephone

Editing a contact Changing entries in the "Contacts" menu. If a contact is changed, the changes are not stored in the mobile phone. A copy of the entry is stored in the vehicle.

1. Highlight the contact.

2. Open "Options".

3. "Edit entry"

The contact can be edited.

Redialing

General information The list of dialed numbers in the mobile phone are transferred to the vehicle, depending on the mobile phone. In some cases, only numbers that were dialed from the vehicle are displayed.

The last 20 phone numbers dialed are dis- played. The sorting of the phone numbers depends on the mobile phone.

Dialing the number via iDrive 1. "Telephone"

2. "Redial"

3. Select the desired entry and phone number, if necessary.

The connection is established.

Deleting a single entry or all entries Deleting entries depends upon the mobile phone.

1. Highlight the entry.

2. Open "Options".

3. "Delete entry" or "Delete list".

Saving an entry in the contacts 1. Highlight the entry.

2. Open "Options".

3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing contact".

4. Select contact if necessary.

5. Select the type of number: "Home", "Business", "Mobile" or "Other".

6. Complete the entries if necessary.

7. "Store contact"

Received calls

Displaying calls The list of received calls in the mobile phone is transferred into the vehicle, depending on the mobile phone. In some cases, only calls that were received in the vehicle are displayed.

The last 20 calls received are displayed. The sorting and displaying of phone numbers depends on the mobile phone.

1. "Telephone"

2. "Received calls"

Calling a number from the list Select an entry.

The connection is established.

Deleting a single entry or all entries Deleting entries depends upon the mobile phone.

1. Highlight the entry.

2. Open "Options".

3. "Delete entry" or "Delete list".

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

197

Telephone Communications

Saving an entry in the contacts 1. Highlight the entry.

2. Open "Options".

3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing contact".

4. Select contact if necessary.

5. Select the type of number: "Home", "Business", "Mobile" or "Other".

6. Complete the entries if necessary.

7. "Store contact"

Hands-free system

General information Calls being conducted using the hands-free system can be continued using the mobile phone and vice versa.

From the mobile phone to the hands- free system Calls that have been initiated from outside the Bluetooth range of the vehicle can be continued using the hands-free system if the ignition is switched on.

Depending on the mobile phone, the call is automatically switched to hands-free mode.

If the switch does not occur automatically, then follow the instructions that appear on the dis- play of the mobile phone, also refer to the Owner's Manual for the mobile phone.

From hands-free system to mobile phone Calls being conducted using the hands-free system can also be continued using the mobile phone if so desired, depending on the mobile phone.

At this point, follow the instructions that appear on the display of the mobile phone, also refer to the Owner's Manual for the mobile phone.

Operation by voice With voice activation system: Operation, refer to page 27.

Without voice activation system: Depending upon the equipment, the mobile phone can be voice-operated as described below.

The list of short commands in the Owner's Manual does not apply to this type of voice operation.

The concept > The mobile phone can be operated without

removing your hand from the steering wheel.

> In many cases, the entry process is sup- ported by means of announcements or questions.

> {...} Verbal instructions to use with the voice operation system.

Voice commands

Activating voice activation system 1. Press the button on the steering wheel.

2. Say the command.

Finishing voice input Press the button on the steering wheel or

Possible commands

Having possible commands read aloud The system understands default commands that must be spoken word for word.

Possible commands are read aloud.

Digits from zero to nine are recognized.

{Cancel}.

{Help}.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

198

Communications Telephone

Each digit can be spoken individually or com- bined into a sequence to accelerate the entry process.

Using alternative commands There are often a number of commands to run a function, e.g.:

Example: dialing phone numbers 1. Press the button on the steering wheel.

2. {Dial number}

The system replies: {{Please say the number}}.

3. For example: {123 456 7890}

The system replies: {{123 456 7890. Continue?}}.

4. {Dial}

The system replies: {{Dialing number}}.

Calling

Dialing phone numbers

The connection to the desired subscriber is established.

Correcting phone number Digit sequences can be deleted after the system has repeated the digits.

The command can be repeated as often as necessary.

Deleting phone number

All digits entered up to this point are deleted.

Redialing

Voice phone book Depending on how your vehicle is equipped, it may be necessary to create your own voice phone book.

The entries must be entered using voice com- mands and are separate from the memory in the mobile phone. Up to 50 entries can be set up.

Storing the entry

Deleting the entry

Deleting all entries

Reading and selecting the entries

Selecting an entry

{Select name} or {Name}.

1. {Dial number}.

2. Say the phone number.

3. {Dial}.

{Correct number}.

{Delete}.

{Redial}.

1. {Save name}.

2. Say the name aloud. Do not exceed a speaking duration of about 2 seconds.

3. Say the phone number after being prompted to do so by the system.

4. {Save number}.

1. {Delete name}.

2. Say the name when prompted.

3. Confirm request: {Yes}

1. {Delete phonebook}. The dialog for deleting phone book is opened.

2. Confirm request: {Yes}

3. Confirm request again: {Yes}

1. {Read phonebook}. The dialog for reading phone book is opened.

2. {Dial number}, when the desired entry is read aloud.

1. {Select name}.

2. Say the name when prompted.

3. Confirm request: {Yes}

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

199

Telephone Communications

Adjusting volume Turn knob during announcement.

> The volume remains the same, even if the volume of other audio sources is changed.

> The volume is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Notes

Notes on Emergency Requests Do not use the voice operation system to ini- tiate an emergency call. In stressful situations, the voice and vocal pitch can change. This can unnecessarily delay the establishment of a tele- phone connection.

Instead, use the SOS button, refer to page 250, in the vicinity of the interior rearview mirror.

Ambient conditions > Say the commands, numbers and letters

smoothly and with normal volume, empha- sis and speed.

> Always say the commands in the language of the system. The language of the voice operation of the mobile phone is preset and cannot be changed via the Control Display.

> Keep the doors, windows, glass roof, and convertible top closed to prevent interfer- ence from outside noise.

> Avoid ambient noise in the vehicle while speaking.

Snap-in adapter

General information Detailed information on snap-in adapters that compatibly support mobile phone functions can be found at your BMW center.

Notes At high temperatures, the charging function of the mobile phone may be limited and some functions may no longer be carried out.

When using the mobile phone via the vehicle, follow the operating instructions of the mobile phone.

Installation location In the center armrest.

Inserting snap-in adapter 1. Press the button and remove the cover.

2. Insert the snap-in adapter at the front, arrow 1, and press downward, arrow 2, until it clicks into place.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

200

Communications Telephone

Inserting mobile phone

1. Depending on the mobile phone, it may be necessary to remove the protective cap of the antenna connector and from the USB connection of the mobile phone.

2. Push the mobile phone with the buttons facing upward toward the electrical connec- tions and press down until it engages.

Removing mobile phone

Press the button and remove the mobile phone.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

201

Office Communications

Office

Vehicle equipment In this chapter, all production, country, and optional equipment that is offered in the model range is described. Equipment is also described that is not available because of, for example, selected options or country version. This also applies to safety related functions and systems.

Overview

General information Contacts, appointments, tasks, notes, text messages and mobile phone e-mails can be displayed using the Control Display if the mobile phone compatibly supports these func- tions and the required Bluetooth radio stan- dards.

For information about which mobile phones and functions support the functions of Office, go to www.bmwusa.com/bluetooth.

A limited number of compatible mobile phones are available for Office.

Contents are only displayed completely when the vehicle is stopped.

Only read access to the mobile phone is possible.

Do not use Office while driving. Make entries only when traffic and road condi-

tions permit; otherwise, you may endanger vehicle occupants and other road users by being distracted.<

Requirements > A suitable mobile phone is paired with the

vehicle and connected. In some mobile phones, the data access to the mobile phone must be confirmed.

> Time zone, time, and date, refer to page 82, are correctly set on the Control Display and on the mobile phone in order, for example, to correctly display appointments.

> Office is activated, refer to page 189.

Updating Every time that the mobile phone is connected to the vehicle, data are updated. Appointments, tasks, notes and reminders can be updated separately.

1. "Office"

2. "Current office", "Calendar", "Tasks", "Notes" or "Reminders"

3. Open "Options".

4. "Update data"

Data from the mobile phone are again transferred to the vehicle.

Current office The number of unread messages and active tasks as well as upcoming appointments are displayed.

1. "Office"

2. "Current office"

3. Selecting the desired entry to display details.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

202

Communications Office

Contacts

General information Contacts can be created and edited. The con- tacts from the mobile phone are displayed as well if this function is supported by the mobile phone. The addresses can be used as destina- tions for navigation and the phone numbers can be dialed.

Displaying contacts 1. "Office"

2. "Contacts"

All contacts are listed in alphabetical order. Depending on the number of contacts, an A-Z search is offered.

A symbol indicates the storage location of the contacts:

Dialing phone numbers 1. Select the desired contact.

2. Select phone number.

The connection is established.

Editing a contact 1. Select the desired contact.

2. "Edit contact"

3. Change the entries.

4. "Store contact in vehicle"

If a contact is changed, the changes are not stored in the mobile phone. A copy of the entry is stored in the vehicle, and only this copy is displayed.

Selecting a contact as a destination 1. Select the desired contact.

2. Select address.

With contacts from the mobile phone, the address must be compared with the naviga- tion data stored in the vehicle. In this case:

Correct the address.

3. "Start guidance" or "Add as another des- tination"

Checking the address as a destination An address that is to be used in route guidance must correspond to the navigation data stored in the vehicle. The address can be checked to ensure this.

1. Select the desired contact and highlight the address.

2. Open "Options".

3. "Check as destination"

4. Correct and store the address, if necessary.

Symbol Storage location

No symbol In the vehicle; the address has not been checked as a destina- tion.

In the vehicle; the address has been checked as a destination.

Mobile phone

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

203

Office Communications

If the address is corrected and stored, then a copy is established in the vehicle. The address is not changed on the mobile phone.

New contact A contact can be associated with up to 8 phone numbers, 2 addresses, 3 email addresses, and one Internet address.

1. "Office"

2. "Contacts"

3. Open "Options".

4. "New contact"

5. If input boxes are already filled with previous entries: "Delete input fields"

6. To fill in the entry fields: select the symbol next to the entry field.

7. Enter text and assign a contact type.

8. When equipped with a navigation system: enter address. It is only possible to enter addresses that are contained in the naviga- tion data stored in the vehicle. This ensures that route guidance is possible for all addresses.

9. "Accept address" if necessary

10. "Store contact in vehicle"

Contact types Phone numbers and addresses can be assigned various contact types.

Defining a home address It is possible to store a home address. It is listed at the beginning of the contacts.

1. "Home"

2. Create a contact.

3. "Store contact in vehicle"

Selecting name sorting Names can be displayed in different orders.

1. "Office"

2. "Contacts"

3. Open "Options".

4. "Display: last, first name" or "Display: first, last name"

Depending on how the contacts are stored in your mobile phone, the sorting of names can differ from the sorting selected.

Displaying contact pictures Pictures stored with contacts are stored in the vehicle when the mobile phone is connected to the vehicle. The mobile phone must support this function.

1. "Office"

2. "Contacts"

3. Open "Options".

Symbol Meaning

Private phone number

Business phone number

Mobile phone number

Other phone number

Private address

Business address

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

204

Communications Office

4. "Configure Bluetooth"

5. "Show images"

The display of all contact pictures is activated or deactivated.

Deleting contacts Only contacts that are stored in the vehicle are deleted. The contacts on the mobile phone cannot be deleted.

1. "Office"

2. "Contacts"

3. Highlight the contact.

4. "Options"

5. "Delete contact" or "Delete all contacts".

Messages

General information The displaying of text messages and emails from the mobile phone depends on whether the mobile phone supports transmission into the vehicle from the mobile phone. Text messages and e-mails may not be supported by the ser- vice provider or the function may have to be separately activated. After a mobile phone is paired for the first time, the transmission may take several minutes. Messages are only dis- played completely when the vehicle is stopped. Messages from the auxiliary phone are not transmitted.

To display various messages:

> Text messages.

> Messages from My info.

> Messages from the BMW Concierge service.

> Messages from BMW Info.

> Emails from the mobile phone.

Displaying messages 1. "Office"

2. "Messages"

Message type A symbol indicates the type of message.

Read message.

Unread message.

Filtering message lists A message list can be filtered if there is more than one message type.

1. "Filter:"

2. Select the message type.

> "All" All messages are displayed.

> "E-mail" Only text messages from mobile phones are displayed.

> "Services messages" Only messages from the BMW Con- cierge service, My Info, and BMW Info are displayed.

> "Text message" Only text messages from mobile phones are displayed.

Symbol Message type

Text message

My Info

Message from the Concierge service, refer to page 213

Messages from BMW Info, refer to page 206

E-mail from mobile phone

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

205

Office Communications

Deleting messages Messages from the Concierge service, My Info, BMW Info, and BMW Online can be deleted.

To delete a message:

1. "Office"

2. "Messages"

3. Select the desired message.

4. Open "Options".

5. Open "Delete message".

To delete all messages:

1. "Office"

2. "Messages"

3. Open "Options".

4. "Delete all messages"

Text message

Calling a text message sender 1. Select the desired message.

2. Select the symbol.

Saving sender in the contacts 1. Highlight the desired message.

2. Open "Options".

3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing contact"

Using contact data Contact data from deadlines, tasks, text mes- sages, e-mails and notes can be stored or selected, see page 208.

Reading text messages aloud Having text messages read aloud, refer to page 209.

My Info

Selecting additional functions Additional functions are available when a message is selected.

Messages from the Concierge service

Saving an address 1. Select the desired message.

2. Open "Options".

3. "Store contact in vehicle"

Selecting additional functions Additional functions are available when a message is selected.

Symbol Function

"Start guidance" or "Add as another destination"

"Call"

If the message contains a number, a telephone connection is estab- lished.

"Select phone number"

If the message contains more than one number, select the desired number from the list. A telephone connection is established.

Symbol Function

"Start guidance" or "Add as another destination"

"Call"

If the message contains a number, a telephone connection is estab- lished.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

206

Communications Office

BMW Info

General information Messages from BMW about technical campaigns and news from BMW.

Displaying messages

Select the desired message.

Selecting additional functions The following functions are available when a message is selected:

E-mail

Displaying e-mail 1. "Office"

2. "Messages"

3. Select the desired message.

Displaying e-mail contacts If the sender and receiver of an e-mail were transmitted from a mobile phone, they will be displayed in the e-mail.

"Sender/Recipient"

If the e-mail address is stored in the contacts, then the contact is displayed. Select contact to display details.

If the e-mail address is not stored in the contacts, then it may be that only the e-mail address is displayed.

Using contact data Contact data from deadlines, tasks, text mes- sages, e-mails and notes can be stored or selected, see page 208.

Deactivating entire display When opening an e-mail when in the vehicle, it is completely transferred to the vehicle. This may result in charges.

1. "Office"

2. "Messages"

3. Open "Options".

"Select phone number"

If the message contains more than one number, select the desired number from the list. A telephone connection is established.

"Further information"

Displaying additional information.

Symbol Function

"Further information"

Detailed information about a mes- sage is displayed. This does not incur any costs.

"Start guidance" or "Add as another destination"

Symbol Function

"Call"

If the message contains a number, a telephone connection is estab- lished.

"Select phone number"

If the message contains more than one number, select the desired number from the list. A telephone connection is established.

Symbol Function

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

207

Office Communications

4. "Fully download e-mails"

Only a part of an e-mail from a mobile phone is loaded into the vehicle.

Reading e-mail Reading e-mail, see page 209.

Calendar

Displaying calendar Appointments from the last 20 days and the next 50 days can be displayed.

1. "Office"

2. "Calendar"

Appointments of the current day are displayed.

Selecting calendar day 1. Select date.

2. Select desired day or date.

> "Next day"

> "Date:"

> "Previous day"

> "Today"

Displaying appointment 1. Select the desired appointment.

2. To scroll through appointment, if necessary:

> Turn the controller.

> Select the symbol.

Using contact data Contact data from deadlines, tasks, text mes- sages, e-mails and notes can be stored or selected, see page 208.

Reading an appointment aloud Reading an appointment aloud, refer to page 209.

Tasks

Displaying task list Display open tasks that must be completed within the next 90 days.

1. "Office"

2. "Tasks"

Sorting task list 1. Select the top line in the task list.

2. To select a sorting criterion:

> "Priority (!)"

> "Subject"

> "Due date"

Displaying task 1. Select the desired task.

2. To scroll through the task, if necessary:

> Turn the controller.

> Select the symbol.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

208

Communications Office

Using contact data Contact data from deadlines, tasks, text mes- sages, e-mails and notes can be stored or selected, see page 208.

Reading a task aloud Reading a task aloud, refer to page 209.

Notes

Displaying notes 1. "Office"

2. "Notes"

All notes are displayed.

Displaying a note 1. Select the desired note.

2. To scroll through the note, if necessary:

> Turn the controller.

> Select the symbol.

Using contact data Contact data from deadlines, tasks, text messages, e-mails and notes can be stored or selected, see page 208.

Reading a note aloud Reading a note aloud, refer to page 209.

Reminders

Displaying reminders Reminders for imminent appointments and tasks are displayed. After an appointment has passed or a task is due, the reminder is no longer displayed.

1. "Office"

2. "Reminders"

3. Select the desired reminder.

The associated appointment or task is displayed.

Using contact data

Overview Contact data from deadlines, tasks, text mes- sages, e-mails and notes can be stored or selected.

To display a contact or dial a phone number 1. "Use contact data"

2. To display a contact or dial a phone number:

> Select a contact to display a detailed view of the contact.

> Select a phone number to directly establish a connection.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

209

Office Communications

Storing contact data 1. "Use contact data"

2. Highlight a phone number or e-mail address.

3. Open "Options".

4. "Add to existing contact" or "Store as new contact"

Reading aloud Text messages, emails, appointments, tasks, and notes can be read aloud.

1. Select the desired message, appointment, task, or note.

2. Select the symbol.

While the message is being read aloud, you have the following options:

> "Pause"

Interrupt the reading. Select again to resume the reading.

> "Back to beginning"

Read message again from the beginning.

> Select the symbol.

Skip back one paragraph.

> Select the symbol.

Skip over a paragraph.

> To terminate the reading, move the control- ler toward the left.

What to do if For information on suitable mobile phones, refer to page 188.

> Appointments, tasks, notes, texts, or emails from the mobile phone are not displayed?

The mobile phone is not suitable for the missing function or is not correctly connected.

The mobile phone has not been assigned the Office function.

The mobile phone is connected as an auxil- iary phone.

The appointments are older than 20 days and are more than 50 days in the future.

The tasks have been marked as completed or are more than 90 days in the future.

Depending on the number of appointments, tasks, notes, and messages stored in the mobile phone, not all of them are displayed in the vehicle.

> Appointments or tasks from the mobile phone are not being displayed at the correct time?

The time zone, time, or date is incorrectly set in the Control Display and in the mobile phone.

> Texts of entries are not displayed completely?

Texts are already shortened by the mobile phone.

Synchronization between the mobile phone and vehicle can take a few minutes.

> Contact pictures are not being displayed?

Up to max. 200 contact pictures can be stored in the vehicle.

> If you have gone through all items in the list and still cannot activate the desired func- tion please contact Customer Relations or a BMW center.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

210

Communications Contacts

Contacts

Vehicle equipment In this chapter, all production, country, and optional equipment that is offered in the model range is described. Equipment is also described that is not available because of, for example, selected options or country version. This also applies to safety related functions and systems.

Note In equipment packages without mobile phone preparation.

General information Contacts can be created and edited. The addresses can be used as destinations for navigation.

New contact 1. "Contacts"

2. "New contact"

3. If input boxes are already filled with previous entries: "Delete input fields"

4. To fill in the entry fields: select the symbol next to the entry field.

5. Entering text, refer to page 25.

When equipped with a navigation system: enter address. It is only possible to enter addresses that are contained in the naviga- tion data stored in the vehicle. This ensures that route guidance is possible for all addresses.

6. "Store" if necessary

7. "Store contact in vehicle"

Defining a home address It is possible to store a home address. It is listed at the beginning of the contacts.

1. "Home"

2. Create a contact.

3. "Store contact in vehicle"

My contacts

General information List of all contacts that are stored in the vehicle.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

211

Contacts Communications

Displaying contacts 1. "Contacts"

2. "My contacts"

All contacts are listed in alphabetical order. Depending on the number of contacts, an A-Z search is offered.

A symbol indicates the storage location of the contacts:

Editing a contact 1. Select the desired contact.

2. "Edit contact"

3. Change the entries.

4. Move the controller to the left.

5. "Yes"

Selecting a contact as a destination 1. Select the desired contact.

2. Select address.

3. "Start guidance" or "Add as another desti- nation"

Checking the address as a destination An address that is to be used in route guidance must correspond to the navigation data stored in the vehicle. The address can be checked to ensure this.

1. Select the desired contact and highlight the address.

2. Open "Options".

3. "Check as destination"

4. Correct and store the address, if necessary.

Selecting name sorting Names can be displayed in different orders.

1. "My contacts"

2. Open "Options".

3. "Display: last, first name" or "Display: first, last name"

Exporting/importing contacts Contacts can be exported and imported using Personal Profile, refer to page 32.

Deleting contacts 1. "My contacts"

2. Highlight the contact.

3. Open "Options".

4. "Delete contact" or "Delete all contacts".

Symbol Storage location

No symbol In the vehicle; the address has not been checked as a destina- tion.

In the vehicle; the address has been checked as a destination.

Mobile phone

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

212

Communications ConnectedDrive

ConnectedDrive

Vehicle equipment In this chapter, all production, country, and optional equipment that is offered in the model range is described. Equipment is also described that is not available because of, for example, selected options or country version. This also applies to safety related functions and systems.

BMW Assist

General information BMW Assist provides a number of different ser- vices. For example, the position data of the vehicle can be transmitted to the BMW Assist Response Center when an Emergency Request is sent.

Many BMW Assist services depend on the contract individually agreed upon.

After the contract has expired, the BMW Assist system will be deactivated by the BMW Assist Response Center without you having to visit a BMW center. After the BMW Assist system has been deactivated, no BMW Assist services will be available. The BMW Assist system can be reactivated by a BMW center after a new contract has been signed.

Requirements > The installed BMW Assist system is logged

into a mobile phone network. This network must be capable of transmitting the services.

> To transmit position data, the vehicle must be able to determine its current position.

> To activate and update BMW Assist, a GPS signal must be available.

> The BMW Assist service contract was signed with your BMW center or with the BMW Assist Response Center. The service must have been fully enabled.

> BMW Assist is activated.

Services offered > Emergency Request: when you press the

SOS button, a connection to the BMW Assist Response Center is established. The BMW Assist Response Center then speaks with you and takes further steps to help you.

> Automatic Emergency Request: under cer- tain conditions, a connection to the BMW Assist Response Center is established after a serious accident. If possible, the BMW Assist Response Center then speaks with you and takes further steps to help you.

> Enhanced Roadside Assistance: BMW Roadside Assistance can be contacted if assistance is needed in the event of a breakdown. If possible, the vehicle data and position data are transmitted during this call.

> Customer Relations: connection to Customer Relations for information on all aspects of your vehicle.

> BMW TeleService: the data on your vehi- cle's service status or required inspections are transmitted to your BMW center, either automatically before a service due date or when you request a service appointment.

> Remote Door Unlock: the BMW Assist Response Center provides assistance if, for example, the remote control is not available and the vehicle needs to be opened.

> Stolen Vehicle Recovery: after you report to the police that your vehicle was stolen, the BMW Assist Response Center can deter- mine its position.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

213

ConnectedDrive Communications

> In addition, the optional Convenience Plan offers Concierge service and information on route planning, the traffic situation and weather. Using Critical Calling, a limited number of calls can be made via the BMW Assist Response Center, for example if the mobile phone is not available or discharged. Press the SOS button to contact the BMW Assist Response Center.

TeleService

General information TeleService supports communication with your BMW center.

> Data on the vehicle's service requirements can be sent directly to the BMW center. In this way, the BMW center can plan its work in advance. This shortens the duration of the service appointment.

> In the event of a breakdown, data on the vehicle's condition can be sent directly to Roadside Assistance.

> The service varies by country.

> Connection may incur charges.

> Services may be restricted abroad.

Requirements > BMW Assist is activated.

> Wireless reception is available.

> Ignition switched on.

Using TeleService Generally, TeleService is activated in the vehicle.

If TeleService is not activated, it is possible to establish a voice contact to the BMW Group Mobile Service.

For additional uses or to deactivate the ser- vices, consult your BMW center or contact Customer Relations.

Concierge service

General information The Concierge service of BMW Assist will inform you, for example, about upcoming events, filling station, or hotels and supplies you with their phone numbers and addresses. Many hotels can be booked directly through the BMW Assist Concierge service. Use of the Concierge service requires an additional activation by the BMW Assist Response Center.

Starting the Concierge service 1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"

2. "Concierge"

3. "Start service"

A voice contact with the BMW Concierge service is established. Phone numbers and addresses can be transmitted as a message.

Messages Information about messages, refer to page 204.

Roadside Assistance

At a glance BMW Roadside Assistance can be contacted if assistance is needed in the event of a break- down.

Contact with BMW Roadside Assistance can also be established using a Check Control message, refer to page 84.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

214

Communications ConnectedDrive

Starting BMW Roadside Assistance without BMW Assist or TeleService 1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"

2. "Roadside Assistance"

The Roadside Assistance number is dis- played. If a mobile phone is paired, a con- nection to BMW Roadside Assistance is established.

Starting BMW Roadside Assistance with BMW Assist or TeleService In a vehicle with TeleService, assistance is first offered through the TeleService Diagnosis and then if necessary, through the TeleService Help.

1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"

2. "Roadside Assistance"

3. "Start service"

BMW TeleService Diagnosis Teleservice Diagnosis enables the wireless transmission of detailed vehicle data that are critical to vehicle diagnosis. These data are automatically transmitted.

After transmission of the data, a voice connec- tion is established to Roadside Assistance.

BMW Online

Overview You can use BMW Online to search the yellow pages.

License conditions:

This product contains NetFront Browser soft- ware of ACCESS Co., Ltd. Copyright 2007 ACCESS Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.

NetFront is a trademark or registered trademark of ACCESS Co., Ltd., in Japan and other countries.

This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group.

Requirements > Subscription to the optional Convenience

Plan.

> The vehicle is located within wireless network coverage.

> The date setting on the Control Display is current.

Starting BMW Online 1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"

2. "BMW Online"

3. "OK" if necessary

The BMW Online start page is displayed.

Using BMW Online To select and display content:

> Turn the controller to highlight an element.

> Press the controller to display an element.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

215

ConnectedDrive Communications

Opening the start page 1. Open "Options".

2. "Display start page"

Loading a new page 1. Open "Options".

2. "Reload"

Canceling 1. Open "Options".

2. "Cancel loading"

Customer Relations

Overview Contact Customer Relations for information on all aspects of your vehicle.

Calling Customer Relations

Vehicle not equipped with BMW Assist or TeleService 1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"

2. "Customer Relations"

The Customer Relations phone number is dis- played. If a mobile phone is paired, a connection is established to Customer Relations.

Vehicle equipped with BMW Assist or TeleService 1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"

2. "Customer Relations"

3. "Start service"

Service Request

Overview Inform your BMW center that you need to schedule a service appointment. The Teleser- vice data is transmitted during a Service Request. If possible, your BMW center will establish contact with you.

Starting a Service Request 1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"

2. "Service Request"

3. "Start service"

Automatic Service Request The Teleservice data necessary for servicing the vehicle are automatically sent to your BMW center prior to the service deadline. If possible, the center will contact you and a service appointment can be arranged.

Check when your BMW center was notified.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

216

Communications ConnectedDrive

1. "Vehicle Info"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. Open "Options".

4. "Last Service Request"

Service status Displaying available services Display of all services available in the vehicle.

1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"

2. "Service Status"

3. "Available services"

Updating BMW Assist Manually updating BMW TeleService, BMW Assist, and BMW Online.

"Update BMW Assist"

Data transfer The status of the data transfer is displayed.

1. "BMW Assist" or "ConnectedDrive"

2. Open "Options".

3. "Data transfer"

Apps Overview Certain software applications of a suitable mobile phone can be integrated into the vehicle. These software applications are displayed on the Control Display. They can be operated via iDrive.

Requirements > The mobile phone's operating system

supports the use of apps.

> Software applications are installed on the mobile phone and are operational.

> Suitable mobile phone.

> Appropriate mobile phone contract.

Additional costs possibly incurred are not included in the price of apps.

Information about suitable mobile phones, available software applications, and their instal- lation can be found at www.bmw.com/connec- tivity or at your BMW center.

Only make entries when traffic conditions permit. Otherwise, you may endanger

vehicle occupants and other road users by being distracted. For safety reasons, some software applications can only be used when the vehicle is stopped.<

To avoid malfunctions, only use software applications approved by BMW.<

Using apps 1. Connect the mobile phone using the snap-

in adapter or the USB audio interface.

2. "ConnectedDrive"

3. Select the desired software application.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

217

ConnectedDrive Communications

Displaying status You can display information about the currently available software applications.

1. "ConnectedDrive"

2. "BMW apps"

Plugin Selected functions of the mobile phone are displayed on the Control Display. They can be operated via iDrive.

1. Connect the mobile phone using the snap- in adapter.

2. "ConnectedDrive"

3. "PlugIn"

4. "Activate PlugIn"

5. Use the controller to navigate in the dis- played functions and select the desired category or track, for example.

Press the button to move one level up or back within the functions of the mobile

phone.

Press the button twice to return back to the main menu.

Notes > The range of apps that are displayed in the

Control Display depends on the range of software applications installed on the mobile phone.

> The data transfer of the software applica- tions from the mobile phone to the vehicle may take some time. Some software appli- cations are dependent on the speed of the available Internet connection of the mobile phone.

> Certain versions of the mobile phone used and the software they use may not permit apps to be used at the same time as the Bluetooth hands-free system. If necessary, restart the software applica- tion on the mobile phone after completing a call.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

This section helps you maintain your car's mobility by supplying important information

on vital topics including fuels and lubricants, wheels and tires, service, maintenance and

Roadside Assistance.

Mobility

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

220

Mobility Refueling

Refueling

Vehicle equipment In this chapter, all production, country, and optional equipment that is offered in the model range is described. For this reason, descrip- tions will be given of some equipment that may not be available in a vehicle, for example due to the special options or national-market version selected. This also applies to safety related functions and systems.

General information Refuel as soon as possible once your cruising range falls below 30 miles/

50 km; otherwise, engine functions are not ensured and damage can occur.<

Always switch off the engine before refu- eling; otherwise, fuel cannot be added to

the tank and a message will be displayed.<

Take all precautionary measures and observe all applicable regulations when

handling fuel. Do not carry any spare fuel con- tainers in your vehicle. They can develop a leak and cause an explosion or cause a fire in the event of an accident.<

Fuel filler flap

Opening

1. Open the fuel filler flap. To do so, lightly press the rear edge.

2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.

3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached to the fuel filler flap.

Closing Fit the cap and turn it clockwise until you clearly hear a click.

Do not pinch the band attached to the cap; otherwise, the cap cannot be closed

properly and fuel vapors can escape. A mes- sage will be displayed if the fuel cap is loose or missing.<

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

221

Refueling Mobility

Manually releasing the fuel filler flap In the event of a malfunction, you can release the fuel filler flap manually:

1. Remove the cover from the right-hand sidewall of the trunk.

2. Pull the button with the fuel pump symbol down. The fuel filler flap is released.

Observe the following when refueling When refueling, insert the filler nozzle com- pletely into the filler pipe. Avoid lifting the filler nozzle while filling the tank, as that would lead to

> Premature pump shutoff

> Reduced efficiency of the fuel-vapor recovery system.

The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks off the first time.

Do not overfill the fuel tank; otherwise, fuel spills can cause damage to the

environment and the vehicle.<

When handling fuels, follow the safety instructions provided at filling stations;

otherwise, there is a risk of personal injury or property damage.<

Fuel tank capacity Approx. 14 US gal/53 liters, including the reserve capacity of 2.1 US gal/8 liters.

Fuel recommendations

Gasoline For optimum fuel consumption, the gasoline should be sulfur-free or as low in sulfur as possible.

Never use fuels labeled at the fuel pump as metal-containing.

Do not use leaded gasoline or gasoline with metallic additives such as manga-

nese or iron; doing so can cause permanent damage to the catalytic converter and other components.<

Use fuels with a maximum ethanol content of 10 , i.e. E10.

The ethanol should meet the following quality standards:

US: ASTM 4806-xx

CAN: CGSB-3.511-xx

xx: comply with the currently valid standard.

Do not fill the tank with E85, i.e. fuel con- taining 85 ethanol, nor with FlexFuel.

Otherwise, the engine and fuel supply system will be damaged.<

Fuel grade BMW recommends AKI 91.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

222

Mobility Refueling

Minimum fuel grade BMW recommends AKI 89.

Do not use gasoline below the indicated minimum fuel grade; otherwise, proper

engine function is not ensured.<

If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI rat- ing, the engine may produce knocking sounds when starting at high outside temperatures. This has no effect on the engine life.

The use of poor-quality fuels may result in harmful engine deposits or damage.

Additionally, problems relating to drivability, starting and stalling may occur, especially under certain environmental conditions such as high ambient temperature and high altitude.

If drivability problems are encountered, we rec- ommend switching to a high quality gasoline brand and a higher octane grade AKI number for a few tank fills. To avoid harmful engine deposits, we highly recommend purchasing gasoline from BP or Top Tier retailers.

Failure to comply with these recommendations may result in the need for unscheduled mainte- nance.<

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

223

Wheels and tires Mobility

Wheels and tires

Vehicle equipment In this chapter, all production, country, and optional equipment that is offered in the model range is described. For this reason, descrip- tions will be given of some equipment that may not be available in a vehicle, for example due to the special options or national-market version selected. This also applies to safety related functions and systems.

Tire inflation pressures

Information for your safety It is not merely the tires' service life, but also driving comfort and, to a great extent, driving safety that depend on the condition of the tires and the maintenance of the specified tire pres- sure.

Check the tire inflation pressure regularly and correct it, if necessary: at least twice a

month and before starting long trips. If you fail to observe this precaution you may be driving on tires with incorrect tire pressures, a condi- tion that can not only compromise your vehi- cle's driving stability, but also lead to tire dam- age and the risk of an accident. Do not drive with deflated, i.e. flat tires, except when using run-flat tires. A flat tire will seriously impair your vehicle's handling and braking response. Attempts to drive on a flat tire can lead to loss of control over the vehicle.<

Checking pressure Only check tire inflation pressure when the tires are cold. This means after a maximum of 1.25 miles/2 km driving or when the vehicle has been parked for at least 2 hours. When tires are warm, the tire inflation pressure is higher.

After correcting the tire inflation pressure, reset the Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to

page 93, or reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor, refer to page 91.<

Inflation pressure specifications The tables below provide all the correct inflation pressures for the specified tire sizes at ambient temperature.

The inflation pressures apply to the tire sizes approved and tire brands recom-

mended by BMW; a list of these is available from your BMW center.<

For correct identification of the right tire inflation pressures, observe the following:

> Tire sizes for your vehicle

> Maximum allowable driving speed

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

224

Mobility Wheels and tires

Tire inflation pressures for driving up to 100 mph or 160 km/h For normal driving up to 100 mph or 160 km/h and to achieve optimum driving comfort, adjust pressures to the respective tire inflation pres- sures listed on the following pages in the col- umns for traveling speeds up to a maximum of 100 mph or 160 km/h.

These tire inflation pressures can also be found on the driver's side door pillar when the driver's door is open.

The maximum permissible speed for these tire pressures is 100 mph or

160 km/h. Do not exceed this speed; otherwise, tire damage and accidents could occur.<

Tire inflation pressures for driving above 100 mph or 160 km/h

In order to drive at maximum speeds in excess of 100 mph or 160 km/h, adjust

pressures to the respective tire inflation pres- sures listed on the following pages in the col- umns for traveling speeds including those exceeding 100 mph or 160 km/h. Otherwise, tire damage and accidents could occur.<

Observe all national and local maximum speed limits; otherwise, violations of the laws could occur.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

225

Wheels and tires Mobility

Coupe: tire inflation pressures for the 128i

Coupe: tire inflation pressures for the 135i

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/psi

Traveling speeds up to a max. of

100 mph/160 km/h

Traveling speeds including those

exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h

All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in bar/psi with cold tires. Cold = ambient temperature

195/55 R 16 87 H M+S RSC 2.2/32 2.6/38 2.4/35 2.9/42

205/50 R 17 89 H M+S A/S RSC 205/55 R 16 91 H M+S RSC 205/50 R 17 89 H M+S RSC

2.2/32 2.4/35 2.4/35 2.9/42

Front: 205/50 R 17 89 V RSC 2.2/32 - 2.5/36 -

Rear: 225/45 R 17 91 V RSC - 2.4/35 - 3.0/44

Front: 215/40 R 18 85 Y RSC 2.2/32 - 2.4/35 -

Rear: 245/35 R 18 88 Y RSC - 2.7/39 - 2.9/42

Compact spare wheel: T 125/80 R 17 99 M

Traveling speeds up to a max. of 50 mph/80 km/h 4.2/60

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/psi

Traveling speeds up to a max. of

100 mph/160 km/h

Traveling speeds including those

exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h

All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in bar/psi with cold tires. Cold = ambient temperature

205/50 R 17 89 H M+S A/S RSC 205/50 R 17 89 H M+S RSC

2.3/33 2.5/36 2.6/38 2.9/42

Front: 215/40 R 18 85 Y RSC 2.5/36 - 2.6/38 -

Rear: 245/35 R 18 88 Y RSC - 2.7/39 - 2.9/42

Compact spare wheel: T 125/80 R 17 99 M

Traveling speeds up to a max. of 50 mph/80 km/h 4.2/60

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

226

Mobility Wheels and tires

Convertible: tire inflation pressures for the 128i

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/psi

Traveling speeds up to a max. of

100 mph/160 km/h

Traveling speeds including those

exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h

All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in bar/psi with cold tires. Cold = ambient temperature

without Sport Package

205/55 R 16 91 H M+S A/S RSC 205/55 R 16 91 H M+S RSC

2.2/32 2.4/35 2.2/32 2.7/39

205/50 R 17 89 H M+S A/S RSC 205/50 R 17 89 H M+S RSC

2.2/32 2.6/38 2.4/35 2.9/42

Front: 205/50 R 17 89 V RSC 2.2/32 - 2.4/35 -

Rear: 225/45 R 17 91 V RSC - 2.5/36 - 2.8/41

Front: 215/40 R 18 85 Y RSC 2.4/35 - 2.4/35 -

Rear: 245/35 R 18 88 Y RSC - 2.8/41 - 2.8/41

Compact spare wheel: T 125/80 R 17 99 M

Traveling speeds up to a max. of 50 mph/80 km/h 4.2/60

with Sport Package

205/55 R 16 91 H M+S RSC 2.2/32 2.4/35 2.2/32 2.7/39

205/50 R 17 89 H M+S RSC 2.2/32 2.6/38 2.4/35 2.9/42

Front: 205/50 R 17 89 V RSC 2.2/32 - 2.7/39 -

Rear: 225/45 R 17 91 V RSC - 2.5/36 - 3.2/46

Front: 215/40 R 18 85 Y RSC 2.4/35 - 2.6/38 -

Rear: 245/35 R 18 88 Y RSC - 2.8/41 - 3.1/45

Compact spare wheel: T 125/80 R 17 99 M

Traveling speeds up to a max. of 50 mph/80 km/h 4.2/60

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

227

Wheels and tires Mobility

Convertible: tire inflation pressures for the 135i

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/psi

Traveling speeds up to a max. of

100 mph/160 km/h

Traveling speeds including those

exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h

All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in bar/psi with cold tires. Cold = ambient temperature

without Sport Package

205/50 R 17 89 H M+S A/S RSC 205/50 R 17 89 H M+S RSC

2.2/32 2.6/38 2.5/36 2.9/42

Front: 215/40 R 18 85 Y RSC 2.7/39 - 2.7/39 -

Rear: 245/35 R 18 88 Y RSC - 2.8/41 - 2.8/41

Compact spare wheel: T 125/80 R 17 99 M

Traveling speeds up to a max. of 50 mph/80 km/h 4.2/60

with Sport Package

205/50 R 17 89 H M+S RSC 2.2/32 2.6/38 2.5/36 2.9/42

Front: 215/40 R 18 85 Y RSC 2.7/39 - 2.7/39 -

Rear: 245/35 R 18 88 Y RSC - 2.8/41 - 3.1/45

Compact spare wheel: T 125/80 R 17 99 M

Traveling speeds up to a max. of 50 mph/80 km/h 4.2/60

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

228

Mobility Wheels and tires

Tire identification marks Knowledge of the labeling on the side of the tire makes it easier to identify and choose the right tires.

Tire size

Speed code letter Q = up to 100 mph or 160 km/h

T = up to 118 mph or 190 km/h

H = up to 131 mph or 210 km/h

V = up to 150 mph or 240 km/h

W = up to 167 mph or 270 km/h

Y = up to 186 mph or 300 km/h

Tire Identification Number Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of the US Department of Transportation.

DOT code:

Tire age The manufacturing date of tires is contained in the tire coding: DOT 1013 means that the tire was manufactured in week 10 of 2013.

BMW recommends that you replace all tires after 6 years at most, even if some tires may last for 10 years.

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example:

Tread wear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

DOT Quality Grades Tread wear Traction AA A B C Temperature A B C

All passenger car tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition

to these grades.<

Tread wear The tread wear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified gov- ernment test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, how- ever, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteris- tics and climate.

Traction The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement, as measured under con- trolled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

e.g.

Nominal width in mm Aspect ratio in Radial belt construction Rim diameter in inches Load rating, not on ZR tires Speed code letter, in front of the R on ZR tires

225/45 R 17 91 V

e.g.

Manufacturer's code for tire make Tire size and tire design Tire age

DOT xxxx xxx 4012

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

229

Wheels and tires Mobility

The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction

tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.<

Temperature The temperature grades are A, the highest, B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehi- cle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly

inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.<

RSC run-flat tires You will recognize run-flat tires by a circular symbol containing the letters RSC on the side of the tire, refer to page 230.

M+S Winter and all-season tires. These have better winter properties than summer tires.

XL Designation for specially reinforced tires.

Tire condition Inspect your tires frequently for tread wear, signs of damage and for foreign objects lodged in the tread. Check the tread depth.

Minimum tread depth The tread depth should not drop below 0.12 in/ 3 mm, although, for example, European legisla- tion only specifies a minimum tread depth of 0.063 in/1.6 mm. At tread depths below 0.12 in/ 3 mm there is an increased risk of high-speed hydroplaning, even when only small amounts of water are present on the road surface. When winter tires wear down past a tread depth of 0.16 in/4 mm, they become perceptibly less suitable for winter conditions. In the interest of safety, new tires should be installed.

Wear indicators in the base of the tread groove are distributed around the tire's circumference; the letters TWI, for Tread Wear Indicator, on the tire's sidewalls identify tires that incorporate these wear indicators. Once the tire tread has worn down to the wear indicators, the tire has worn to a depth of 0.063 in/1.6 mm.

Wheel/tire damage Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces, as well as debris, curbs and other obstacles can cause serious damage to wheels, tires, and sus- pension parts. This is more likely to occur with low-profile tires, which provide less cushioning between the wheel and the road. Be careful to avoid road hazards and reduce your speed, especially if your vehicle is equipped with low- profile tires.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

230

Mobility Wheels and tires

Unusual vibrations encountered during normal vehicle operation can indicate tire failure or some other vehicle defect. This can, for exam- ple, be caused by driving over curbs. The same applies to any other abnormal road behavior, such as pulling severely to the right or left.

In these cases, reduce speed immedi- ately and have wheels and tires thor-

oughly checked. To do so, drive carefully to the nearest BMW center or tire dealer. If necessary, have the vehicle towed there. Otherwise, tire damage can pose a lethal hazard to vehicle occupants and other road users.<

Tire age For various reasons, such as the development of brittleness, BMW recommends tire replace- ment after no more than 6 years, regardless of the actual wear of the tires.

The manufacturing date of tires is contained in the tire coding: DOT ... 1013 means that the tire was manufac- tured in week 10 of 2013.

New wheels and tires Have new wheels and tires mounted only by your BMW center or by a tire dealer. If

this work is not carried out properly, there is a danger of subsequent damage and related safety hazards. Make sure that the new wheels are balanced.<

Retreaded tires BMW recommends that you do not use retreaded tires, since driving safety may

be impaired. The causes for this include poten- tially different tire casing structures and often wide variations in tire age, which can result in a limited service life.<

Correct wheels and tires When mounting new tires or changing over from summer to winter tires and vice versa, mount run-flat tires for your own safety. In the event of a flat, no spare wheel is available. Your BMW center will be glad to advise you.

BMW recommends that you use only wheel and tire combinations that BMW

has tested and approved for your particular vehicle. Variations in factors such as manufac- turing tolerances mean that even wheels and tires with identical official size ratings could actually have different dimensions, which could lead to body contact and thus to severe acci- dents. If non-approved wheels and tires are used, BMW cannot evaluate their suitability, and therefore cannot guarantee their driving safety.<

You can inquire about the right wheel/tire combination at your BMW center.

The correct combination of wheels and tires is also necessary to ensure reliable operation of various vehicle systems such as ABS, DSC or FTM.

To maintain good handling and vehicle response, use only tires of a single brand and tread configuration. After a tire has been damaged, mount the previous wheel and tire combination again as soon as possible.

Wheels with Tire Pressure Monitor TPM electronics When mounting new tires or changing over from summer to winter tires, or vice versa, only use wheels with TPM electronics; otherwise, the Tire Pressure Monitor may not be able to detect a puncture, refer to page 94. Your BMW center will be glad to advise you.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

231

Wheels and tires Mobility

Recommended tire brands

Certain makes of tire are recommended by BMW for each tire size. They are marked with a clearly visible BMW designation on the sidewall of the tire. When properly used, these tires meet the high- est standards in terms of safety and handling characteristics.

Special characteristics of winter tires BMW recommends winter tires for driving on winter roads or at temperatures below +457/ +76. Although all-season M+S tires provide better winter traction than summer tires, they generally fail to provide the same levels of cold- weather performance as winter tires.

Pay attention to speed Always comply with the speed limit for the winter tires mounted on your car; failure

to do so could result in tire damage and accidents.<

If the car is capable of speeds higher than that permitted for the winter tires, a label stating the maximum permitted speed for the mounted tires must be displayed in your field of view. Specialist tire dealers and your BMW center can supply these labels.

Storage Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry place with as little exposure to light as possible. Always protect tires against all contact with oil, grease and fuels.

Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pressure indicated on the sidewall of the tire.

Swapping wheels between axles BMW advises against swapping wheels between the front and rear axles, even if all tires have the same size, as this could impair driving characteristics. If the tires are of mixed sizes, swapping wheels between the axles is not permissible.

Run-flat tires

The symbol identifying run-flat tires is a circle with the letters RSC on the sidewall. Run-flat tires comprise a conditionally self- supporting tire and a special rim. The reinforce- ment in the sidewalls ensures that the tire can continue to be used subject to certain restric- tions, even if depressurized.

For information on continuing to drive with a flat tire, refer to Indication of a flat tire on page 92.

Snow chains Only certain fine-link snow chains have been tested by BMW, classified as safe for use and recommended. Consult your BMW center for more information. Snow chains must be mounted in pairs and on the rear wheels only. Observe the manufacturer's instructions when mounting snow chains. Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/h with chains.

Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor if snow chains are mounted; otherwise, the

instrument might issue an incorrect reading. When driving with snow chains, you may find it helpful to activate DTC temporarily, refer to page 89.<

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

232

Mobility Engine compartment

Engine compartment

Vehicle equipment In this chapter, all production, country, and optional equipment that is offered in the model range is described. For this reason, descrip-

tions will be given of some equipment that may not be available in a vehicle, for example due to the special options or national-market version selected. This also applies to safety related functions and systems.

Important parts of the engine compartment

1 Expansion tank for coolant, refer to page 235

2 Washer fluid filler neck for headlamp clean- ing system and window washer system, refer to page 72

3 Jump-starting connection, refer to page 251

4 Fluid filler neck for engine oil, refer to Adding engine oil, page 235

Hood Do not work on the car unless you pos- sess the necessary technical knowledge.

If you are not familiar with the regulations to be followed, have the necessary work on the vehi- cle carried out only by your BMW center; if this work is not carried out properly, there is a dan- ger of subsequent damage and related safety hazards.<

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

233

Engine compartment Mobility

Releasing

Pull the lever.

Opening

To avoid damage, make sure that the wiper arms are against the windshield

before you open the engine compartment. Do not open the engine hood before the engine has cooled down; otherwise, injuries may result.<

Press the release handle and open the hood.

Closing

Close the hood from a height of approx. 16 in/ 40 cm with momentum. It must be clearly heard to engage.

Make sure that the closing path of the hood is clear; otherwise, injuries may

result. If you see any signs while driving your vehicle that the hood is not completely closed, stop at once and close it securely.<

Engine oil

General information The engine oil consumption is dependent on driving style and operating conditions; for example, the engine oil consumption is signifi- cantly higher with a very sporty driving style. For this reason, regularly check the oil level after each time you refuel.

Checking oil level Your car is equipped with an electronic oil-level monitor.

For precise measurement and display of the oil level, the engine must be at operating tempera- ture, i.e. following at least 6.2 miles/10 km of uninterrupted driving. You can have the oil level displayed while you are driving, or while the vehicle is at a standstill on a level surface and the engine is running.

Display in the instrument cluster

1. Push button 1 in the turn signal/high beam lever up or down repeatedly until the appro- priate symbol is shown in the display, accompanied by the word "OIL".

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

234

Mobility Engine compartment

2. Press button 2. The oil level is checked and the reading displayed.

Possible displays

1 Oil level OK

2 Oil level is being checked. This can take about 3 minutes if the car is at a standstill on a level surface, or about 5 minutes while the car is on the move.

3 Oil level down to minimum: Add engine oil as soon as possible, but no more than 1 US quart/1 liter, refer also to Adding engine oil on page 235.

4 Oil level is too high.

Too much oil will harm the engine. Have the vehicle checked without

delay.<

5 The oil level sensor is defective. Do not add engine oil. You can continue your journey. Note the newly calculated dis- tance remaining to the next oil service, refer to page 237. Have the system checked as soon as possible.

Display via iDrive 1. "Vehicle Info"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Engine oil level"

Possible messages > "Engine oil level OK"

> "Measurement not possible at this time."

> "Measuring engine oil level...": This can take about 3 minutes if the car is at a standstill on a level surface and the engine is running, and about 5 minutes while the car is moving. If engine oil was added, it may take up to 30 minutes to obtain an oil level reading.

> "Engine oil level below minimum. Add 1 quart!" Add engine oil as soon as possible, but no more than 1 US quart/1 liter, refer also to Adding engine oil below. If the oil level is below the minimum value, add engine oil immediately to avoid engine damage.

> "Engine oil level too high! Have this checked.":

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

235

Engine compartment Mobility

Have the vehicle checked immedi- ately; otherwise, the excess oil may

lead to engine damage.<

> "Measurement inactive. Have this checked.": Do not add engine oil. Before continuing to drive, note the recalculated remaining mile- age until the next oil change service, refer to Service requirements on page 80. Have the system checked as soon as possible.

Adding engine oil

Do not add 1 US quart/1 liter of engine oil until a corresponding message is shown on the Control Display.

Add oil within the next 125 miles/200 km; otherwise, the engine could be

damaged.<

If the engine oil is too high, have the vehicle checked immediately; failure to do

so may result in engine damage.<

Keep oils, greases, etc. out of the reach of children and comply with the relevant

warnings on the containers. Otherwise, health hazards may result.<

Oil grades to add Do not use oil additives as this could result in engine damage.<

When selecting an engine oil, make sure to use one from the SAE viscosity classes

0W-40, 0W-30, 5W-40 or 5W-30; failure to do so may result in malfunctions or engine damage.<

The engine oil quality is critical for the life of the engine.

Some oil grades may not be available in all countries.

Approved oil grades

Additional information about approved oil grades is available at your BMW center.

Alternative oil types If approved oils are not available, you can add quantities of up to 1 US quart/1 liter of an oil with one of the following specifications:

Oil change Oil changes should only be performed by a BMW center.

Coolant Coolant consists of half water and half additive. Not all commercially available additives are suit- able for your BMW. Ask your BMW center about suitable additives.

Only use suitable additives; otherwise, engine damage may result. Because

additives are harmful to your health, it is important to follow the instructions on the containers.<

Comply with the appropriate environ- mental protection regulations when

disposing of coolant additives.<

Gasoline engine

BMW High Performance SAE 5W-30

BMW Longlife-01

BMW Longlife-01 FE

Gasoline engine

API SM or higher

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

236

Mobility Engine compartment

Coolant temperature If the coolant and therefore the engine over- heats, a warning lamp lights up. A message appears on the Control Display.

Checking coolant level Do not add coolant to the cooling system when the engine is hot. Escaping coolant

can cause burns.<

1. Do not open the engine hood before the engine has cooled down.

2. Turn the cap of the expansion tank a little counterclockwise to allow any accumulated pressure to escape, then continue turning to open.

3. The level indicator 1 in the coolant filler neck indicates the level of coolant. The coolant level is correct when it is between the arrows of the respective inscription on the reservoir 2.

4. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up to the specified level; do not overfill.

5. Turn the cap until there is an audible click.

6. Have the reason for the coolant loss eliminated as soon as possible.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

237

Maintenance Mobility

Maintenance

Vehicle equipment In this chapter, all production, country, and optional equipment that is offered in the model range is described. For this reason, descrip- tions will be given of some equipment that may not be available in a vehicle, for example due to the special options or national-market version selected. This also applies to safety related functions and systems.

BMW Maintenance System

The BMW Maintenance System advises you of necessary maintenance measures and helps you maintain the traffic and operating safety of the vehicle.

Condition Based Service CBS Sensors and special algorithms take the differ- ent driving conditions of your BMW into account. Condition Based Service uses this to determine the current and future service requirements. By letting you define a service and maintenance regimen that reflects your own individual requirements, the system builds the basis for trouble-free driving.

On the Control Display, you can have the remaining times or distances for selected main- tenance tasks and any legally prescribed dates displayed, refer to page 80:

> Engine oil

> Brake pads: separately for front and rear

> Brake fluid

> Vehicle check

> Legally mandated inspections depending on local regulations

Service data in the remote control Your vehicle continuously stores service- requirement information in the remote control while you are driving. Your dealership Service Advisor can read out this data from the remote control unit, and propose an optimized mainte- nance approach. Whenever you take your car in for servicing you should therefore give your dealership Service Advisor the remote control unit that you last used.

Make sure that the date is always set correctly, refer to page 84; otherwise, the

effectiveness of Condition Based Service CBS is not assured.<

Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models Please consult your Service and Warranty Infor- mation Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models for additional information on service require- ments.

BMW recommends that you have service and repair operations performed at your

BMW center. Take the time to ensure that these service pro- cedures are confirmed by entries in your vehi- cle's Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models. These entries verify that your vehicle has received the speci- fied regular maintenance.<

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

238

Mobility Maintenance

Socket for Onboard Diagnosis OBD

The socket for onboard diagnosis should only be used by your BMW center or at a

workshop that works according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained per- sonnel and by otherwise authorized personnel; otherwise, use can result in malfunctioning of the vehicle.<

Coupe:

Convertible:

On the driver's side is an OBD socket for check- ing components relevant to the composition of the vehicle's emissions.

Emissions The warning lamp lights up: The vehicle is producing higher emis- sions. The trip can be continued. Have

the car checked as soon as possible.

Canadian models display this warning lamp.

The lamp flashes under certain condi- tions. This indicates excessive misfiring in the engine. If this happens, you should reduce your speed and visit your nearest BMW center as soon as possible. Severe engine misfiring can quickly lead to serious damage of emissions- related components, especially the catalytic converter.

The warning lamp lights up if the fuel cap is not properly tightened and the OBD system assumes that fuel vapor

is escaping. Make sure that the fuel cap is cor- rectly positioned and close it until it audibly clicks.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

239

Care Mobility

Care

Vehicle equipment In this chapter, all production, country, and optional equipment that is offered in the model range is described. For this reason, descrip- tions will be given of some equipment that may not be available in a vehicle, for example due to the special options or national-market version selected. This also applies to safety related functions and systems.

Washing the vehicle

Notes When using steam cleaners or high-pres- sure cleaning jets, make sure to maintain

a sufficient distance and stay below a maximum temperature of 1407/606. Too close a distance, too high a pressure, or too high a temperature may cause damage or preliminary damage that can then lead to long- term damage. Follow the operating instructions for the steam jet or high-pressure washer.<

When using high-pressure washers, do not spray the sensors, e.g. of the Park

Distance Control, for an extended period and maintain a distance of at least 1 ft/30 cm from them.<

Regularly remove foreign objects, e.g. leaves, in the vicinity of the windshield when the hood is open.

Wash the vehicle more frequently, particularly in winter.

Heavy soiling and road salt can lead to vehicle damage.

Automatic car washes

Notes In car washes with high pressures and nozzle positions, water may drip into the

vehicle around the windows.<

Please note the following:

> Give preference to car washes that use cloth or soft brushes in order to avoid paint damage.

> Wheels and tires must not be damaged by transport devices.

> Fold in exterior mirror, refer to page 55; oth- erwise, they can be damaged due to the width of the vehicle.

> Deactivate the rain sensor, refer to page 72, to prevent undesired wiper operation.

> In the convertible, do not treat the top with wax. Ensure that a program is available that does not apply wax or is designed specifi- cally for Convertibles.

> Move rear wiper into its wiper park position, deactivate it, and protect it from damage. Ask the car wash operator about suitable protective measures.

> Remove additional add-on parts, e.g. spoil- ers or phone antennas, if they could be damaged.

> Unscrew the rod antenna.

> Leave the remote control in the ignition lock.

Avoid car washes with guide rail heights over 4 in/10 cm; otherwise, there is the

danger of damaging chassis parts.<

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

240

Mobility Care

Driving into an automatic car wash Perform the following steps to ensure that the vehicle can roll:

Manual transmission:

1. Shift into neutral.

2. Release parking brake, refer to page 63.

3. Switch off the engine.

4. Leave the remote control in the ignition lock.

Automatic transmission:

1. Insert the remote control into the ignition lock, even with Comfort Access.

2. Shift selector lever into position N.

3. Release parking brake, refer to page 63.

4. Switch off the engine.

5. Leave the remote control in the ignition lock.

Sport automatic transmission with double clutch:

1. Insert the remote control into the ignition lock, even with Comfort Access.

2. Shift selector lever into position N.

3. Release parking brake, refer to page 63.

4. Switch off the engine.

5. Leave the remote control in the ignition lock.

The transmission is switched into position P:

> Automatically after approx. 30 minutes

> If you remove the infrared remote control from the ignition lock

Headlamps Do not rub them dry and do not use abrasive or corrosive cleaning agents.

Loosen dirt, e.g. insects, with shampoo and rinse away with water.

Thaw ice with a de-icer and do not use an ice scraper.

After washing the vehicle After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes briefly to dry them; otherwise,

water can reduce braking efficiency over the short term and the brake discs can corrode.<

Remove residues on the windows completely in order to prevent impaired vision due to smear formation and to reduce wiper noise and wiper blade wear.

Vehicle care

Care products BMW recommends using BMW cleaning and care products since they have been tested and approved for this purpose.

Follow the instructions on the packaging. When cleaning inside the vehicle, always

open the doors and windows. Only use prod- ucts designed for cleaning vehicles. Cleaning agents can contain substances that are danger- ous or hazardous to your health.<

Vehicle paintwork Regular care contributes to driving safety and value retention. Environmental influences in regions with elevated levels of air pollution or natural contaminants such as tree sap or pollen can impact vehicle paintwork. The frequency and scope of car care should be adapted accordingly.

Immediately remove particularly corrosive sub- stances such as spilled fuel, oil, grease, or bird droppings to prevent damage to the paintwork.

Leather care Frequently remove dust from the leather using a cloth or vacuum cleaner.

Otherwise, dust and road grit in the pores and folds of the leather will otherwise have an abra- sive effect, resulting in increased wear and causing the leather surface to become brittle prematurely.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

241

Care Mobility

In order to prevent staining, e.g due to clothing, clean the leather approximately every two months.

Clean light-colored leather more frequently as it shows dust and dirt more noticeably.

Use BMW Premium Leather Care since dirt and grease will otherwise slowly affect the protec- tive layer of the leather.

Suitable care products are available at your BMW center.

Upholstery care Regularly vacuum with a vacuum cleaner.

To remove severe spots such as beverage stains, use a soft sponge or lint-free microfiber cloth and suitable interior cleaners.

Clean the upholstery down to the seams using a sweeping motion. Avoid strong rubbing.

Opened Velcro fasteners on pants or other articles of clothing can damage the

seat covers. Ensure that Velcro fasteners are closed.<

Care of special parts

Light-alloy wheels When cleaning on the vehicle, use only neutral rim cleaner with a pH value of 5 to 9. Do not use coarse cleansers and do not use steam clean- ers at temperatures greater than 1407/606. Follow manufacturer's instructions.

Aggressive, acid-containing, or strongly alka- line cleaning agents can destroy the protective coating of nearby components such as the brake discs.

Chrome look surfaces Carefully clean vehicle parts such as the radia- tor grill or door handles with copious quantities of water and possibly a shampoo additive, par- ticularly when roads are treated with deicing salt.

Rubber parts Treat only with water or rubber care products.

Do not use silicon-containing care products on rubber seals; otherwise, noise and damage could occur.

Fine wood parts Clean fine wood trim and fine wood parts only with a damp cloth. Wipe dry with a soft cloth.

Plastic parts These include:

> Imitation leather surfaces

> Roofliner

> Lamp glasses

> Display pane of instrument cluster

> Parts spray painted matte black

> Painted parts in the passenger compartment

Use a microfibre cloth for cleaning.

Moisten the cloth slightly with water.

Do not soak the roofliner.

Do not use any cleaners that contain alco- hol or solvents such as lacquer thinner,

cold cleaning agents, fuel, and the like; other- wise, you may damage the surfaces.<

Safety belts Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and thus have a negative impact on safety.

Do not clean chemically, as this may destroy the webbing.<

Only clean with a mild soap solution in the installed state.

Only reel in seat belts when they are dry.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

242

Mobility Care

Carpet and floor mats Keep floor mats, carpet, and other objects out of the movement range of the pedals;

otherwise, they may inhibit the function of the pedals during driving. Do not place additional floor mats onto an existing one or onto other objects. Only use floor mats that have been approved for the vehicle and can be appropriately fastened. Make sure that the floor mats are securely fas- tened again after they have been removed, e.g. for cleaning.<

Floor mats can be removed for the cleaning of the passenger compartment.

When inserting the floor mats, secure them again to prevent slippage.

When carpets are heavily soiled, clean with a microfibre cloth and water or textile cleaner. When doing so, rub back and forth in the direc- tion of travel; otherwise, the carpet may become matted.

Sensors/cameras Use a microfibre cloth moistened with some glass cleaner for cleaning sensors or cameras.

Displays/screens Use an antistatic microfibre cloth for cleaning displays.

Do not use chemical or abrasive house- hold cleaning agents. Keep all types of

fluid and moisture away from the device. Other- wise, surfaces or electrical components may be corroded or damaged. When cleaning, avoid excessive pressure and do not use abrasive materials; otherwise, you may damage them.<

Convertible top care The appearance and service life of the convert- ible top largely depends on its proper care and operation.

Please follow these instructions:

> Never attempt to fold and stow the convert- ible top in the convertible compartment when the top is wet or frozen. Otherwise, water stains, mildew, and chafe marks may occur.

> If water spots occur on the inside headliner despite precautions, remove them using a microfiber cloth and interior cleaner.

> If the vehicle is parked in an enclosed area for a longer period of time, make sure that there is sufficient ventilation.

> Remove any bird droppings immediately, since they have corrosive properties which will corrode the convertible top and damage the rubber seals.

To remove stains from the convertible top, do not use stain removers, paint thin-

ners, solvents, benzine or similar substances. These cleaners may damage the rubber seals. The improper care or cleaning methods may cause the convertible top and its seams to leak.<

To remove heavy soiling, use a special convert- ible top cleaner. Always read and follow the manufacturer's instructions.

After washing the convertible top three to five times, treat it with an impregnating agent.

Vehicle storage Your BMW center will be happy to advise you on preparatory steps for parking the vehicle for more than three months.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

243

Replacing components Mobility

Replacing components

Vehicle equipment In this chapter, all production, country, and optional equipment that is offered in the model range is described. For this reason, descrip- tions will be given of some equipment that may not be available in a vehicle, for example due to the special options or national-market version selected. This also applies to safety related functions and systems.

Onboard vehicle tool kit The onboard vehicle tool kit is stored below the floor mat in the trunk.

Wiper blades

1. Fold out the wiper arm and hold it.

2. Press together the locking spring, arrows 1, and fold out the wiper blade, arrow 2.

3. Take the wiper blade out of the catch mech- anism, pulling the blade toward the front.

To avoid damage, make sure that the wiper arms are against the windshield

before you open the hood.<

Lamps and bulbs Lamps and bulbs make an essential contribu- tion to vehicle safety. They should, therefore, be handled carefully. BMW recommends hav- ing your BMW center perform any work that you do not feel competent to perform yourself or that is not described here.

Never touch the glass of new bulbs with your bare fingers, as even minute

amounts of contamination will burn into the bulb's surface and reduce its service life. Use a clean tissue, cloth or something similar, or hold the bulb by its base.<

Replacement bulb sets are available at your BMW center.

Only change bulbs while they are cool to the touch; otherwise, you could suffer

burns.<

When working on electrical systems, always begin by switching off the con-

sumer in question; otherwise, short-circuits could result. To avoid possible injury or equip- ment damage when replacing bulbs, observe any instructions provided by the bulb manufac- turer.<

To replace lamps not described here, please contact your BMW center.<

Light-emitting diodes LED Light-emitting diodes installed behind translu- cent lenses serve as the light sources for many of the controls and displays in your vehicle. These light-emitting diodes, which operate using a concept similar to that applied in con- ventional lasers, are officially designated as Class 1 light-emitting diodes.

Do not remove the covers or expose the eyes directly to the unfiltered light source

for several hours; otherwise, this could cause irritation of the retina.<

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

244

Mobility Replacing components

Headlight lenses In cool or humid weather, condensation may form on the interior of outside lamps. The con- densation will disappear after a short time when driving with the headlamps switched on. The headlamp glasses do not need to be changed.

If the headlamps do not defrost despite driving with the headlamps switched on, and additional moisture builds up, for example water droplets in the lamps, have them checked by your BMW center.

Xenon lamps These bulbs have a very long service life and are highly unlikely to fail. If a xenon lamp fails never- theless, switch on the fog lamps and continue the journey with great care, provided that local legislation does not prohibit this.

Have all work on the xenon lamp system performed only by your BMW center. Due

to high voltage, there is a risk of fatal injury if work on the xenon lamps is carried out improperly.<

Removing the headlamp cover 1. Pull the wire brackets over the notches, see

arrows, and fold to the side.

2. Fold away the headlamp cover.

Be careful when attaching the headlamp cover and ensure that both wire brackets

are securely in place; otherwise, leaks could occur and cause damage to the headlamp system.<

Attach the headlamp cover in reverse order.

Halogen headlamps

Halogen low beams and high beams H7 bulb, 55 watts

Always wear gloves and eye protection; the atmosphere within the H7 bulb is

pressurized. Otherwise, there is a risk of injury if the bulb is damaged.<

The figure shows the right-hand headlamp.

1 High beams

2 Low-beam headlamps

1. Remove the headlamp cover.

2. Disconnect the plug from the lamp.

3. Push the wire bracket to the side out of the mounting, arrow 1, and fold it down, arrow 2.

4. Remove the bulb.

5. Insert a new bulb with the notch at the top.

6. Fold up the wire bracket and engage it.

7. Connect the plug.

8. Attach the headlamp cover.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

245

Replacing components Mobility

Parking lamps, roadside parking lamps W5W bulb, 5 watts

1. Remove the headlamp cover.

The figure shows the right-hand headlamp.

2. Pull out the bulb holder.

3. Remove and replace the bulb.

4. Reinsert the bulb holder.

5. Attach the headlamp cover.

Xenon headlamps

Parking lamps, roadside parking lamps, daytime running lights H8 bulb, 35 watts

The figure shows the right-hand headlamp.

1. Remove the headlamp cover.

2. Turn the bulb, see arrow, and remove it.

3. Pull off the connector and replace the bulb.

4. Attach the connector, insert the bulb and turn it all the way in the opposite direction.

5. Attach the headlamp cover.

Corner-illuminating lamps H3 bulb, 55 watts

The figure shows the right-hand headlamp.

1. Remove the top headlamp cover, using the screwdriver to push the detent lugs to one side.

2. Turn the bulb holder, see arrow, and remove it.

3. Slide the bulb out of the holder and pull off the connector.

4. Replace the bulb and attach the connector.

5. Insert the bulb holder and turn it all the way in the opposite direction.

6. Attach the headlamp cover.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

246

Mobility Replacing components

Turn signals, front PY21W bulb, 21 watts

The turn signal bulb can be changed via a cover in the wheel arch.

1. Turn the respective wheel inwards.

2. Using a coin, turn both locks of the cover all the way to the left, arrows 1, and remove the cover.

3. Turn the bulb holder to the left and remove it, arrow 2.

4. Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while turning it to the left for removal and replacement.

5. Insert the bulb holder and lock it by turning it to the right.

6. Attach the cover by positioning the bottom edge first and then turning both locks all the way to the right.

Side turn signals W5W bulb, 5 watts

1. Press the rear edge of the lamp toward the front with your fingertip, arrow 1 and pivot it out, arrow 2.

2. While simultaneously lifting the retaining tab, rotate bulb holder to the left and remove.

3. Remove lamp and replace it.

To install, insert front end of the lamp and press into place at the back.

Tail lamps with halogen headlamps > Turn signal:

PY21W bulb, 21 watts

> Backup lamp: W16W bulb, 16 watts

> Brake lamps: P21W bulb, 21 watts

> Brake Force Display lamp: H21W bulb, 21 watts

1 Inner brake lamp/tail lamp

2 Outer brake lamp/parking/tail lamp

3 Reflector

4 Lateral reflector

5 Turn signal

6 Backup lamp

7 Brake Force Display lamp/tail lamp

Tail lamps with xenon headlamps > Turn signal:

PY21W bulb, 21 watts

> Backup lamp: W16W bulb, 16 watts

> Brake lamps: P21W bulb, 21 watts

> Brake Force Display lamp: H21W bulb, 21 watts

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

247

Replacing components Mobility

1 Roadside parking lamp and tail lamp LED

2 Inner brake lamp

3 Outer brake lamp

4 Reflector

5 Lateral reflector

6 Turn signal

7 Backup lamp

8 Brake Force Display lamp

Replacing tail lamps

Outer brake lamp

The outer brake lamp can be accessed through a single socket.

The figure shows the right side of the vehicle.

1. Remove the cover from the panel of the trunk.

2. Turn the bulb holder to the left, see arrow, and remove it.

3. Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while turning it to the left for removal and replacement.

4. Attach the bulb holder and turn it all the way in the opposite direction.

5. Reattach the cover.

With Xenon headlamps, the parking/tail lamp uses LED technology. After replac-

ing the bulb, ensure that the bulb holder is prop- erly seated; otherwise, the roadside parking lamp/tail lamp may not work.<

Inner brake lamp, turn signal, backup lamp and Brake Force Display lamp

The bulbs are integrated in a single bulb holder.

1. Remove the cover from the panel of the trunk.

2. Detach the bulb holder by pressing together the clips, see arrows, and remove it.

3. Brake lamps and turn signal: apply gentle pressure to the bulb while turning it to the left for removal and replacement.

4. Backup lamp: pull the bulb out of the socket and replace it.

5. Attach the bulb holder and let it snap into place.

6. Reattach the cover.

License plate lamps, center brake lamp, and parking/tail lamp These lamps use LED technology for operation. If they malfunction, please contact your BMW center.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

248

Mobility Replacing components

Changing wheels Your BMW is equipped with run-flat tires as standard. This eliminates the need to change a wheel immediately in the event of a puncture.

For information on continuing to drive with a damaged tire, refer to Indication of a flat tire on page 92.

The symbol identifying run-flat tires is a circle with the letters RSC on the sidewall, refer to New wheels and tires, page 230.

When mounting new tires or changing over from summer to winter tires and vice versa, mount run-flat tires for your own safety. In the event of a flat, no spare wheel is available. Your BMW center will be glad to advise you. Refer also to New wheels and tires, page 230.

The tools for changing wheels are avail- able as optional accessories from your

BMW center.<

Jack mounting points

The jacking points are at the positions shown in the illustration.

Vehicle battery

Battery care The battery is 100% maintenance-free, the electrolyte will last for the life of the battery when the vehicle is operated in a temperate climate. Your BMW center will be glad to advise in all matters concerning the battery.

Battery replacing Only use vehicle batteries that have been approved for your vehicle by the manu-

facturer; otherwise, the vehicle could be dam- aged and systems or functions may not be fully available.<

After a battery replacement, have the battery registered on the vehicle by your service center to ensure that all comfort functions are fully available.

Charging the battery

Note Do not connect battery chargers to the sockets installed in the vehicle at the

factory; otherwise you may cause damage to the battery.<

General information To guarantee the full service life of the battery, ensure that the battery is always properly charged.

It may be necessary to charge the battery in the following situations:

> If frequent short trips are taken;

> If the vehicle is frequently parked for more than a month.

Jump-starting terminals Charge the battery via the connections in the engine compartment only when the engine is off. Connections, refer to Jump starting on page 251.

Power failure After a temporary power loss, the functioning of some equipment may be limited and require reinitialization. Individual settings may likewise have been lost and will have to be programmed:

> Time and date These values must be updated, refer to page 82.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

249

Replacing components Mobility

> Radio In some cases, stations may have to be stored again, refer to page 160.

> Navigation system Wait for the system to start, refer to page 151.

> Glass roof It may happen that the roof can only be tilted. The system must be initialized. Please contact your BMW center.

> Seat and mirror memory The positions must be stored again, refer to page 54.

> Inside rearview mirror with digital compass The system must be calibrated, refer to page 114.

> Active steering The system automatically initializes itself briefly during a trip. The system is deacti- vated during this time, refer to page 96.

Disposal of old battery Have old batteries disposed of by your BMW center or bring them to a recycling

center. Maintain the battery in an upright position for transport and storage. Always secure the battery against tipping over during transport.<

Fuses Never attempt to repair a blown fuse and do not replace a defective fuse with a

substitute of another color or amperage rating; otherwise, this could lead to a circuit overload, ultimately resulting in a fire in the vehicle.<

In the glove compartment

Accessing the fuse box:

1. Open the glove compartment.

2. Remove the damper, arrow 1, from the lower holder by applying forward pressure.

3. Disengage the glove compartment by pressing on both tabs, arrows 2, and fold it down.

Plastic tweezers are located on the distributor box. Information on fuse assignment can be found next to the distributor box.

Spare fuses are available at your BMW center.

After replacing a fuse, press the glove compart- ment upward until it engages and reattach the damper.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

250

Mobility Giving and receiving assistance

Giving and receiving assistance

Vehicle equipment In this chapter, all production, country, and optional equipment that is offered in the model range is described. For this reason, descrip- tions will be given of some equipment that may not be available in a vehicle, for example due to the special options or national-market version selected. This also applies to safety related functions and systems.

Emergency Request Requirements > Full preparation package mobile phone: this

equipment makes it possible to send an Emergency Request even if no mobile phone is paired with the vehicle.

> BMW Assist is activated.

> Radio readiness is switched on.

> The BMW Assist system is logged into a mobile phone network that is supported by BMW Assist.

> The Emergency Request system is operable.

Only press the SOS button in an emergency.

For technical reasons, the Emergency Request service cannot be guaranteed

for the most unfavorable conditions.<

Subscriber contract Upon expiration of the subscriber contract with BMW Assist, the BMW Assist system can be deactivated by a BMW center without a work- shop visit.

After the system is deactivated, it is no longer possible to make Emergency Requests.

It may be possible for a BMW center to reacti- vate the system after a new contract has been signed.

Sending an Emergency Request 1. Briefly press the cover flap to open.

2. Press the SOS button until the LED in the button comes on.

> The LED comes on: the Emergency Request has been triggered.

If the circumstances allow, remain in the vehicle until the voice contact has been established.

> The LED flashes when the connection to the BMW Assist Response Center has been established.

Once the BMW Assist Response Center has received your Emergency Request, the BMW Assist Response Center contacts you and takes further steps to help you. Even if you are unable to respond, the BMW Assist Response Center will be able to initiate further steps to assist you under certain conditions.

Data for determining the necessary rescue measures are transmitted to the BMW Assist Response Center, e.g. the current position of your vehicle, if it can be determined.

> If the LED is flashing but the BMW Assist Response Center cannot be heard over the hands-free system, it is possible that the hands-free system is malfunctioning. The BMW Assist Response Center may still be able to hear you, however.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

251

Giving and receiving assistance Mobility

Automatically triggering an Emergency Request Under certain conditions, an Emergency Request is sent automatically immediately after a severe accident. An automatic Emergency Request is not affected by pressing the SOS button.

Roadside Assistance BMW Roadside Assistance is available by phone around the clock in many countries. You can obtain support there in the event of a break- down.

First aid pouch Some of the articles contained in the first aid pouch have a limited service life. Therefore, check the expiration dates of the contents regularly and replace any items in good time, if necessary.

The first aid pouch is located on the right-hand side of the trunk in a storage area.

Warning triangle

The warning triangle is located in a holder in the trunk lid. Press the tabs to take it out.

Jump starting If the car's own battery is flat, your BMW's engine can be started by connecting two jumper cables to another vehicle's battery. You can also use the same method to help start another vehicle. Only use jumper cables with fully-insulated clamp handles.

Do not touch any electrically live parts when the engine is running, or a fatal acci-

dent may occur. Carefully adhere to the follow- ing sequence, both to prevent damage to one or both vehicles, and to guard against possible personal injuries.<

Preparation 1. Check whether the battery of the other

vehicle has a voltage of 12 volts and approximately the same capacitance in Ah. This information can be found on the battery.

2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehicle.

3. Switch off any consumers in both vehicles.

There must not be any contact between the bodies of the two vehicles; otherwise,

there is a danger of shorting.<

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

252

Mobility Giving and receiving assistance

Connecting jumper cables Connect the jumper cables in the correct order to prevent sparking at the battery,

which could cause injury.<

Your BMW has a jump-starting connection in the engine compartment which acts as the bat- tery's positive terminal, refer also to the Engine compartment overview on page 232. The cap is marked with +.

1. Pull the cap of the BMW jump-starting connection up to remove.

2. Attach one terminal clamp of the plus/+ jumper cable to the positive terminal of the battery or a starting-aid terminal of the vehi- cle providing assistance.

3. Attach the second terminal clamp of the plus/+ jumper cable to the positive terminal of the battery or a starting-aid terminal of the vehicle to be started.

4. Attach one terminal clamp of the minus/ jumper cable to the negative terminal of the battery or to an engine or body ground of the assisting vehicle.

Your BMW has a special nut as body ground or negative pole.

5. Attach the second terminal clamp of the minus/ jumper cable to the negative termi- nal of the battery or to the engine or body ground of the vehicle to be started.

Starting the engine 1. Start the engine of the donor vehicle and

allow it to run for a few minutes at slightly increased idle speed.

2. Start the engine on the other vehicle in the usual way. If the first start attempt is not successful, wait a few minutes before another attempt in order to allow the discharged battery to recharge.

3. Let the engines run for a few minutes.

4. Disconnect the jumper cables by reversing the above connecting sequence.

If necessary, have the battery checked and recharged.

Never use spray fluids to start the engine.<

Tow-starting, towing away Observe the applicable laws and regulations for tow-starting and towing

vehicles.<

Do not transport any passengers other than the driver in a vehicle that is being

towed.<

Using a tow fitting The screw-in tow fitting must always be carried in the car. It can be screwed in at the front or rear of the BMW.

It is stored with the onboard vehicle tool kit underneath the floor mat in the trunk, refer to page 243.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

253

Giving and receiving assistance Mobility

Use only the tow fitting provided with the vehicle and screw it all the way in. Use the

tow fitting for towing on paved roads only. Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, e.g. do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting. Otherwise, the tow fitting and the vehicle could be damaged.<

Access to screw thread Rectangular cover panel in bumper:

Press the arrow on the cover.

Front

Rear

Being towed Make sure that the ignition is switched on, refer to page 61; otherwise, the low-beam

headlamps, tail lamps, turn signal indicators and windshield wipers may be unavailable. There is no power assist while the engine is off. Thus, braking and steering will require increased effort. Active steering is not active and it will be necessary to turn the steering wheel further.<

Manual transmission Gearshift lever in neutral position.

Automatic transmission Selector lever in position N. Changing selector lever position, refer to page 64.

Do not exceed a towing speed of 45 mph/ 70 km/h and a towing distance of

90 miles/150 km; otherwise, the automatic transmission may be damaged.<

Sport automatic transmission with double clutch

Make sure that the parking lock P is not engaged; otherwise, the rear wheels are

immobilized. When using the car wash function, refer to page 240, make sure that after approx. 30 minutes, the parking lock P is automatically engaged and thus immobilizes the rear wheels. In the event of an electrical malfunction or if the vehicle must be towed for more than approx. 20 minutes, unlock the parking lock manually, refer to page 69.<

When towing, do not exceed a maximum speed of 30 mph or 50 km/h and a maxi-

mum distance traveled of 30 miles/50 km; oth- erwise, the transmission may be damaged.<

Towing methods Do not lift the vehicle by a tow fitting or body and chassis parts; otherwise,

damage may result.<

With a tow bar The towing vehicle must not be lighter than the towed vehicle; otherwise, it may

be impossible to maintain control.<

The tow fittings used should be on the same side on both vehicles. Should it prove impossi- ble to avoid mounting the tow bar at an angle, please observe the following:

> Clearance and maneuvering capability will be sharply limited during cornering.

> The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it is attached offset.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

254

Mobility Giving and receiving assistance

Attach the tow bar to the tow fittings only, as attaching it to other parts of the vehicle

could result in damage.<

With a tow rope When starting off in the towing vehicle, make sure that the tow rope is taut.

To avoid jerking and the associated stresses on vehicle components when

towing, always use nylon ropes or nylon straps. Attach the tow rope to the tow fittings only, as attaching it to other parts of the vehicle could result in damage.<

With a tow truck Manual transmission and automatic transmission:

Sport automatic transmission with double clutch:

Have the BMW transported with a tow truck with a so-called lift bar, or on a flatbed.

Do not tow the vehicle with just the rear axle raised as this may cause the steering to turn.

Tow-starting Avoid tow-starting the vehicle whenever possi- ble; instead, jump start the engine, refer to page 251. Vehicles with a catalytic converter should only be tow-started when the engine is cold, vehicles with an automatic transmission or Sport automatic transmission with double clutch cannot be tow-started at all.

1. Switch on the hazard warning flashers, comply with local regulations.

2. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 61.

3. Shift into 3rd gear.

4. Have the vehicle tow-started with the clutch completely depressed and then slowly release the clutch. After the engine starts, immediately depress the clutch completely again.

5. Stop at a suitable location, remove the tow bar or rope and switch off the hazard warning flashers.

6. Have the vehicle checked.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

255

Giving and receiving assistance Mobility

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

This chapter contains technical data, short commands for the voice activation system and

an index that will help you find information most quickly.

Reference

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

258

Reference Technical data

Technical data

Vehicle equipment In this chapter, all production, country, and optional equipment that is offered in the model range is described. For this reason, descrip-

tions will be given of some equipment that may not be available in a vehicle, for example due to the special options or national-market version selected. This also applies to safety related functions and systems.

Dimensions

Coupe

Width with mirrors in/mm 75.6/1,919

Width without mirrors in/mm 68.8/1,748

Height

Height, 135i

in/mm

in/mm

56.0/1,423

55.4/1,408

Length in/mm 172.2/4,373

Wheelbase in/mm 104.7/2,660

Smallest turning circle dia. ft/m 35.1/10.7

Convertible

Width with mirrors in/mm 75.6/1,919

Width without mirrors in/mm 68.8/1,748

Height

Height, 135i

in/mm

in/mm

55.6/1,411

54.8/1,392

Length in/mm 172.2/4,373

Wheelbase in/mm 104.7/2,660

Smallest turning circle dia. ft/m 35.1/10.7

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

259

Technical data Reference

Weights

Coupe

Convertible

Capacities

128i 135i

Approved gross weight

> with manual transmission lbs/kg 4,134/1,875 4,255/1,930

> with automatic transmission lbs/kg 4,211/1,910

> Sport automatic transmis- sion with double clutch

lbs/kg 4,321/1,960

Load lbs/kg 794/360 794/360

Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,028/920 2,116/960

Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,293/1,040 2,293/1,040

Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 165/75 165/75

Trunk capacity cu ft/liters 13.1/370 13.1/370

128i 135i

Approved gross weight

> with manual transmission lbs/kg 4,398/1,995 4,542/2,060

> with automatic transmission lbs/kg 4,475/2,030

> Sport automatic transmis- sion with double clutch

lbs/kg 4,608/2,090

Load lbs/kg 750/340 750/340

Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,050/930 2,161/980

Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,467/1,119 2,469/1,120

Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg

Trunk capacity cu ft/liters 9.1-10.7/260-305 9.1-10.7/260-305

Notes

Fuel tank: US gal/liters approx. 14.0/53 Fuel recommendations: page 221including reserve of US gal/liters approx. 2.1/8.0

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

260

Reference Short commands for the voice activation system

Short commands for the voice activation system

Vehicle equipment In this chapter, all production, country, and optional equipment that is offered in the model range is described. For this reason, descrip- tions will be given of some equipment that may not be available in a vehicle, for example due to the special options or national-market version selected. This also applies to safety related functions and systems.

General information For instructions on the voice activation system, refer to page 27.

Having the possible spoken commands read aloud: {Voice commands}

The following short commands are for vehicles with the voice activation system. They do not function with equipment packages that permit only the mobile phone to be operated by voice.

Useful short commands

Function Command

Opening a music collection {Music collection}

Opening the tone control {Tone}

Opening the settings {Settings}

Accessing the onboard computer {Onboard info}

Opening the contacts {Contacts}

Displaying phone book {Phonebook}

Accessing services {Assist}

Accessing BMW Assist {B M W Assist}

Accessing ConnectedDrive {Connected Drive}

Opening the home address {Home address}

Opening destination entry {Enter address}

Opening destination guidance {Guidance}

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

261

Short commands for the voice activation system Reference

CD/Multimedia

CD/DVD drive

Music collection

External devices

Tone control

Function Command

Selecting a track {Track } e.g. track 5

or

{C D track } e.g. CD track 5

Playing back a CD {C D on}

Selecting a CD {Select C D}

Selecting a CD and track {C D track } e.g. CD 3 track 5

Opening the CD and Multimedia menu {C D and multimedia}

CD and DVD {C D}

Displaying entertainment details on the split screen

{Entertainment details}

Function Command

Searching for music; opening the menu {Music search}

Calling up the current playback {Current playback}

Opening a music collection {Music collection}

Playing back a music collection {Music collection on}

Playing back the most frequently played tracks {Top fifty}

Function Command

Opening external devices {External devices}

Accessing Bluetooth devices {Bluetooth}

AUX front {AUX}

Function Command

Opening the tone control {Tone}

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

262

Reference Short commands for the voice activation system

Radio

FM

AM

Satellite radio

Presets

Function Command

Selecting a station directly {Station } e.g. National Public Radio

Calling up the radio {Radio}

Calling up an FM station {F M}

Opening manual search {Manual}

Selecting the frequency range {Select frequency}

Calling up a station {Select station}

Function Command

Calling up an AM station {A M}

Opening manual search {Manual}

Function Command

Calling up the satellite radio {Satellite radio}

Switching on the satellite radio {Satellite radio on}

Selecting a satellite radio channel {Select satellite radio} e.g. channel 2

Function Command

Opening the stored stations {Presets}

Choosing a stored station {Select preset}

Selecting a stored station {Preset } e.g. stored station 2

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

263

Short commands for the voice activation system Reference

Telephone

Office

Contacts

Function Command

Dialing a phone number {Dial number}

Opening the Telephone menu {Telephone}

Displaying phone book {Phonebook}

Redialing {Redial}

Displaying accepted calls {Received calls}

Displaying the list of messages {Messages}

Displaying Bluetooth devices {Bluetooth}

Function Command

Opening Office menu {Office}

Displaying current Office {Current office}

Displaying contacts {Contacts}

Displaying messages {Messages}

Displaying calendar {Calendar}

Displaying tasks {Tasks}

Displaying reminders {Reminders}

Function Command

Selecting a name {Choose name}

Opening the contacts {Contacts}

My contacts {My contacts}

New contact {New contact}

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

264

Reference Short commands for the voice activation system

Navigation

General information

Map

Function Command

Navigation menu {Navigation}

Opening destination entry {Enter address}

Entering an address {Enter address}

Opening destination guidance {Guidance}

Starting destination guidance {Start guidance}

Ending destination guidance {Stop guidance}

Opening the home address {Home address}

Opening the route criteria {Route preference}

Opening the route {Route information}

Switching on the voice instructions {Switch on voice instructions}

Repeating a voice instruction {Repeat voice instructions}

Switching off the voice instructions {Switch off voice instructions}

Displaying the address book {Address book}

Displaying the last destinations {Last destinations}

Opening the traffic bulletins {Traffic Info}

Special destinations {Points of interest}

Function Command

Displaying the map {Map}

Map facing north {Map facing north}

Map in the direction of travel {Map in direction of travel}

Perspective map {Map perspective view}

Automatic map scaling {Map with automatic scaling}

Changing the scale {Map scale}

Scale...meters {Map scale meters} e.g. map scale of 100 meters

Scale...kilometers {Map scale kilometers} e.g. split screen scale of 5 kilometers

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

265

Short commands for the voice activation system Reference

Split screen settings

Destination guidance with intermediate destinations

ConnectedDrive or BMW Assist

Function Command

Split screen {Switch on split screen}

Switching off the split screen {Turn off split screen}

Adapting the split screen {Split screen content}

Split screen, current position {Split screen current position}

Split screen, map facing north {Split screen map facing north}

Split screen, direction of travel {Split screen map in direction of travel}

Split screen, perspective {Split screen perspective}

Automatically scaling the split screen {Split screen automatic scaling}

Expanded intersection zoom on the split screen {Split screen Exit ramp view}

Split screen scale ... meters {Split screen scale meters} e.g. split screen scale of 100 meters

Split screen scale ... kilometers {Split screen scale kilometers} e.g. split screen scale of 5 kilometers

Split screen, highlighting traffic bulletins {Split screen, Traffic conditions}

Split screen, computer {Split screen on board info}

Split screen, trip computer {Split screen trip computer}

Function Command

Entering a new destination {Enter address}

Trip list {Stored trips}

Function Command

Accessing BMW Assist {B M W Assist}

Accessing ConnectedDrive {Connected Drive}

Accessing BMW Online {B M W Online}

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

266

Reference Short commands for the voice activation system

Vehicle information

Settings

Vehicle

Equipment

Function Command

Accessing the onboard computer {Onboard info}

Opening the trip computer {Trip computer}

Opening the vehicle information {Vehicle info}

Opening the vehicle status {Vehicle status}

Function Command

Opening the main menu {Main menu}

Opening the settings {Settings}

Opening the options {Options}

Settings on the Control Display {Control display}

Opening the time and date settings {Time and date}

Opening the language and unit settings {Language and units}

Opening the speed limit settings {Speed}

Opening the light settings {Lighting}

Opening the door lock settings {Door locks}

Opening profiles {Profiles}

Function Command

Opening the air conditioning settings {Climate}

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

267

Short commands for the voice activation system Reference

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

268

Reference Everything from A to Z

Everything from A to Z

Index

A ABS Antilock Brake

System 89 Acceleration assistant, refer to

Launch Control 70 Accessories, refer to Vehicle

equipment 5 Accident, reporting, refer to

Emergency Request 250 Activated-charcoal filter 109 Active steering 96 Adaptive Light Control 101 Additives coolant 235 engine oil 235 Address, entering 134, 140 Address for navigation entering 134 Adjusting temperature 107 Airbags 97 sitting safely 49 warning lamp 98 Air conditioner 106 Air distribution automatic 107 Airing, refer to Ventilation 109 Air outlets, refer to Air

vents 106 Air pressure, checking, refer

to Tire inflation pressure 223

Air recirculation, refer to Recirculated air mode 108

Air vents 106 Air volume 108 AKI, refer to Fuel grade 221

Alarm system 38 avoiding unintentional

alarms 40 interior motion sensor 39 switching off an alarm 39 tilt alarm sensor 39 Albums in music

collection 175 ALL program 108 All-season tires, refer to

Winter tires 231 AM, waveband 157 Ambient air, refer to

Recirculated air mode 108 Antifreeze coolant 235 washer fluid 72 Antilock Brake System

ABS 89 Anti-theft alarm system, refer

to Alarm system 38 Appointments, refer to

Calendar 207 Approved axle loads, refer to

Weights 259 Approved engine oils 235 Approved gross vehicle

weight, refer to Weights 259 Apps 216 Armrest, refer to Center

armrest 115 Arrival time computer 78 Ashtray 116 Assistance systems, refer to

Dynamic Stability Control DSC 89

AUC Automatic recirculated air control 108

Audible instructions, refer to Voice instructions 145

Audio 154 controls 154 switching on/off 154 tone control 155 volume 155 Automatic air distribution 107 air volume 107 cruise control 73 headlamp control 100 Automatic car washes 239 Automatic climate control 106 Automatic curb monitor 56 Automatic high beams and

low beams, refer to High- beam Assistant 102

Automatic lamps refer to Welcome lamps 101 Automatic recirculated air

control AUC 108 Automatic Service

Request 215 Automatic transmission with

Steptronic 64 selector lever lock 64 shiftlock 64 towing 252 tow-starting 252 AUTO program for automatic

climate control 107 AUX-In connection 177 Available services 216 Average fuel consumption 77 setting the units 80

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

269

Everything from A to Z Reference

Average speed 77 Avoid highways in

navigation 143 Avoiding unintentional

alarms 40 Axle loads, refer to

Weights 259

B Backrests, refer to Seats 50 Backrest width adjustment 51 Back seats, refer to Rear seats adjusting head restraints 52 Backup lamp, replacing

bulb 247 Bag for skis, refer to Ski

bag 118 Band-aids, refer to First aid

pouch 251 Bar, refer to Tow-starting,

towing away 253 Base plate for telephone or

mobile phone refer to Snap-in adapter 199 Bass, tone control 155 Battery 248 charging 248 disposal 42, 249 jump starting 251 replacing 248 temporary power failure 248 Battery renewal remote control for vehicle 41 Being towed 253 Belts, refer to Safety belts 54 Belt tensioner, refer to Safety

belts 54 Beverage holders, refer to

Cupholders 116 Blower, refer to Air

volume 108

Bluetooth, activating/ deactivating 189

Bluetooth audio 180 disconnecting an audio

connection 183 pairing device 181 playback 182 unpairing device 183 what to do if 183 BMW Assist 212 updating 216 BMW Info 206 BMW Maintenance

System 237 BMW Online 214 Bottle holders, refer to

Cupholders 116 Brake Assist, refer to Dynamic

Brake Control 89 Brake fluid service requirements 80 Brake Force Display 96 Brake lamps brake force display 96 replacing bulb 247 Brake pads, breaking in 124 Brake pedal, refer to Braking

safely 126 Brake rotors 127 brakes 124 breaking in 124 Brakes ABS 89 BMW Maintenance

System 237 braking safely 126 breaking in 124 parking brake 63 service requirements 80

Brake system 124 BMW Maintenance

System 237 breaking in 124 disc brakes 127 Breakdown services, refer to

Roadside Assistance 251 Breaking in the clutch 124 Break-in period 124 Bulb changing, refer to Lamps

and bulbs 243 Button for starting the

engine 61 Buttons on the steering

wheel 13

C Calendar 207 displaying appointment 207 selecting calendar day 207 California Proposition 65

warning 6 Call accepting 193 ending 193 muting the microphone 195 rejecting 193 Calling, refer to Phone

numbers, dialing 194 Calls with multiple parties 194 Can holders, refer to

Cupholders 116 Capacities 259 Capacity of the trunk 259 Car battery, refer to Vehicle

battery 248 Car care, refer to Care 239

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

270

Reference Everything from A to Z

Care 239 automatic car washes 239 care products 240 carpets 242 chrome parts 241 convertible top 242 displays 242 fine wood parts 241 headlamps 240 leather 240 light-alloy wheels 241 paintwork 240 plastic parts 241 rubber seals 241 safety belts 241 sensors and cameras 242 upholstery and cloth

trim 241 Cargo, securing 128 Cargo area, refer to Trunk Cargo area lid, refer to Trunk

lid 37 Cargo loading 127 securing cargo 128 stowing cargo 128 vehicle 127 Car jack jacking points 248 Car key, refer to Integrated

key/remote control 32 Car phone installation location, refer to

Center armrest 115 Car phone, refer to

Telephone 188 Car radio, refer to Radio 157 Car wash 239 Catalytic converter, refer to

Hot exhaust system 126 CD, audio playback 166

CD player 166 controls 154 fast forward/reverse 168 random sequence 167 selecting a track 166 switching on/off 154 tone control 155 volume 155 Center armrest 115 Center brake lamp, replacing

bulb 247 Center console, refer to

Around the center console 16

Central key, refer to Integrated key/remote control 32

Central locking from inside 37 from outside 33 Central locking system 33 comfort access 40 Changes, technical, refer to

For your own safety 5 Changing bulbs 243 Changing gears 68 Changing the language on the

Control Display 87 Changing wheels 248 Chassis number, refer to

Engine compartment 232 Check Control 84 Child restraint fixing system

LATCH 59 Child restraint systems 58 Child seats 58 Chrome parts 241 Chrome polish 241 Cigarette lighter 117 Cleaning headlamps 72 washer fluid 73 Cleaning your BMW, refer to

Care 239

Climate control automatic air

distribution 107 Clock 75 12h/24h mode 83 setting the time and date 83 setting time 82 Closing from inside 37 from outside 34 Clothes hooks 116 Cold start, refer to Starting the

engine 62 Comfort Access 40 replacing the battery 41 Comfort area, refer to Around

the center console 16 Compartment for remote

control, refer to Ignition lock 61

Compass 113 Computer 77 displays on Control

Display 78 Computer, refer to iDrive 20 Concierge service 213 Condensation, refer to When

the vehicle is parked 127 Condition Based Service

CBS 237 Configuring settings, refer to

Personal Profile 32 Confirmation signals for

locking/unlocking the vehicle 35

ConnectedDrive 212 Connecting a music player,

AUX-In connection 177 Connecting a music player,

USB audio interface 178 Connecting an iPod, refer to

AUX-In connection 177 Connecting an iPod, refer to

USB audio interface 178

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

271

Everything from A to Z Reference

Connecting an MP3 player, refer to AUX-In connection 177

Connecting an MP3 player, refer to USB audio interface 178

Connecting vacuum cleaner, refer to Connecting electrical appliances 117

Consumption, refer to Average fuel consumption 77

Contacts 202 deleting 204, 211 exporting/importing 211 new contact 203 Control Center, refer to

iDrive 20 Control Display 20, 21 Control Display, refer to iDrive switching on/off 21 Controller, refer to iDrive 20 Controls and displays 12 Convenient opening and

closing windows 34 windows with Comfort

Access 40 with Comfort Access 40 Convenient start, refer to

Starting the engine 62 Convertible rollover protection

system 99 top 44 wind deflector 47 Convertible top convenient opening 34 Convertible top care 242 Coolant 235 checking level 236 filling 236 Coolant temperature 236 Cooling, maximum 107

Cooling fluid, refer to Coolant 235

Corner-illuminating lamps 102

Cornering light, refer to Adaptive Light Control 101

Courtesy lamps 104 Criteria for route 143 Cross-hairs in navigation 139 Cruise control 73 Cruising range 77 Cupholders 116 Curb weight, refer to

Weights 259 Current fuel consumption 77 Current playback external devices 180 in music collection 174 Customer Relations 215

D Dashboard, refer to

Cockpit 12 Dashboard lighting, refer to

Instrument lighting 104 Data, technical capacities 259 dimensions 258 weights 259 Data memory 7 Data transfer 216 Date setting 84 setting format 84 Daytime running lights, switch

positions 101 DBC Dynamic Brake

Control 89 Deactivating front passenger

airbags 97 Deadlocking, refer to

Locking 34

Defect door lock 36 fuel filler flap 221 Defining a home address 203 Defogging windows 109 Defrosting windows 109 Defrosting windows and

removing condensation 109 Defrosting windshield, refer to

Defrosting windows 109 Defrost position, refer to

Defrosting windows 109 Destination, entering by town/

city name 134 Destination address entering 134, 140 Destination entry via BMW

Assist 139 Destination for navigation entering by voice 140 entering via map 139 entry 134 home address 137 manual entry 134 Destination guidance 143 bypassing a route

section 144 changing specified

route 143 continuing 143 starting 143 voice instructions 145 volume of voice

instructions 145 Differential, breaking in 124 Digital clock 75, 82 Digital compass 113 Digital radio, refer to HD

Radio 159 Dimensions 258 Directional indicators, refer to

Turn signals 71 Direction instructions, refer to

Voice instructions 145

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

272

Reference Everything from A to Z

Directory for navigation, refer to Address book 136

Display, refer to Control Display 20

Displaying contact pictures 203

Display lighting, refer to Instrument lighting 104

Displays, refer to Instrument cluster 14

Displays and controls 12 Disposal of coolant 235 remote control battery 42 vehicle battery 249 Distance, refer to

Computer 78 Distance remaining to service,

refer to Service requirements 80

Distance to destination, refer to Computer 78

Distance warning, refer to Park Distance Control PDC 88

Door key, refer to Integrated key/remote control 32

Door lock 36 Door lock, confirmation

signals 35 Doors, manual operation 36 DOT Quality Grades 228 Draft-free ventilation 109 Drinks holders, refer to

Cupholders 116 Drive mode 68 Drive-off assistance, refer to

DSC 89 Drive-off assistant 90 Driving dynamics control 69 Driving lamps, refer to Parking

lamps/low beams 100 Driving notes 124 Driving off on hills, refer to

Drive-off assistant 90

Driving stability control systems 89

Driving through water 126 Driving tips, refer to Driving

notes 124 Dry air, refer to Air

conditioning 109 DSC Dynamic Stability

Control 89 DTC Dynamic Traction

Control 90 indicator lamps 90 DVD country codes 168 settings 169 video playback 168 DVD menu 169 DVD player, refer to CD

player 166 DVD video 168 Dynamic Brake Control

DBC 89 Dynamic destination

guidance 149 Dynamic Stability Control

DSC 89 Dynamic Traction Control

DTC 90 indicator lamps 90

E EBV Electronic brake-force

distribution 89 Eject button, see buttons on

the CD/DVD player 154 Electrical defect 7-gear Sport automatic

transmission with double clutch 69

Electrical malfunction door lock 36 fuel filler flap 221 Electronic brake-force

distribution EBV 89

Electronic oil level check 233 Electronic Stability Program

ESP, refer to Dynamic Stability Control DSC 89

E-mail 206 Emergency operation, refer to

Manual operation door lock 36 fuel filler flap 221 transmission lock, automatic

transmission 66 Emergency release, trunk

lid 38 Emergency Request 250 Emergency services, refer to

Roadside Assistance 251 Energy, saving saving fuel 124 Engine breaking in 124 starting 62 starting, Comfort Access 40 switching off 63 Engine compartment 232 Engine coolant, refer to

Coolant 235 Engine oil adding 235 additives 235 alternative oil types 235 approved engine oils 235 BMW Maintenance

System 237 checking level 233 intervals between changes,

refer to Service requirements 80

Engine oil level, checking 233 Engine starting, refer to

Starting the engine 62 Entering the postal code for

navigation 135 Entry map for destination 139 Equalizer, tone control 155

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

273

Everything from A to Z Reference

ESP Electronic Stability Program, refer to Dynamic Stability Control DSC 89

Exhaust system, refer to Hot exhaust system 126

Exterior mirrors 55 adjusting 55 automatic dimming

feature 56 automatic heating 56 folding in and out 55 External devices 177 random sequence 180 Eyes for tow-starting and towing

away 252 for tying down loads 128

F Failure messages, refer to

Check Control 84 Failure of an electrical

consumer 249 False alarm, refer to Avoiding

unintentional alarms 40 Fastening safety belts, refer to

Safety belts 54 Fastest route for

navigation 143 Fast forward CD player 168 Filter of automatic climate

control, refer to Microfilter/ activated charcoal filter 109

First aid pouch 251 Fixture for remote control,

refer to Ignition lock 61 Flash when locking/

unlocking 35 Flat tire run-flat tires 231 tire pressure monitor

TPM 92

Flat Tire Monitor FTM 91 indicating a flat tire 92 initializing the system 91 system limits 91 Flat tires, refer to Tire

condition 229 FM, waveband 157 Fog lamps 103 indicator lamp 15, 104 Footwell lamps 104 For your own safety 5 Free memory capacity, music

collection 176 Front airbags 97 Front seat adjustment 50 Frost on windows, refer to

Defrosting windows 109 FTM, refer to Flat Tire

Monitor 91 Fuel 221 gauge 76 high-quality brands 221 quality 221 specifications 221 tank contents, refer to

Capacities 259 Fuel clock, refer to Fuel

gauge 76 Fuel consumption indicator,

refer to Average fuel consumption 77

Fuel consumption statistics, refer to Average fuel consumption 77

Fuel display, refer to Fuel gauge 76

Fuel filler flap 220 releasing in the event of

electrical malfunction 221 Fuses 249

G Garage door opener, refer to

Integrated universal remote control 111

Gasoline, refer to Required fuel 221

Gasoline display, refer to Fuel gauge 76

Gas station recommendations 145

Gear indicator, automatic transmission 64

Gear shifting automatic transmission 64 manual transmission 64 Gearshift lever 67 automatic transmission with

Steptronic 64 manual transmission 64 General driving notes 125 Glass roof, electric 43 convenient opening and

closing with Comfort Access 40

opening, closing 43 pinch protection system 44 remote control 34 tilting 43 Glove compartment 115 GPS navigation, refer to

Navigation system 132 Grills, refer to Air vents 106 Gross vehicle weight, refer to

Weights 259

H Halogen lamps replacing bulbs 244 Handbrake, refer to Parking

brake 63 Hands-free system 197 Hands-free system, refer to

Microphone for hands-free mode 16

Hazard warning flashers 16 HD Radio 159 Head airbags 97

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

274

Reference Everything from A to Z

Headlamp control, automatic 100

Headlamp cover 244 Headlamp flasher 71 indicator lamp 15 Headlamps replacing bulbs 244 Head Light, refer to Adaptive

Light Control 101 Head restraints 52 Heated seats 54 steering wheel 57 Heated mirrors 56 Heating mirrors 56 seats 54 steering wheel 57 Heating, rear window 109 Heating and ventilation 106 Heavy loads, refer to Stowing

cargo 128 Height, refer to

Dimensions 258 Height adjustment steering wheel 57 High-beam Assistant 102 High beams 102 indicator lamp 15 replacing bulbs 244 High beams and low beams,

automatic, refer to High- beam Assistant 102

High-pressure washer 239 High water, refer to Driving

through water 126 Highways, refer to Route

criteria 143 Hills 127 Holders for cups 116 Hood 232 Hot exhaust system 126 Hydraulic brake assist, refer to

Dynamic Brake Control 89 Hydroplaning 126

I IBOC, refer to HD radio 159 Ice warning, refer to Outside

temperature warning 75 Identification marks tire coding 228 iDrive 20 adjusting brightness 87 changing date and time 83 changing language 87 menu guidance 21 operating principle 20 status information 23 Ignition 62 switched off 62 switched on 62 Ignition key, refer to

Integrated key/remote control 32

Ignition key position 1, refer to Radio readiness 61

Ignition key position 2, refer to Ignition on 62

Ignition lock 61 Incoming call 193 Indicator and warning

lamps 15 tire pressure monitor

TPM 94 Individual settings, refer to

Personal Profile 32 Inflation pressure monitoring,

refer to Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 92

Initializing compass, refer to

Calibrating 114 radio, refer to Storing

stations 158 refer to Setting the time and

date 83 Initializing, Flat Tire Monitor

FTM 91

Instructions for navigation system, refer to Voice instructions 145

Instrument cluster 14 Instrument combination, refer

to Instrument cluster 14 Instrument lighting 104 Integrated key 32 Integrated universal remote

control 111 Interactive map 139 Interior lamps 104 remote control 35 Interior motion sensor 39 Interior rearview mirror 56 automatic dimming

feature 56 compass 113 Intermittent mode of the

wipers 72 Intersection, entering,

navigation 135

J Jacking points 248 Jets, refer to Air vents 106 Jets, refer to Window washer

nozzles 72 Joystick, refer to iDrive 20 Jumpering, refer to Jump

starting 251 Jump starting 251

K Key, refer to Integrated key/

remote control 32 Keyless go, refer to Comfort

Access 40 Keyless opening and closing,

refer to Comfort Access 40 Key Memory, refer to Personal

Profile 32

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

275

Everything from A to Z Reference

Keypad dialing 195 Kickdown 65 Knock control 221

L Lamps adaptive light control 101 interior lighting 104 Lamps, refer to Parking lamps/

Low beams 100 Lamps and bulbs, replacing

bulbs 243 Lashing eyes, refer to

Securing cargo 128 Last destinations 137 LATCH child restraint fixing

system 59 Launch Control 70 Leather care 240 LED Light-emitting

diodes 243 Length, refer to

Dimensions 258 License plate lamp, replacing

bulb 247 Light instrument lighting 104 refer to High-beam

Assistant 102 Light-alloy wheels 241 Light control refer to High-beam

Assistant 102 Light-emitting diodes

LED 243 Lighter 117 socket 117 Lighting lamps and bulbs 243 of the instruments 104 of vehicle, refer to

Lamps 100 Light switch 100

Limit, refer to Speed limit 86 Load 127 Load securing equipment,

refer to Securing cargo 128 Lock buttons of doors, refer to

Locking 37 Locking adjusting confirmation

signal 35 from inside 37 from outside 34 without remote control, refer

to Comfort Access 40 Locking and unlocking doors from inside 37 from outside 34 Low beam control, refer to

High-beam Assistant 102 Low-beam headlamps 100 automatic 100 replacing bulbs 244 Lower back support, refer to

Lumbar support 51 Luggage compartment lid, refer to Trunk lid 37 Luggage compartment, refer

to Trunk Luggage rack, refer to Roof-

mounted luggage rack 129 Lumbar support 51

M M+S tires, refer to Winter

tires 231 Maintenance, refer to BMW Maintenance

System 237 Service and Warranty

Information Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models

Maintenance system 237

Malfunction warnings, refer to Check Control 84

Managing music 175 Manually unlocking parking

lock 69 Manual operation door lock 36 fuel filler flap 221 parking lock 69 transmission lock, automatic

transmission 66 Manual operation with

automatic transmission 65 Manual transmission 64 Map for navigation changing scale 146 entering destination 139 Map view 145 Maximum cooling 107 Maximum speed for winter tires 231 Menus, refer to iDrive 20 Messages 204 Messages from the Concierge

service 205 Microfilter/activated-charcoal

filter for automatic climate control 109

Microphone for telephone 16 Mirror dimming feature 56 Mirrors 55 automatic curb monitor 56 exterior mirrors 55 heating 56 interior rearview mirror 56 Mobile phone adjusting volume 193 connecting, refer to Mobile

phone, pairing 189 operation 193 pairing 189 suitable mobile phones 188 unpairing 191 what to do if. 192

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

276

Reference Everything from A to Z

Mobile phone, installation location, refer to Center armrest 115

Mobile phone, refer to Telephone 188

Modifications, technical, refer to For your own safety 5

Monitor, refer to iDrive 20 Monitoring system for tire

pressures, refer to Flat Tire Monitor 91

Multi-channel playback 156 Multifunctional steering

wheel, refer to Buttons on the steering wheel 13

Multifunction switch refer to Turn signals/

headlamp flasher 71 refer to Wiper system 71 Music collection 172 backing up 176 deleting 176 random sequence 175 restoring 176 Music interface for

smartphones 178 Music search 174 My Info 205

N Navigation starting destination

guidance after entering a destination 136

storing current position 136 voice activation 140 Navigation announcements,

refer to Switching voice instructions on/off 145

Navigation data 132

Navigation system 132 address book 136 bypassing a route

section 144 continuing destination

guidance 143 destination entry 134 dynamic destination

guidance 149 entering a destination by

voice 140 entering a destination

manually 134 frequently asked

questions 151 gas station

recommendations 145 planning a trip 141 route list 144 selecting destination via

map 139 selecting route criteria 143 special destinations 137 starting destination

guidance 143 terminating destination

guidance 143 traffic bulletins 147 voice instructions 145 volume adjustment 145 Neck support, refer to Head

restraints 52 Nets, refer to Storage

compartments 116 Neutral 67 New tires 230 Next Service indicator, refer to

Condition Based Service CBS 237

North-facing map 145 Notes 208

O OBD socket, refer to Socket

for Onboard Diagnosis 238 Octane ratings, refer to Fuel

specifications 221 Odometer 75 Office 201 current office 201 what to do if. 209 Oil, refer to Engine oil 233 Oil consumption 233 Oil level 233 Old batteries, refer to

Disposal 249 Onboard vehicle tool kit 243 Opening and closing comfort access 40 from inside 37 from outside 34 using the door lock 36 using the remote control 34 Options, selecting for

navigation 143 Orientation menu, refer to

Start menu 21 Outlets, refer to

Ventilation 109 Outside temperature

display 75 changing unit of measure 80 in computer 80 Outside temperature

warning 75 Overriding selector lever

lock 66 Overview radio operation 154

P Paintwork care 240 Park assistant, refer to Park

Distance Control 88

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

277

Everything from A to Z Reference

Park Distance Control PDC 88 Parked car ventilation 110 preselecting switch-on

times 110 switching on and off

directly 110 Parking vehicle 63 Parking aid, refer to Park

Distance Control PDC 88 Parking brake 63 indicator lamp 63 Parking lamps/low beams 100 replacing bulbs 245 Parts and accessories, refer to

Vehicle equipment 5 Passenger side mirror tilt

function 56 Pathway lighting 101 Personal information, refer to

Office 201 Personal Profile 32 Phone numbers dialing 194 Phone reception level, refer to

Status information 23 Pinch protection system glass roof, electric 44 windows 43 Playing music 174 Polish 241 Pollen, refer to Microfilter/

activated-charcoal filter 109 Power windows 42 Power windows, refer to

Windows 42 Pressure, tires 223 Pressure monitoring of tires,

refer to Flat Tire Monitor 91 Pressure monitoring of tires,

refer to Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 92

Programmable buttons on the steering wheel 13

Programmable memory keys 25

Protection function, refer to Pinch protection system

glass roof, electric 44 windows 43 Providing medical assistance,

refer to First aid pouch 251 Puncture flat tire monitor 91

R Radio controls 154 HD radio 159 satellite radio 161 selecting waveband 157 storing stations 158 switching on/off 154 tone control 155 volume 155 Radio position, refer to Radio

readiness 61 Radio readiness 61 switched off 62 switched on 61 Rain sensor 72 Random sequence CD player 167 external devices 180 music collection 175 Reading aloud 209 Reading lamps 105 Rear lamps, refer to Tail

lamps 246 Rear seats adjusting head restraints 52 folding down backrests 117 Rearview mirror, refer to

Mirrors 55 Rear window defroster 109 Reception quality 158 radio station 158

Recirculated air mode 108 Recirculation of air, refer to

Recirculated air mode 108 Redialing 196 Reflectors, refer to Tail

lamps 246 Refueling 220 Releasing hood 233 Remaining distance, refer to

Computer 78 Remaining distance, refer to

Cruising range 77 Reminders 208 Remote control 32 battery renewal 41 comfort access 40 garage door opener 111 malfunctions 35, 41 removing from the ignition

lock 61 service data 237 trunk lid 35 Remote control key, refer to

Integrated key/remote control 32

Replacement fuses, refer to Fuses 249

Replacement remote control 32

Replacing bulbs, refer to Lamps and bulbs 243

Replacing tires, refer to New wheels and tires 230

Reporting safety defects 7 Reserve warning, refer to Fuel

gauge 76 Reservoir for washer

systems 73 Reset, refer to Resetting tone

settings 156 Restraint systems, refer to

Safety belts 54 Restraint systems for

children 58

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

278

Reference Everything from A to Z

Retreaded tires 230 Reverse CD player 168 Reverse gear 67 automatic transmission with

Steptronic 65 manual transmission 64 Road map 145 Roadside

Assistance 213, 251 Roadside parking lamps 102 replacing bulbs 245 Roadworthiness test, refer to

Service requirements 80 Rollover protection system,

Convertible 99 resetting 99 Roof load capacity 259 Roof-mounted luggage

rack 129 Rope, refer to Tow-starting,

towing away 254 Rotary/pushbutton control,

refer to Controller 20 Route 143, 144 bypassing sections 144 changing 143, 144 changing criteria 143 displaying streets or towns/

cities 144 map view 145 selecting 143 Route instructions, refer to

Destination guidance through voice instructions 145

Route map, refer to Map view 145

Route section, changing 144 Route selection 143 RSC Runflat System

Component, refer to Run-flat tires 231

Runflat System Component RSC, refer to Run-flat tires 231

Run-flat tires 231 flat tire 92 inflation pressure 223 new tires 230 remaining driving distance,

refer to Indication of a flat tire 92

tire replacement 230 winter tires 231 Runflat tyres, refer to Run-flat

tires 231

S Safety-belt height

adjustment 55 Safety belts 54 damage 55 indicator lamp 55 reminder 55 sitting safely 49 Safety systems airbags 97 antilock brake system

ABS 89 dynamic stability control

DSC 89 rollover protection system,

Convertible 99 safety belts 54 Safety tires, refer to Run-flat

tires 231 Satellite radio 161 activating or deactivating

channels 161 favorites 163 selecting channels 162 storing channels 162 time shift 163 traffic jump 165 Saving fuel 124 Screen, refer to iDrive 20 Screw thread for tow

fitting 253 SDARS, refer to satellite

radio 161

Seat and mirror memory 54 Seat belt reminder, refer to

"Fasten safety belts" reminder 55

Seats 50 heating 54 sitting safely 49 Securing cargo 119, 120 Selecting a station radio 157 Selecting new scale for

navigation 146 Selector lever, automatic

transmission with Steptronic 64

Selector lever positions 67 Service, refer to Roadside

Assistance 251 Service car, refer to Roadside

Assistance 251 Service data in remote

control 237 Service Interval Display, refer

to Condition Based Service CBS 237

Service Request 215 Service requirements 80 Service status 216 Settings clock, 12h/24h format 83 date format 84 DVD 169 language 87 Settings for the map view 146 Setting times, refer to

Preselecting switch-on times 110

Setting tone during audio operation, refer to Tone control 155

Shifting 68 7-gear Sport automatic

transmission with double clutch 68

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

279

Everything from A to Z Reference

Shifting gears with automatic transmission with Steptronic 65

Shift into a drive position, refer to selector lever positions 67

Shiftlock, refer to Changing selector lever positions 64

Shift paddles on the steering wheel 68

Short commands for the voice activation system 260

Short route in navigation, refer to Selecting route 143

Side airbags 97 Side windows, refer to

Windows 42 Signal horn, refer to Horn 12 Sitting safely 49 airbags 49 safety belts 49 Ski bag 118 Sliding/tilt sunroof, refer to

Glass roof, electric 43 Slot for remote control 61 Smokers' package, refer to

Ashtray 116, 117 Snap-in adapter 188 inserting/removing 199 Snap-in adapter, refer to

Center armrest 115 Snow chains 231 Socket, refer to Connecting

electrical appliances 117 Socket for Onboard Diagnosis

OBD 238 Software update 184 Spare fuses 249 Special destinations 137 Special destinations,

displaying 139 Special oils, refer to Approved

engine oils 235 Specified engine oils, refer to

Approved engine oils 235

Speed for winter tires 231 Speed limit warning, refer to

Speed limit 86 Speedo, refer to

Speedometer 14 Speedometer 14 Speed Volume 156 Split screen content, refer to

Selecting the display for the split screen content 24

Sport automatic transmission with double clutch 66

driving dynamics control 69 kickdown 68 launch control 70 manually unlocking parking

lock 69 neutral 67 reverse gear 67 Sport program, automatic

transmission with Steptronic 65

Sport program with 7-gear Sport automatic transmission with double clutch 68

Stability control, refer to Driving stability control systems 89

Start/Stop button 61 starting the engine 62 switching off the engine 63 Starting, refer to Starting the

engine 62 Starting assistance, refer to

Jump starting 251 Starting the engine start/stop button 61 Start menu 21 State/province, for

navigation 134 Status information on the

Control Display 23 Status of this Owner's Manual

at time of printing 5

Steam jet 239 Steering wheel 57 adjustment 57 buttons on steering

wheel 13 heating 57 shift paddles 68 Steering wheel buttons, refer

to Shift paddles 68 Steering with variable ratio,

refer to Active steering 96 Steptronic, refer to Automatic

transmission with Steptronic 64

Storage 242 Storage compartment

package 116 Storage compartments 116 Stored trip, calling up 142 Storing seat position, refer to Seat

and mirror memory 54 Storing a destination in the

address book 136 Storing music 172 Storing tires 231 Stowage, refer to Storage

compartments 116 Street, entering,

navigation 135 Suitable mobile phones 188 Summer tires, refer to Wheels

and tires 223 Surround 156 SVCD 168 SW, waveband 157 Switches, refer to Cockpit 12 Switching off engine 63 Switching off the engine start/stop button 61 Switching on audio 154 CD player 154 radio 154

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

280

Reference Everything from A to Z

Switching the air conditioning on and off 109

Switching the entertainment audio output on/off 154

Switch-on times of parked car ventilation, preselecting 110

Symbols 4 status information 23

T Tachometer 76 Tailgate, refer to Trunk lid 37 Tail lamp, refer to Tail

lamps 246 replacing bulb 247 Tail lamps 246 replacing bulb 247 Tank contents, refer to

Capacities 259 Tasks 207 Technical data 258 dimensions 258 Technical modifications 5 Telephone 188 hands-free system 197 phone book 195 received calls 196 redialing 196 voice commands 197 Telephone, installation

location, refer to Center armrest 115

TeleService 213 Teleservice Diagnosis 214 Temperature display outside temperature 75 outside temperature

warning 75 setting the units 80 Tempomat, refer to Cruise

control 73 Text message 205 Thigh support 50 Third brake lamp, refer to

Center brake lamp 247

Three-point safety belt 54 Through-loading system 117 Tilt alarm sensor 39 Tilt function, passenger side

mirror 56 Timer, refer to Preselecting

switch-on times 110 Tire inflation pressure 223 loss 92, 93 Tire pressure monitoring,

refer to Flat Tire Monitor 91 Tire Pressure Monitor

TPM 92 resetting the system 93 system limitations 93 warning lamp 94 Tire puncture, refer to Flat Tire

Monitor 92 Tire Quality Grading 228 Tires age 228, 230 air loss 94 breaking in 124 changing, refer to Changing

wheels 248 condition 229 damage 229 inflation pressure 223 labels 228 minimum tread depth 229 new tires 230 pressure monitoring, refer to

Flat Tire Monitor 91 pressure monitoring, refer to

Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 92

puncture 92 retreaded 230 run-flat tires 231 size 228 wear indicators, refer to

Minimum tread depth 229 winter tires 231 TMC station, refer to Traffic

bulletins 147

Tone control 155 middle setting 156 Tools, refer to Onboard

vehicle tool kit 243 Top 50 in music

collection 175 Tow bar 253 Tow fitting 252 Tow fittings for tow-starting

and towing away 252 Towing 252 car with automatic

transmission 252 methods 253 with 7-gear Sport automatic

transmission with double clutch 253

Towing and tow-starting 252 Town/city, for navigation 134 Tow rope 254 Tow-starting 252 TPM, refer to Tire Pressure

Monitor 92 Track selecting on CD 166 Traction control, refer to

Dynamic Stability Control DSC 89

Traffic bulletins categories 149 Traffic bulletins, filtering 149 Traffic bulletins for

navigation 147 during destination

guidance 149 Traffic bulletins in navigation screen display in the map

view 148 Traffic congestion displaying traffic

bulletins 147 refer to Route, bypassing

segments 144

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

281

Everything from A to Z Reference

Transmission 7-gear Sport automatic

transmission with double clutch 66

automatic transmission with Steptronic 64

idle position 67 launch control 70 manually unlocking parking

lock 69 manual transmission 64 reverse gear 67 Transporting children

safely 58 Transport securing devices,

refer to Securing cargo 128 Tread depth, refer to Minimum

tire tread 229 Trip, deleting 142 Trip, storing 142 Trip-distance counter, refer to

Trip odometer 75 Triple turn signal activation 71 Trip odometer 75 Trips, changing 142 Trunk capacity 259 comfort access 41 enlarging, refer to Through-

loading system 117 lamp, refer to Interior

lamps 104 opening from outside 38 Trunk lid 37 comfort access 41 emergency release 38 opening from outside 38 unlocking with remote

control 35 Trunk net, refer to Securing

cargo 128

Turning circle, refer to Dimensions 258

Turn signal 71 indicator lamp 14 Turn signals replacing bulbs 246 triple turn signal 71 Tying down loads, refer to

Cargo loading 128

U Underbody protection, refer to

Caring for your vehicle 239 Uniform Tire Quality Grading/

UTQR 228 Units average fuel

consumption 80 Units of measure temperature 80 Universal garage door opener,

refer to Integrated universal remote control 111

Unlatching, refer to Unlocking 34

Unlocking from inside 37 from outside 34 trunk lid 41 without remote control, refer

to Comfort Access 40 Unlocking without a key, refer

to Comfort Access 40 Updating software 184 Updating the navigation

data 132 USB audio interface 178 USB interface 115 Using contact data 208

V VCD 168 Vehicle battery 248 breaking in 124 cargo loading 127 decommissioning, refer to

Vehicle storage 242 dimensions 258 identification number, refer

to Engine compartment 232 parking 63 weight 259 Vehicle equipment 5 Vehicle jack 248 Vehicle storage 242 Ventilation 109 draft-free 109 Ventilation when parked, refer

to Parked car ventilation 110 Vents, refer to Ventilation 109 Video menu 168 Video playback 168, 180 Voice, refer to Destination

guidance through voice instructions 145

Voice commands overview 27 short commands 260 telephone 197 Voice instructions from

navigation system 145 repeating 145 switching on/off 145 volume 145 Voice phone book 198 Volume 154 audio sources 154 fuel tank, refer to

Capacities 259 mobile phone 193 voice instructions 145 Volume compensation, tone

control 156

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

282

Reference Everything from A to Z

W Warning and indicator

lamps 15 Warning messages, refer to

Check Control 84 Warning triangle 251 Washer fluid 72 Washer fluid filler neck 73 Waste tray, refer to

Ashtray 116 Water on roads, refer to

Driving through water 126 Water penetration 239 Waveband on radio 157 Wear indicators in tires, refer

to Minimum tread depth 229 Weights 259 Welcome lamps 101 Wheelbase, refer to

Dimensions 258 Wheels, new 230 Wheels and tires 223 Width, refer to

Dimensions 258 Wind deflector 47 Windows 42 convenient opening and

closing 34 convenient opening and

closing with Comfort Access 40

opening, closing 42 pinch protection system 43 Window washer system 71 Windshield cleaning 72 defrosting and removing

condensation 109 Windshield wash filling capacity, reservoir 259

Windshield washer reservoir, refer to Washer fluid filler neck 73

Windshield washer system spray nozzles 72 washer fluid 73 Windshield wiper blades,

changing 243 Windshield wipers, refer to

Wiper system 71 Winter tires 231 setting speed limit 86 storage 231 Wiper blade replacement 243 Wiper system 71 Wrench/screwdriver, refer to

Onboard vehicle tool kit 243

X Xenon lamps replacing bulb 244

Online Edition for Part no. 01402911223 - 06/13 BMW AG

01 40

2 91

1 22

3 u

e iD

r

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the 1 Series BMW works, you can view and download the BMW 128i Convertible 1 Series 2013 Owner's Manual on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the Owner's Manual for BMW 1 Series as well as other BMW manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The Owner's Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a BMW 1 Series. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the BMW 128i Convertible 1 Series 2013 Owner's Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This BMW 128i Convertible 1 Series 2013 Owner's Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download BMW 128i Convertible 1 Series 2013 Owner's Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print BMW 128i Convertible 1 Series 2013 Owner's Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the BMW 128i Convertible 1 Series 2013 Owner's Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.